Rename main window nt* related files to equivalent tq*. The file

"ntqsession.h" was totally unnecessary and has been removed.

Signed-off-by: Michele Calgaro <[email protected]>

72 files changed, 1282 insertions, 1282 deletions

diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqaccel.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqaccel.3qt
index 423ecd6da..28420add5 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqaccel.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqaccel.3qt
@@ -102,13 +102,13 @@ The QAccel class handles keyboard accelerator and shortcut keys.
 .PP
 A keyboard accelerator triggers an action when a certain key combination is pressed. The accelerator handles all keyboard activity for all the children of one top-level widget, so it is not affected by the keyboard focus.
 .PP
-In most cases, you will not need to use this class directly. Use the QAction class to create actions with accelerators that can be used in both menus and toolbars. If you're only interested in menus use QMenuData::insertItem() or QMenuData::setAccel() to make accelerators for operations that are also available on menus. Many widgets automatically generate accelerators, such as QButton, QGroupBox, QLabel (with QLabel::setBuddy()), QMenuBar and QTabBar. Example:
+In most cases, you will not need to use this class directly. Use the TQAction class to create actions with accelerators that can be used in both menus and toolbars. If you're only interested in menus use TQMenuData::insertItem() or TQMenuData::setAccel() to make accelerators for operations that are also available on menus. Many widgets automatically generate accelerators, such as QButton, QGroupBox, QLabel (with QLabel::setBuddy()), TQMenuBar and QTabBar. Example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
         QPushButton p( "&Exit", parent ); // automatic shortcut ALT+Key_E
 .br
-        QPopupMenu *fileMenu = new fileMenu( parent );
+        TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new fileMenu( parent );
 .br
         fileMenu->insertItem( "Undo", parent, TQ_SLOT(undo()), CTRL+Key_Z );
 .br
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Example:
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-See also QKeyEvent, TQWidget::keyPressEvent(), QMenuData::setAccel(), QButton::accel, QLabel::setBuddy(), QKeySequence, GUI Design Handbook: Keyboard Shortcuts, and Miscellaneous Classes.
+See also QKeyEvent, TQWidget::keyPressEvent(), TQMenuData::setAccel(), QButton::accel, QLabel::setBuddy(), QKeySequence, GUI Design Handbook: Keyboard Shortcuts, and Miscellaneous Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "QAccel::QAccel ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 Constructs a QAccel object called \fIname\fR, with parent \fIparent\fR. The accelerator operates on \fIparent\fR.
@@ -260,9 +260,9 @@ Sets a What's This help text for the accelerator item \fIid\fR to \fItext\fR.
 .PP
 The text will be shown when the application is in What's This mode and the user hits the accelerator key.
 .PP
-To set What's This help on a menu item (with or without an accelerator key), use QMenuData::setWhatsThis().
+To set What's This help on a menu item (with or without an accelerator key), use TQMenuData::setWhatsThis().
 .PP
-See also whatsThis(), QWhatsThis::inWhatsThisMode(), QMenuData::setWhatsThis(), and QAction::whatsThis.
+See also whatsThis(), QWhatsThis::inWhatsThisMode(), TQMenuData::setWhatsThis(), and TQAction::whatsThis.
 .SH "QKeySequence QAccel::shortcutKey ( const TQString & str )\fC [static]\fR"
 Returns the shortcut key sequence for \fIstr\fR, or an invalid key sequence (0) if \fIstr\fR has no shortcut sequence.
 .PP
@@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ This function is typically used with tr(), so that accelerator keys can be repla
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-    QPopupMenu *file = new QPopupMenu( this );
+    TQPopupMenu *file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
 .br
     file->insertItem( p1, tr("&Open..."), this, TQ_SLOT(open()),
 .br
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqaction.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqaction.3qt
index 9ca76d07a..4ff66ae69 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqaction.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqaction.3qt
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 '\" t
-.TH QAction 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
+.TH TQAction 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
 .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.  See the
 .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license
 .\" statement.
@@ -7,36 +7,36 @@
 .ad l
 .nh
 .SH NAME
-QAction \- Abstract user interface action that can appear both in menus and tool bars
+TQAction \- Abstract user interface action that can appear both in menus and tool bars
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fC#include <ntqaction.h>\fR
+\fC#include <tqaction.h>\fR
 .PP
 Inherits TQObject.
 .PP
-Inherited by QActionGroup.
+Inherited by TQActionGroup.
 .PP
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQAction\fR ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQAction\fR ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQAction\fR ( const TQString & menuText, QKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQAction\fR ( const TQString & menuText, QKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQAction\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, QKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQAction\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, QKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QAction ( const TQString & text, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, QKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
+.BI "TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, QKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QAction ( const TQString & text, const TQString & menuText, QKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
+.BI "TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQString & menuText, QKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QAction ( TQObject * parent, const char * name, bool toggle )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
+.BI "TQAction ( TQObject * parent, const char * name, bool toggle )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fB~QAction\fR ()"
+.BI "\fB~TQAction\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetIconSet\fR ( const TQIconSet & )"
@@ -174,25 +174,25 @@ Inherited by QActionGroup.
 .BI "virtual void \fBaddedTo\fR ( TQWidget * actionWidget, TQWidget * container )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBaddedTo\fR ( int index, QPopupMenu * menu )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBaddedTo\fR ( int index, TQPopupMenu * menu )"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The QAction class provides an abstract user interface action that can appear both in menus and tool bars.
+The TQAction class provides an abstract user interface action that can appear both in menus and tool bars.
 .PP
 In GUI applications many commands can be invoked via a menu option, a toolbar button and a keyboard accelerator. Since the same action must be performed regardless of how the action was invoked, and since the menu and toolbar should be kept in sync, it is useful to represent a command as an \fIaction\fR. An action can be added to a menu and a toolbar and will automatically keep them in sync. For example, if the user presses a Bold toolbar button the Bold menu item will automatically be checked.
 .PP
-A QAction may contain an icon, a menu text, an accelerator, a status text, a whats this text and a tool tip. Most of these can be set in the constructor. They can also be set independently with setIconSet(), setText(), setMenuText(), setToolTip(), setStatusTip(), setWhatsThis() and setAccel().
+A TQAction may contain an icon, a menu text, an accelerator, a status text, a whats this text and a tool tip. Most of these can be set in the constructor. They can also be set independently with setIconSet(), setText(), setMenuText(), setToolTip(), setStatusTip(), setWhatsThis() and setAccel().
 .PP
 An action may be a toggle action e.g. a Bold toolbar button, or a command action, e.g. 'Open File' to invoke an open file dialog. Toggle actions emit the toggled() signal when their state changes. Both command and toggle actions emit the activated() signal when they are invoked. Use setToggleAction() to set an action's toggled status. To see if an action is a toggle action use isToggleAction(). A toggle action may be "on", isOn() returns TRUE, or "off", isOn() returns FALSE.
 .PP
 Actions are added to widgets (menus or toolbars) using addTo(), and removed using removeFrom().
 .PP
-Once a QAction has been created it should be added to the relevant menu and toolbar and then connected to the slot which will perform the action. For example:
+Once a TQAction has been created it should be added to the relevant menu and toolbar and then connected to the slot which will perform the action. For example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        fileOpenAction = new QAction( QPixmap( fileopen ), "&Open...",
+        fileOpenAction = new TQAction( QPixmap( fileopen ), "&Open...",
 .br
                                       CTRL+Key_O, this, "open" );
 .br
@@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ We create a "File Save" action with a menu text of "&Save" and \fICtrl+S\fR as t
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QToolBar * fileTools = new QToolBar( this, "file operations" );
+        TQToolBar * fileTools = new TQToolBar( this, "file operations" );
 .fi
 .PP
 .nf
@@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ We create a "File Save" action with a menu text of "&Save" and \fICtrl+S\fR as t
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QPopupMenu * file = new QPopupMenu( this );
+        TQPopupMenu * file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
 .br
         menuBar()->insertItem( "&File", file );
 .fi
@@ -231,18 +231,18 @@ To prevent recursion, don't create an action as a child of a widget that the act
 .PP
 See also Main Window and Related Classes and Basic Widgets.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "QAction::QAction ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
+.SH "TQAction::TQAction ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 Constructs an action called \fIname\fR with parent \fIparent\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIparent\fR is a QActionGroup, the new action inserts itself into \fIparent\fR.
+If \fIparent\fR is a TQActionGroup, the new action inserts itself into \fIparent\fR.
 .PP
 For accelerators and status tips to work, \fIparent\fR must either be a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR To prevent recursion, don't create an action as a child of a widget that the action is later added to.
-.SH "QAction::QAction ( const TQString & menuText, QKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
+.SH "TQAction::TQAction ( const TQString & menuText, QKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 This constructor results in an icon-less action with the the menu text \fImenuText\fR and keyboard accelerator \fIaccel\fR. It is a child of \fIparent\fR and called \fIname\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIparent\fR is a QActionGroup, the action automatically becomes a member of it.
+If \fIparent\fR is a TQActionGroup, the action automatically becomes a member of it.
 .PP
 For accelerators and status tips to work, \fIparent\fR must either be a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
 .PP
@@ -251,10 +251,10 @@ The action uses a stripped version of \fImenuText\fR (e.g. "&Menu Option..." bec
 Call setToggleAction(TRUE) to make the action a toggle action.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR To prevent recursion, don't create an action as a child of a widget that the action is later added to.
-.SH "QAction::QAction ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, QKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
+.SH "TQAction::TQAction ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, QKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 This constructor creates an action with the following properties: the icon or iconset \fIicon\fR, the menu text \fImenuText\fR and keyboard accelerator \fIaccel\fR. It is a child of \fIparent\fR and called \fIname\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIparent\fR is a QActionGroup, the action automatically becomes a member of it.
+If \fIparent\fR is a TQActionGroup, the action automatically becomes a member of it.
 .PP
 For accelerators and status tips to work, \fIparent\fR must either be a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
 .PP
@@ -263,126 +263,126 @@ The action uses a stripped version of \fImenuText\fR (e.g. "&Menu Option..." bec
 Call setToggleAction(TRUE) to make the action a toggle action.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR To prevent recursion, don't create an action as a child of a widget that the action is later added to.
-.SH "QAction::QAction ( const TQString & text, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, QKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE )"
+.SH "TQAction::TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, QKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
 This constructor creates an action with the following properties: the description \fItext\fR, the icon or iconset \fIicon\fR, the menu text \fImenuText\fR and keyboard accelerator \fIaccel\fR. It is a child of \fIparent\fR and called \fIname\fR. If \fItoggle\fR is TRUE the action will be a toggle action, otherwise it will be a command action.
 .PP
-If \fIparent\fR is a QActionGroup, the action automatically becomes a member of it.
+If \fIparent\fR is a TQActionGroup, the action automatically becomes a member of it.
 .PP
 For accelerators and status tips to work, \fIparent\fR must either be a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
 .PP
 The \fItext\fR and \fIaccel\fR will be used for tool tips and status tips unless you provide specific text for these using setToolTip() and setStatusTip().
-.SH "QAction::QAction ( const TQString & text, const TQString & menuText, QKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE )"
+.SH "TQAction::TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQString & menuText, QKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
 This constructor results in an icon-less action with the description \fItext\fR, the menu text \fImenuText\fR and the keyboard accelerator \fIaccel\fR. Its parent is \fIparent\fR and it is called \fIname\fR. If \fItoggle\fR is TRUE the action will be a toggle action, otherwise it will be a command action.
 .PP
-The action automatically becomes a member of \fIparent\fR if \fIparent\fR is a QActionGroup.
+The action automatically becomes a member of \fIparent\fR if \fIparent\fR is a TQActionGroup.
 .PP
 For accelerators and status tips to work, \fIparent\fR must either be a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
 .PP
 The \fItext\fR and \fIaccel\fR will be used for tool tips and status tips unless you provide specific text for these using setToolTip() and setStatusTip().
-.SH "QAction::QAction ( TQObject * parent, const char * name, bool toggle )"
+.SH "TQAction::TQAction ( TQObject * parent, const char * name, bool toggle )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
 Constructs an action called \fIname\fR with parent \fIparent\fR.
 .PP
 If \fItoggle\fR is TRUE the action will be a toggle action, otherwise it will be a command action.
 .PP
-If \fIparent\fR is a QActionGroup, the new action inserts itself into \fIparent\fR.
+If \fIparent\fR is a TQActionGroup, the new action inserts itself into \fIparent\fR.
 .PP
 For accelerators and status tips to work, \fIparent\fR must either be a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
-.SH "QAction::~QAction ()"
+.SH "TQAction::~TQAction ()"
 Destroys the object and frees allocated resources.
-.SH "QKeySequence QAction::accel () const"
+.SH "QKeySequence TQAction::accel () const"
 Returns the action's accelerator key. See the "accel" property for details.
-.SH "void QAction::activate ()\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQAction::activate ()\fC [slot]\fR"
 Activates the action and executes all connected slots. This only works for actions that are not toggle action.
 .PP
 See also toggle().
-.SH "void QAction::activated ()\fC [signal]\fR"
+.SH "void TQAction::activated ()\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when an action is activated by the user, e.g. when the user clicks a menu option or a toolbar button or presses an action's accelerator key combination.
 .PP
 Connect to this signal for command actions. Connect to the toggled() signal for toggle actions.
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l action/application.cpp, chart/chartform.cpp, and themes/themes.cpp.
-.SH "bool QAction::addTo ( TQWidget * w )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "bool TQAction::addTo ( TQWidget * w )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Adds this action to widget \fIw\fR.
 .PP
-Currently actions may be added to QToolBar and QPopupMenu widgets.
+Currently actions may be added to TQToolBar and TQPopupMenu widgets.
 .PP
 An action added to a tool bar is automatically displayed as a tool button; an action added to a pop up menu appears as a menu option.
 .PP
-addTo() returns TRUE if the action was added successfully and FALSE otherwise. (If \fIw\fR is not a QToolBar or QPopupMenu the action will not be added and FALSE will be returned.)
+addTo() returns TRUE if the action was added successfully and FALSE otherwise. (If \fIw\fR is not a TQToolBar or TQPopupMenu the action will not be added and FALSE will be returned.)
 .PP
 See also removeFrom().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l action/application.cpp, action/toggleaction/toggleaction.cpp, and chart/chartform.cpp.
 .PP
-Reimplemented in QActionGroup.
-.SH "void QAction::addedTo ( TQWidget * actionWidget, TQWidget * container )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+Reimplemented in TQActionGroup.
+.SH "void TQAction::addedTo ( TQWidget * actionWidget, TQWidget * container )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This function is called from the addTo() function when it has created a widget (\fIactionWidget\fR) for the action in the \fIcontainer\fR.
-.SH "void QAction::addedTo ( int index, QPopupMenu * menu )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQAction::addedTo ( int index, TQPopupMenu * menu )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 This function is called from the addTo() function when it has created a menu item at the index position \fIindex\fR in the popup menu \fImenu\fR.
-.SH "TQIconSet QAction::iconSet () const"
+.SH "TQIconSet TQAction::iconSet () const"
 Returns the action's icon. See the "iconSet" property for details.
-.SH "bool QAction::isEnabled () const"
+.SH "bool TQAction::isEnabled () const"
 Returns TRUE if the action is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "enabled" property for details.
-.SH "bool QAction::isOn () const"
+.SH "bool TQAction::isOn () const"
 Returns TRUE if a toggle action is on; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "on" property for details.
-.SH "bool QAction::isToggleAction () const"
+.SH "bool TQAction::isToggleAction () const"
 Returns TRUE if the action is a toggle action; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "toggleAction" property for details.
-.SH "bool QAction::isVisible () const"
+.SH "bool TQAction::isVisible () const"
 Returns TRUE if the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars); otherwise returns FALSE. See the "visible" property for details.
-.SH "TQString QAction::menuText () const"
+.SH "TQString TQAction::menuText () const"
 Returns the action's menu text. See the "menuText" property for details.
-.SH "bool QAction::removeFrom ( TQWidget * w )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "bool TQAction::removeFrom ( TQWidget * w )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Removes the action from widget \fIw\fR.
 .PP
 Returns TRUE if the action was removed successfully; otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 See also addTo().
-.SH "void QAction::setAccel ( const QKeySequence & key )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQAction::setAccel ( const QKeySequence & key )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the action's accelerator key to \fIkey\fR. See the "accel" property for details.
-.SH "void QAction::setDisabled ( bool disable )\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQAction::setDisabled ( bool disable )\fC [slot]\fR"
 Disables the action if \fIdisable\fR is TRUE; otherwise enables the action.
 .PP
 See the enabled documentation for more information.
-.SH "void QAction::setEnabled ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQAction::setEnabled ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Sets whether the action is enabled. See the "enabled" property for details.
-.SH "void QAction::setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQAction::setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the action's icon. See the "iconSet" property for details.
-.SH "void QAction::setMenuText ( const TQString & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQAction::setMenuText ( const TQString & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the action's menu text. See the "menuText" property for details.
-.SH "void QAction::setOn ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQAction::setOn ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Sets whether a toggle action is on. See the "on" property for details.
-.SH "void QAction::setStatusTip ( const TQString & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQAction::setStatusTip ( const TQString & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the action's status tip. See the "statusTip" property for details.
-.SH "void QAction::setText ( const TQString & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQAction::setText ( const TQString & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the action's descriptive text. See the "text" property for details.
-.SH "void QAction::setToggleAction ( bool )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQAction::setToggleAction ( bool )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets whether the action is a toggle action. See the "toggleAction" property for details.
-.SH "void QAction::setToolTip ( const TQString & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQAction::setToolTip ( const TQString & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the action's tool tip. See the "toolTip" property for details.
-.SH "void QAction::setVisible ( bool )\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQAction::setVisible ( bool )\fC [slot]\fR"
 Sets whether the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars). See the "visible" property for details.
-.SH "void QAction::setWhatsThis ( const TQString & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQAction::setWhatsThis ( const TQString & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the action's "What's This?" help text. See the "whatsThis" property for details.
-.SH "TQString QAction::statusTip () const"
+.SH "TQString TQAction::statusTip () const"
 Returns the action's status tip. See the "statusTip" property for details.
-.SH "TQString QAction::text () const"
+.SH "TQString TQAction::text () const"
 Returns the action's descriptive text. See the "text" property for details.
-.SH "void QAction::toggle ()\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQAction::toggle ()\fC [slot]\fR"
 Toggles the state of a toggle action.
 .PP
 See also on, activate(), toggled(), and toggleAction.
-.SH "void QAction::toggled ( bool on )\fC [signal]\fR"
-This signal is emitted when a toggle action changes state; command actions and QActionGroups don't emit toggled().
+.SH "void TQAction::toggled ( bool on )\fC [signal]\fR"
+This signal is emitted when a toggle action changes state; command actions and TQActionGroups don't emit toggled().
 .PP
 The \fIon\fR argument denotes the new state: If \fIon\fR is TRUE the toggle action is switched on, and if \fIon\fR is FALSE the toggle action is switched off.
 .PP
@@ -390,12 +390,12 @@ To trigger a user command depending on whether a toggle action has been switched
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QMainWindow * window = new QMainWindow;
+        TQMainWindow * window = new TQMainWindow;
 .fi
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QAction * labelonoffaction = new QAction( window, "labelonoff" );
+        TQAction * labelonoffaction = new TQAction( window, "labelonoff" );
 .fi
 .PP
 .nf
@@ -408,9 +408,9 @@ To trigger a user command depending on whether a toggle action has been switched
 See also activated(), toggleAction, and on.
 .PP
 Example: action/toggleaction/toggleaction.cpp.
-.SH "TQString QAction::toolTip () const"
+.SH "TQString TQAction::toolTip () const"
 Returns the action's tool tip. See the "toolTip" property for details.
-.SH "TQString QAction::whatsThis () const"
+.SH "TQString TQAction::whatsThis () const"
 Returns the action's "What's This?" help text. See the "whatsThis" property for details.
 .SS "Property Documentation"
 .SH "QKeySequence accel"
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ This property holds whether the action is enabled.
 .PP
 Disabled actions can't be chosen by the user. They don't disappear from the menu/tool bar but are displayed in a way which indicates that they are unavailable, e.g. they might be displayed grayed out.
 .PP
-What's this? help on disabled actions is still available provided the QAction::whatsThis property is set.
+What's this? help on disabled actions is still available provided the TQAction::whatsThis property is set.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setEnabled() and get this property's value with isEnabled().
 .SH "TQIconSet iconSet"
@@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ Set this property's value with setMenuText() and get this property's value with
 .SH "bool on"
 This property holds whether a toggle action is on.
 .PP
-This property is always on (TRUE) for command actions and QActionGroups; setOn() has no effect on them. For action's where isToggleAction() is TRUE, this property's default value is off (FALSE).
+This property is always on (TRUE) for command actions and TQActionGroups; setOn() has no effect on them. For action's where isToggleAction() is TRUE, this property's default value is off (FALSE).
 .PP
 See also toggleAction.
 .PP
@@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ Set this property's value with setStatusTip() and get this property's value with
 .SH "TQString text"
 This property holds the action's descriptive text.
 .PP
-If QMainWindow::usesTextLabel is TRUE, the text appears as a label in the relevant tool button. It also serves as the default text in menus and tool tips if these have not been specifically defined. There is no default text.
+If TQMainWindow::usesTextLabel is TRUE, the text appears as a label in the relevant tool button. It also serves as the default text in menus and tool tips if these have not been specifically defined. There is no default text.
 .PP
 See also menuText, toolTip, and statusTip.
 .PP
@@ -478,7 +478,7 @@ This property holds whether the action is a toggle action.
 .PP
 A toggle action is one which has an on/off state. For example a Bold toolbar button is either on or off. An action which is not a toggle action is a command action; a command action is simply executed, e.g. file save. This property's default is FALSE.
 .PP
-In some situations, the state of one toggle action should depend on the state of others. For example, "Left Align", "Center" and" Right Align" toggle actions are mutually exclusive. To achieve exclusive toggling, add the relevant toggle actions to a QActionGroup with the QActionGroup::exclusive property set to TRUE.
+In some situations, the state of one toggle action should depend on the state of others. For example, "Left Align", "Center" and" Right Align" toggle actions are mutually exclusive. To achieve exclusive toggling, add the relevant toggle actions to a TQActionGroup with the TQActionGroup::exclusive property set to TRUE.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setToggleAction() and get this property's value with isToggleAction().
 .SH "TQString toolTip"
@@ -511,7 +511,7 @@ See also QWhatsThis.
 Set this property's value with setWhatsThis() and get this property's value with whatsThis().
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqaction.html
+.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqaction.html
 .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html
 .SH COPYRIGHT
 Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com.  See the
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqactiongroup.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqactiongroup.3qt
index 7ef50bdc9..51e564a14 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqactiongroup.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqactiongroup.3qt
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 '\" t
-.TH QActionGroup 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
+.TH TQActionGroup 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
 .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.  See the
 .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license
 .\" statement.
@@ -7,22 +7,22 @@
 .ad l
 .nh
 .SH NAME
-QActionGroup \- Groups actions together
+TQActionGroup \- Groups actions together
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fC#include <ntqaction.h>\fR
+\fC#include <tqaction.h>\fR
 .PP
-Inherits QAction.
+Inherits TQAction.
 .PP
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQActionGroup\fR ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQActionGroup\fR ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQActionGroup\fR ( TQObject * parent, const char * name, bool exclusive )"
+.BI "\fBTQActionGroup\fR ( TQObject * parent, const char * name, bool exclusive )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fB~QActionGroup\fR ()"
+.BI "\fB~TQActionGroup\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBsetExclusive\fR ( bool )"
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ Inherits QAction.
 .BI "bool \fBisExclusive\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBadd\fR ( QAction * action )"
+.BI "void \fBadd\fR ( TQAction * action )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBaddSeparator\fR ()"
@@ -46,13 +46,13 @@ Inherits QAction.
 .BI "bool \fBusesDropDown\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void insert ( QAction * a )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
+.BI "void insert ( TQAction * a )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SS "Signals"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBselected\fR ( QAction * )"
+.BI "void \fBselected\fR ( TQAction * )"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SS "Properties"
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Inherits QAction.
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The QActionGroup class groups actions together.
+The TQActionGroup class groups actions together.
 .PP
 In some situations it is useful to group actions together. For example, if you have a left justify action, a right justify action and a center action, only one of these actions should be active at any one time, and one simple way of achieving this is to group the actions together in an action group.
 .PP
@@ -75,16 +75,16 @@ Here's an example from examples/textedit:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QActionGroup *grp = new QActionGroup( this );
+        TQActionGroup *grp = new TQActionGroup( this );
 .br
-        connect( grp, TQ_SIGNAL( selected( QAction* ) ), this, TQ_SLOT( textAlign( QAction* ) ) );
+        connect( grp, TQ_SIGNAL( selected( TQAction* ) ), this, TQ_SLOT( textAlign( TQAction* ) ) );
 .fi
 .PP
 Here we create a new action group. Since the action group is exclusive by default, only one of the actions in the group is ever active at any one time. We then connect the group's selected() signal to our textAlign() slot.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        actionAlignLeft = new QAction( QPixmap::fromMimeSource( "textleft.xpm" ), tr( "&Left" ), CTRL + Key_L, grp, "textLeft" );
+        actionAlignLeft = new TQAction( QPixmap::fromMimeSource( "textleft.xpm" ), tr( "&Left" ), CTRL + Key_L, grp, "textLeft" );
 .br
         actionAlignLeft->setToggleAction( TRUE );
 .fi
@@ -101,27 +101,27 @@ Actions can be added to an action group using add(), but normally they are added
 .PP
 See also Main Window and Related Classes and Basic Widgets.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "QActionGroup::QActionGroup ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
+.SH "TQActionGroup::TQActionGroup ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 Constructs an action group called \fIname\fR, with parent \fIparent\fR.
 .PP
 The action group is exclusive by default. Call setExclusive(FALSE) to make the action group non-exclusive.
-.SH "QActionGroup::QActionGroup ( TQObject * parent, const char * name, bool exclusive )"
+.SH "TQActionGroup::TQActionGroup ( TQObject * parent, const char * name, bool exclusive )"
 Constructs an action group called \fIname\fR, with parent \fIparent\fR.
 .PP
 If \fIexclusive\fR is TRUE only one toggle action in the group will ever be active.
 .PP
 See also exclusive.
-.SH "QActionGroup::~QActionGroup ()"
+.SH "TQActionGroup::~TQActionGroup ()"
 Destroys the object and frees allocated resources.
-.SH "void QActionGroup::add ( QAction * action )"
+.SH "void TQActionGroup::add ( TQAction * action )"
 Adds action \fIaction\fR to this group.
 .PP
 Normally an action is added to a group by creating it with the group as parent, so this function is not usually used.
 .PP
 See also addTo().
-.SH "void QActionGroup::addSeparator ()"
+.SH "void TQActionGroup::addSeparator ()"
 Adds a separator to the group.
-.SH "bool QActionGroup::addTo ( TQWidget * w )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "bool TQActionGroup::addTo ( TQWidget * w )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Adds this action group to the widget \fIw\fR.
 .PP
 If isExclusive() is FALSE or usesDropDown() is FALSE, the actions within the group are added to the widget individually. For example, if the widget is a menu, the actions will appear as individual menu options, and if the widget is a toolbar, the actions will appear as toolbar buttons.
@@ -134,27 +134,27 @@ See also exclusive, usesDropDown, and removeFrom().
 .PP
 Example: themes/themes.cpp.
 .PP
-Reimplemented from QAction.
-.SH "void QActionGroup::insert ( QAction * a )"
+Reimplemented from TQAction.
+.SH "void TQActionGroup::insert ( TQAction * a )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
 Use add() instead, or better still create the action with the action group as its parent.
-.SH "bool QActionGroup::isExclusive () const"
+.SH "bool TQActionGroup::isExclusive () const"
 Returns TRUE if the action group does exclusive toggling; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "exclusive" property for details.
-.SH "void QActionGroup::selected ( QAction * )\fC [signal]\fR"
+.SH "void TQActionGroup::selected ( TQAction * )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted from exclusive groups when toggle actions change state.
 .PP
 The argument is the action whose state changed to "on".
 .PP
-See also exclusive, on, and QAction::toggled().
+See also exclusive, on, and TQAction::toggled().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l chart/chartform.cpp and textedit/textedit.cpp.
-.SH "void QActionGroup::setExclusive ( bool )"
+.SH "void TQActionGroup::setExclusive ( bool )"
 Sets whether the action group does exclusive toggling. See the "exclusive" property for details.
-.SH "void QActionGroup::setUsesDropDown ( bool enable )"
+.SH "void TQActionGroup::setUsesDropDown ( bool enable )"
 Sets whether the group's actions are displayed in a subwidget of the widgets the action group is added to to \fIenable\fR. See the "usesDropDown" property for details.
-.SH "bool QActionGroup::usesDropDown () const"
+.SH "bool TQActionGroup::usesDropDown () const"
 Returns TRUE if the group's actions are displayed in a subwidget of the widgets the action group is added to; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "usesDropDown" property for details.
 .SS "Property Documentation"
 .SH "bool exclusive"
@@ -162,26 +162,26 @@ This property holds whether the action group does exclusive toggling.
 .PP
 If exclusive is TRUE only one toggle action in the action group can ever be active at any one time. If the user chooses another toggle action in the group the one they chose becomes active and the one that was active becomes inactive.
 .PP
-See also QAction::toggleAction.
+See also TQAction::toggleAction.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setExclusive() and get this property's value with isExclusive().
 .SH "bool usesDropDown"
 This property holds whether the group's actions are displayed in a subwidget of the widgets the action group is added to.
 .PP
-Exclusive action groups added to a toolbar display their actions in a combobox with the action's QAction::text and QAction::iconSet properties shown. Non-exclusive groups are represented by a tool button showing their QAction::iconSet and -- depending on QMainWindow::usesTextLabel() -- text() property.
+Exclusive action groups added to a toolbar display their actions in a combobox with the action's TQAction::text and TQAction::iconSet properties shown. Non-exclusive groups are represented by a tool button showing their TQAction::iconSet and -- depending on TQMainWindow::usesTextLabel() -- text() property.
 .PP
 In a popup menu the member actions are displayed in a submenu.
 .PP
 Changing usesDropDown only affects \fIsubsequent\fR calls to addTo().
 .PP
-Note that setting this property for actions in a combobox causes calls to their QAction::setVisible(), QAction::setEnabled(), and QAction::setDisabled() functions to have no effect.
+Note that setting this property for actions in a combobox causes calls to their TQAction::setVisible(), TQAction::setEnabled(), and TQAction::setDisabled() functions to have no effect.
 .PP
 This property's default is FALSE.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setUsesDropDown() and get this property's value with usesDropDown().
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/qactiongroup.html
+.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqactiongroup.html
 .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html
 .SH COPYRIGHT
 Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com.  See the
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqapplication.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqapplication.3qt
index e6d397ada..087c53964 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqapplication.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqapplication.3qt
@@ -139,10 +139,10 @@ Inherits TQObject.
 .BI "TQString \fBsessionKey\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBcommitData\fR ( QSessionManager & sm )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBcommitData\fR ( TQSessionManager & sm )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBsaveState\fR ( QSessionManager & sm )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBsaveState\fR ( TQSessionManager & sm )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBwakeUpGuiThread\fR ()"
@@ -325,10 +325,10 @@ Inherits TQObject.
 .BI "int \fBwheelScrollLines\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBsetGlobalStrut\fR ( const QSize & strut )"
+.BI "void \fBsetGlobalStrut\fR ( const TQSize & strut )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBglobalStrut\fR ()"
+.BI "TQSize \fBglobalStrut\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBsetLibraryPaths\fR ( const TQStringList & paths )"
@@ -631,7 +631,7 @@ See also activePopupWidget() and topLevelWidgets().
 .SH "TQWidget * QApplication::activePopupWidget ()\fC [static]\fR"
 Returns the active popup widget.
 .PP
-A popup widget is a special top level widget that sets the WType_Popup widget flag, e.g. the QPopupMenu widget. When the application opens a popup widget, all events are sent to the popup. Normal widgets and modal widgets cannot be accessed before the popup widget is closed.
+A popup widget is a special top level widget that sets the WType_Popup widget flag, e.g. the TQPopupMenu widget. When the application opens a popup widget, all events are sent to the popup. Normal widgets and modal widgets cannot be accessed before the popup widget is closed.
 .PP
 Only other popup widgets may be opened when a popup widget is shown. The popup widgets are organized in a stack. This function returns the active popup widget at the top of the stack.
 .PP
@@ -776,7 +776,7 @@ This function is particularly useful for applications with many top-level window
 .br
     // the "Quit" menu entry should try to close all windows
 .br
-    QPopupMenu* file = new QPopupMenu( this );
+    TQPopupMenu* file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
 .br
     file->insertItem( "&Quit", tqApp, TQ_SLOT(closeAllWindows()), CTRL+Key_Q );
 .br
@@ -803,14 +803,14 @@ Returns the color specification.
 See also QApplication::setColorSpec().
 .PP
 Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
-.SH "void QApplication::commitData ( QSessionManager & sm )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-This function deals with session management. It is invoked when the QSessionManager wants the application to commit all its data.
+.SH "void QApplication::commitData ( TQSessionManager & sm )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+This function deals with session management. It is invoked when the TQSessionManager wants the application to commit all its data.
 .PP
 Usually this means saving all open files, after getting permission from the user. Furthermore you may want to provide a means by which the user can cancel the shutdown.
 .PP
 Note that you should not exit the application within this function. Instead, the session manager may or may not do this afterwards, depending on the context.
 .PP
-\fBWarning:\fR Within this function, no user interaction is possible, \fIunless\fR you ask the session manager \fIsm\fR for explicit permission. See QSessionManager::allowsInteraction() and QSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction() for details and example usage.
+\fBWarning:\fR Within this function, no user interaction is possible, \fIunless\fR you ask the session manager \fIsm\fR for explicit permission. See TQSessionManager::allowsInteraction() and TQSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction() for details and example usage.
 .PP
 The default implementation requests interaction and sends a close event to all visible top level widgets. If any event was rejected, the shutdown is canceled.
 .PP
@@ -927,7 +927,7 @@ Examples:
 Returns display (screen) font metrics for the application font.
 .PP
 See also font(), setFont(), TQWidget::fontMetrics(), and QPainter::fontMetrics().
-.SH "QSize QApplication::globalStrut ()\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize QApplication::globalStrut ()\fC [static]\fR"
 Returns the application's global strut.
 .PP
 The strut is a size object whose dimensions are the minimum that any GUI element that the user can interact with should have. For example no button should be resized to be smaller than the global strut size.
@@ -1109,7 +1109,7 @@ See also processEvents(), exec(), and TQTimer.
 .SH "void QApplication::quit ()\fC [slot]\fR"
 Tells the application to exit with return code 0 (success). Equivalent to calling QApplication::exit( 0 ).
 .PP
-It's common to connect the lastWindowClosed() signal to quit(), and you also often connect e.g. QButton::clicked() or signals in QAction, QPopupMenu or QMenuBar to it.
+It's common to connect the lastWindowClosed() signal to quit(), and you also often connect e.g. QButton::clicked() or signals in TQAction, TQPopupMenu or TQMenuBar to it.
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
@@ -1121,7 +1121,7 @@ Example:
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-See also exit(), aboutToQuit(), lastWindowClosed(), and QAction.
+See also exit(), aboutToQuit(), lastWindowClosed(), and TQAction.
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l addressbook/main.cpp, mdi/main.cpp, network/archivesearch/main.cpp, regexptester/main.cpp, t2/main.cpp, t4/main.cpp, and t6/main.cpp.
@@ -1152,14 +1152,14 @@ Examples:
 Returns TRUE if all dialogs and widgets will be laid out in a mirrored (right to left) fashion. Returns FALSE if dialogs and widgets will be laid out left to right.
 .PP
 See also setReverseLayout().
-.SH "void QApplication::saveState ( QSessionManager & sm )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void QApplication::saveState ( TQSessionManager & sm )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This function deals with session management. It is invoked when the session manager wants the application to preserve its state for a future session.
 .PP
 For example, a text editor would create a temporary file that includes the current contents of its edit buffers, the location of the cursor and other aspects of the current editing session.
 .PP
 Note that you should never exit the application within this function. Instead, the session manager may or may not do this afterwards, depending on the context. Futhermore, most session managers will very likely request a saved state immediately after the application has been started. This permits the session manager to learn about the application's restart policy.
 .PP
-\fBWarning:\fR Within this function, no user interaction is possible, \fIunless\fR you ask the session manager \fIsm\fR for explicit permission. See QSessionManager::allowsInteraction() and QSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction() for details.
+\fBWarning:\fR Within this function, no user interaction is possible, \fIunless\fR you ask the session manager \fIsm\fR for explicit permission. See TQSessionManager::allowsInteraction() and TQSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction() for details.
 .PP
 See also isSessionRestored(), sessionId(), commitData(), and the Session Management overview.
 .SH "bool QApplication::sendEvent ( TQObject * receiver, QEvent * event )\fC [static]\fR"
@@ -1333,7 +1333,7 @@ This function uses an internal counter. Each setGlobalMouseTracking(TRUE) must h
 .fi
 .PP
 See also hasGlobalMouseTracking() and TQWidget::mouseTracking.
-.SH "void QApplication::setGlobalStrut ( const QSize & strut )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "void QApplication::setGlobalStrut ( const TQSize & strut )\fC [static]\fR"
 Sets the application's global strut to \fIstrut\fR.
 .PP
 The strut is a size object whose dimensions are the minimum that any GUI element that the user can interact with should have. For example no button should be resized to be smaller than the global strut size.
@@ -1344,11 +1344,11 @@ Example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-  QSize& WidgetClass::sizeHint() const
+  TQSize& WidgetClass::sizeHint() const
 .br
   {
 .br
-      return QSize( 80, 25 ).expandedTo( QApplication::globalStrut() );
+      return TQSize( 80, 25 ).expandedTo( QApplication::globalStrut() );
 .br
   }
 .br
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqbitmap.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqbitmap.3qt
index ea088d085..392a66e9c 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqbitmap.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqbitmap.3qt
@@ -22,13 +22,13 @@ Inherits QPixmap.
 .BI "\fBQBitmap\fR ( int w, int h, bool clear = FALSE, QPixmap::Optimization optimization = QPixmap::DefaultOptim )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQBitmap\fR ( const QSize & size, bool clear = FALSE, QPixmap::Optimization optimization = QPixmap::DefaultOptim )"
+.BI "\fBQBitmap\fR ( const TQSize & size, bool clear = FALSE, QPixmap::Optimization optimization = QPixmap::DefaultOptim )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fBQBitmap\fR ( int w, int h, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = FALSE )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQBitmap\fR ( const QSize & size, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBQBitmap\fR ( const TQSize & size, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = FALSE )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fBQBitmap\fR ( const QBitmap & bitmap )"
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ The contents of the bitmap is uninitialized if \fIclear\fR is FALSE; otherwise i
 The optional \fIoptimization\fR argument specifies the optimization setting for the bitmap. The default optimization should be used in most cases. Games and other pixmap-intensive applications may benefit from setting this argument; see QPixmap::Optimization.
 .PP
 See also QPixmap::setOptimization() and QPixmap::setDefaultOptimization().
-.SH "QBitmap::QBitmap ( const QSize & size, bool clear = FALSE, QPixmap::Optimization optimization = QPixmap::DefaultOptim )"
+.SH "QBitmap::QBitmap ( const TQSize & size, bool clear = FALSE, QPixmap::Optimization optimization = QPixmap::DefaultOptim )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Constructs a bitmap with the size \fIsize\fR.
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Example (creates an arrow bitmap):
         QBitmap bm( 8, 8, arrow_bits, TRUE );
 .br
 .fi
-.SH "QBitmap::QBitmap ( const QSize & size, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = FALSE )"
+.SH "QBitmap::QBitmap ( const TQSize & size, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = FALSE )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Constructs a bitmap with the size \fIsize\fR and sets the contents to \fIbits\fR.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqboxlayout.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqboxlayout.3qt
index 03c15a965..796303d9d 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqboxlayout.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqboxlayout.3qt
@@ -75,13 +75,13 @@ Inherited by QHBoxLayout and QVBoxLayout.
 .BI "bool \fBsetStretchFactor\fR ( QLayout * l, int stretch )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBminimumSize\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBminimumSize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBmaximumSize\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBmaximumSize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual bool \fBhasHeightForWidth\fR () const"
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Inherited by QHBoxLayout and QVBoxLayout.
 .BI "virtual int \fBheightForWidth\fR ( int w ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSizePolicy::ExpandData \fBexpanding\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSizePolicy::ExpandData \fBexpanding\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBinvalidate\fR ()"
@@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ Examples:
 Returns the direction of the box. addWidget() and addSpacing() work in this direction; the stretch stretches in this direction.
 .PP
 See also QBoxLayout::Direction, addWidget(), and addSpacing().
-.SH "QSizePolicy::ExpandData QBoxLayout::expanding () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSizePolicy::ExpandData QBoxLayout::expanding () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns whether this layout can make use of more space than sizeHint(). A value of Vertical or Horizontal means that it wants to grow in only one dimension, whereas \fCBothDirections\fR means that it wants to grow in both dimensions.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayout.
@@ -303,11 +303,11 @@ See also setAutoAdd(), insertLayout(), and insertSpacing().
 Resets cached information.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayout.
-.SH "QSize QBoxLayout::maximumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize QBoxLayout::maximumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the maximum size needed by this box layout.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayout.
-.SH "QSize QBoxLayout::minimumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize QBoxLayout::minimumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the minimum size needed by this box layout.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayout.
@@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ Sets the stretch factor for widget \fIw\fR to \fIstretch\fR and returns TRUE if
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Sets the stretch factor for the layout \fIl\fR to \fIstretch\fR and returns TRUE if \fIl\fR is found in this layout (not including child layouts); otherwise returns FALSE.
-.SH "QSize QBoxLayout::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize QBoxLayout::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the preferred size of this box layout.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayoutItem.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqbutton.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqbutton.3qt
index aecb81fa3..bdf6d44cf 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqbutton.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqbutton.3qt
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ QButton \- The abstract base class of button widgets, providing functionality co
 .PP
 Inherits TQWidget.
 .PP
-Inherited by QCheckBox, QPushButton, QRadioButton, and QToolButton.
+Inherited by QCheckBox, QPushButton, QRadioButton, and TQToolButton.
 .PP
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
@@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ The QButton class is the abstract base class of button widgets, providing functi
 .PP
 The QButton class implements an \fIabstract\fR button, and lets subclasses specify how to reply to user actions and how to draw the button.
 .PP
-QButton provides both push and toggle buttons. The QRadioButton and QCheckBox classes provide only toggle buttons; QPushButton and QToolButton provide both toggle and push buttons.
+QButton provides both push and toggle buttons. The QRadioButton and QCheckBox classes provide only toggle buttons; QPushButton and TQToolButton provide both toggle and push buttons.
 .PP
 Any button can have either a text or pixmap label. setText() sets the button to be a text button and setPixmap() sets it to be a pixmap button. The text/pixmap is manipulated as necessary to create the "disabled" appearance when the button is disabled.
 .PP
@@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ You can also set a custom accelerator using the setAccel() function. This is use
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-All of the buttons provided by TQt (QPushButton, QToolButton, QCheckBox and QRadioButton) can display both text and pixmaps.
+All of the buttons provided by TQt (QPushButton, TQToolButton, QCheckBox and QRadioButton) can display both text and pixmaps.
 .PP
 To subclass QButton, you must reimplement at least drawButton() (to draw the button's outline) and drawButtonLabel() (to draw its text or pixmap). It is generally advisable to reimplement sizeHint() as well, and sometimes hitButton() (to determine whether a button press is within the button).
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvas.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvas.3qt
index 4e7454599..4eabda1c9 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvas.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvas.3qt
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Inherits TQObject.
 .BI "int \fBheight\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBsize\fR () const"
+.BI "TQSize \fBsize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "QRect \fBrect\fR () const"
@@ -396,7 +396,7 @@ Marks \fIarea\fR as \fIunchanged\fR. The area will \fInot\fR be redrawn in the v
 Sets the canvas to call update() every \fIms\fR milliseconds. Any previous setting by setAdvancePeriod() or setUpdatePeriod() is overridden.
 .PP
 If \fIms\fR is less than 0 automatic updating will be stopped.
-.SH "QSize TQCanvas::size () const"
+.SH "TQSize TQCanvas::size () const"
 Returns the size of the canvas, in pixels.
 .SH "int TQCanvas::tile ( int x, int y ) const"
 Returns the tile at position (\fIx\fR, \fIy\fR). Initially, all tiles are 0.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasrectangle.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasrectangle.3qt
index a21325920..892629561 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasrectangle.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasrectangle.3qt
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Inherits TQCanvasPolygonalItem.
 .BI "void \fBsetSize\fR ( int width, int height )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBsize\fR () const"
+.BI "TQSize \fBsize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "QRect \fBrect\fR () const"
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ See also TQCanvasItem::rtti().
 Reimplemented from TQCanvasPolygonalItem.
 .SH "void TQCanvasRectangle::setSize ( int width, int height )"
 Sets the \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR of the rectangle.
-.SH "QSize TQCanvasRectangle::size () const"
+.SH "TQSize TQCanvasRectangle::size () const"
 Returns the width() and height() of the rectangle.
 .PP
 See also rect() and setSize().
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasview.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasview.3qt
index 7988ab890..0046c0623 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasview.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasview.3qt
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ Inherits QScrollView.
 .BI "virtual void \fBdrawContents\fR ( QPainter * p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Returns FALSE if \fIwm\fR is not invertable; otherwise returns TRUE.
 See also worldMatrix(), inverseWorldMatrix(), and QWMatrix::isInvertible().
 .PP
 Example: canvas/canvas.cpp.
-.SH "QSize TQCanvasView::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize TQCanvasView::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Suggests a size sufficient to view the entire canvas.
 .SH "const QWMatrix & TQCanvasView::worldMatrix () const"
 Returns a reference to the canvas view's current transformation matrix.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcombobox.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcombobox.3qt
index 0a2395bce..a83d7b609 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcombobox.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcombobox.3qt
@@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ A combobox can be populated using the insert functions, insertStringList() and i
 .PP
 (Windows style)
 .PP
-Depending on the style, QComboBox will use a QListBox or a QPopupMenu to display the list of items. See setListBox() for more information.
+Depending on the style, QComboBox will use a QListBox or a TQPopupMenu to display the list of items. See setListBox() for more information.
 .PP
 See also QLineEdit, QListBox, QSpinBox, QRadioButton, QButtonGroup, GUI Design Handbook: Combo Box, GUI Design Handbook: Drop-Down List Box, and Basic Widgets.
 .SS "Member Type Documentation"
@@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ Returns the line edit, or 0 if there is no line edit.
 .PP
 Only editable listboxes have a line editor.
 .SH "QListBox * QComboBox::listBox () const"
-Returns the current list box, or 0 if there is no list box. (QComboBox can use QPopupMenu instead of QListBox.) Provided to match setListBox().
+Returns the current list box, or 0 if there is no list box. (QComboBox can use TQPopupMenu instead of QListBox.) Provided to match setListBox().
 .PP
 See also setListBox().
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcontextmenuevent.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcontextmenuevent.3qt
index 3b58990d2..a87f445a8 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcontextmenuevent.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcontextmenuevent.3qt
@@ -69,11 +69,11 @@ The QContextMenuEvent class contains parameters that describe a context menu eve
 .PP
 Context menu events are sent to widgets when a user triggers a context menu. What triggers this is platform dependent. For example, on Windows, pressing the menu button or releasing the right mouse button will cause this event to be sent.
 .PP
-When this event occurs it is customary to show a QPopupMenu with a context menu, if this is relevant to the context.
+When this event occurs it is customary to show a TQPopupMenu with a context menu, if this is relevant to the context.
 .PP
 Context menu events contain a special accept flag that indicates whether the receiver accepted the event. If the event handler does not accept the event, then whatever triggered the event will be handled as a regular input event if possible.
 .PP
-See also QPopupMenu and Event Classes.
+See also TQPopupMenu and Event Classes.
 .SS "Member Type Documentation"
 .SH "QContextMenuEvent::Reason"
 This enum describes the reason the ContextMenuEvent was sent. The values are:
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcustommenuitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcustommenuitem.3qt
index 44b9da324..534f87769 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcustommenuitem.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcustommenuitem.3qt
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
 .SH NAME
 QCustomMenuItem \- Abstract base class for custom menu items in popup menus
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fC#include <ntqmenudata.h>\fR
+\fC#include <tqmenudata.h>\fR
 .PP
 Inherits Qt.
 .PP
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ Inherits Qt.
 .BI "virtual void \fBpaint\fR ( QPainter * p, const QColorGroup & cg, bool act, bool enabled, int x, int y, int w, int h ) = 0"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBsizeHint\fR () = 0"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBsizeHint\fR () = 0"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ A custom menu item is a menu item that is defined by two pure virtual functions,
 .PP
 This simple mechanism allows you to create all kinds of application specific menu items. Examples are items showing different fonts in a word processor or menus that allow the selection of drawing utilities in a vector drawing program.
 .PP
-A custom item is inserted into a popup menu with QPopupMenu::insertItem().
+A custom item is inserted into a popup menu with TQPopupMenu::insertItem().
 .PP
 By default, a custom item can also have an icon and a keyboard accelerator. You can reimplement fullSpan() to return TRUE if you want the item to span the entire popup menu width. This is particularly useful for labels.
 .PP
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Note: the current implementation of QCustomMenuItem will not recognize shortcut
 .ce 1
 .B "[Image Omitted]"
 .PP
-See also QMenuData, QPopupMenu, and Miscellaneous Classes.
+See also TQMenuData, TQPopupMenu, and Miscellaneous Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "QCustomMenuItem::QCustomMenuItem ()"
 Constructs a QCustomMenuItem
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Do not draw any background, this has already been done by the popup menu accordi
 Sets the font of the custom menu item to \fIfont\fR.
 .PP
 This function is called whenever the font in the popup menu changes. For menu items that show their own individual font entry, you want to ignore this.
-.SH "QSize QCustomMenuItem::sizeHint ()\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize QCustomMenuItem::sizeHint ()\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 Returns the item's size hint.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdialog.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdialog.3qt
index 910d65362..0f676df42 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdialog.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdialog.3qt
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Inherited by QColorDialog, QErrorMessage, QFileDialog, QFontDialog, QInputDialog
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The QDialog class is the base class of dialog windows.
 .PP
-A dialog window is a top-level window mostly used for short-term tasks and brief communications with the user. QDialogs may be modal or modeless. QDialogs support extensibility and can provide a return value. They can have default buttons. QDialogs can also have a QSizeGrip in their lower-right corner, using setSizeGripEnabled().
+A dialog window is a top-level window mostly used for short-term tasks and brief communications with the user. QDialogs may be modal or modeless. QDialogs support extensibility and can provide a return value. They can have default buttons. QDialogs can also have a TQSizeGrip in their lower-right corner, using setSizeGripEnabled().
 .PP
 Note that QDialog uses the parent widget slightly differently from other classes in Qt. A dialog is always a top-level widget, but if it has a parent, its default location is centered on top of the parent's top-level widget (if it is not top-level itself). It will also share the parent's taskbar entry.
 .SH "Modal Dialogs"
@@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ Set this property's value with setModal() and get this property's value with isM
 .SH "bool sizeGripEnabled"
 This property holds whether the size grip is enabled.
 .PP
-A QSizeGrip is placed in the bottom right corner of the dialog when this property is enabled. By default, the size grip is disabled.
+A TQSizeGrip is placed in the bottom right corner of the dialog when this property is enabled. By default, the size grip is disabled.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setSizeGripEnabled() and get this property's value with isSizeGripEnabled().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdict.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdict.3qt
index f88563863..ae7e6eed3 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdict.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdict.3qt
@@ -191,14 +191,14 @@ Example #2:
 .br
         }
 .br
-        (void) new QAction( styleName, TQIconSet(), styleAccel, parent );
+        (void) new TQAction( styleName, TQIconSet(), styleAccel, parent );
 .br
     }
 .br
 .fi
 In the example we are using the dictionary to provide fast random access to the keys, and we don't care what the values are. The example is used to generate a menu of TQStyles, each with a unique accelerator key (or no accelerator if there are no unused letters left).
 .PP
-We first obtain the list of available styles, then sort them so that the menu items will be ordered alphabetically. Next we create a dictionary of int pointers. The keys in the dictionary are each one character long, representing letters that have been used for accelerators. We iterate through our list of style names. If the first letter of the style name is in the dictionary, i.e. has been used, we iterate over all the characters in the style name to see if we can find a letter that hasn't been used. If we find an unused letter we put the accelerator ampersand (&) in front of it and add that letter to the dictionary. If we can't find an unused letter the style will simply have no accelerator. If the first letter of the style name is not in the dictionary we use it for the accelerator and add it to the dictionary. Finally we create a QAction for each style.
+We first obtain the list of available styles, then sort them so that the menu items will be ordered alphabetically. Next we create a dictionary of int pointers. The keys in the dictionary are each one character long, representing letters that have been used for accelerators. We iterate through our list of style names. If the first letter of the style name is in the dictionary, i.e. has been used, we iterate over all the characters in the style name to see if we can find a letter that hasn't been used. If we find an unused letter we put the accelerator ampersand (&) in front of it and add that letter to the dictionary. If we can't find an unused letter the style will simply have no accelerator. If the first letter of the style name is not in the dictionary we use it for the accelerator and add it to the dictionary. Finally we create a TQAction for each style.
 .PP
 See also QDictIterator, QAsciiDict, QIntDict, TQPtrDict, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdockarea.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdockarea.3qt
index d4ea200d0..3297ede53 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdockarea.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdockarea.3qt
@@ -91,9 +91,9 @@ Inherits TQWidget.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The QDockArea class manages and lays out QDockWindows.
 .PP
-A QDockArea is a container which manages a list of QDockWindows which it lays out within its area. In cooperation with the QDockWindows it is responsible for the docking and undocking of QDockWindows and moving them inside the dock area. QDockAreas also handle the wrapping of QDockWindows to fill the available space as compactly as possible. QDockAreas can contain QToolBars since QToolBar is a QDockWindow subclass.
+A QDockArea is a container which manages a list of QDockWindows which it lays out within its area. In cooperation with the QDockWindows it is responsible for the docking and undocking of QDockWindows and moving them inside the dock area. QDockAreas also handle the wrapping of QDockWindows to fill the available space as compactly as possible. QDockAreas can contain TQToolBars since TQToolBar is a QDockWindow subclass.
 .PP
-QMainWindow contains four QDockAreas which you can use for your QToolBars and QDockWindows, so in most situations you do not need to use the QDockArea class directly. Although QMainWindow contains support for its own dock areas it isn't convenient for adding new QDockAreas. If you need to create your own dock areas we suggest that you create a subclass of TQWidget and add your QDockAreas to your subclass.
+TQMainWindow contains four QDockAreas which you can use for your TQToolBars and QDockWindows, so in most situations you do not need to use the QDockArea class directly. Although TQMainWindow contains support for its own dock areas it isn't convenient for adding new QDockAreas. If you need to create your own dock areas we suggest that you create a subclass of TQWidget and add your QDockAreas to your subclass.
 .PP
 <center>
 .ce 1
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdockwindow.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdockwindow.3qt
index 45f07343e..00b63b35d 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdockwindow.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdockwindow.3qt
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ QDockWindow \- Widget which can be docked inside a QDockArea or floated as a top
 .PP
 Inherits QFrame.
 .PP
-Inherited by QToolBar.
+Inherited by TQToolBar.
 .PP
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Inherited by QToolBar.
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetFixedExtentHeight\fR ( int h )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBfixedExtent\fR () const"
+.BI "TQSize \fBfixedExtent\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetNewLine\fR ( bool b )"
@@ -183,13 +183,13 @@ Inherited by QToolBar.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The QDockWindow class provides a widget which can be docked inside a QDockArea or floated as a top level window on the desktop.
 .PP
-This class handles moving, resizing, docking and undocking dock windows. QToolBar is a subclass of QDockWindow so the functionality provided for dock windows is available with the same API for toolbars.
+This class handles moving, resizing, docking and undocking dock windows. TQToolBar is a subclass of QDockWindow so the functionality provided for dock windows is available with the same API for toolbars.
 .PP
 <center>
 .ce 1
 .B "[Image Omitted]"
 .PP
-</center> <blockquote><p align="center">\fI Two QDockWindows (QToolBars) in a QDockArea \fR</p> </blockquote>
+</center> <blockquote><p align="center">\fI Two QDockWindows (TQToolBars) in a QDockArea \fR</p> </blockquote>
 .PP
 <center>
 .ce 1
@@ -199,25 +199,25 @@ This class handles moving, resizing, docking and undocking dock windows. QToolBa
 .PP
 If the user drags the dock window into the dock area the dock window will be docked. If the user drags the dock area outside any dock areas the dock window will be undocked (floated) and will become a top level window. Double clicking a floating dock window's titlebar will dock the dock window to the last dock area it was docked in. Double clicking a docked dock window's handle will undock (float) the dock window. If the user clicks the close button (which does not appear on dock windows by default - see closeMode) the dock window will disappear. You can control whether or not a dock window has a close button with setCloseMode().
 .PP
-QMainWindow provides four dock areas (top, left, right and bottom) which can be used by dock windows. For many applications using the dock areas provided by QMainWindow is sufficient. (See the QDockArea documentation if you want to create your own dock areas.) In QMainWindow a right-click popup menu (the dock window menu) is available which lists dock windows and can be used to show or hide them. (The popup menu only lists dock windows that have a caption.)
+TQMainWindow provides four dock areas (top, left, right and bottom) which can be used by dock windows. For many applications using the dock areas provided by TQMainWindow is sufficient. (See the QDockArea documentation if you want to create your own dock areas.) In TQMainWindow a right-click popup menu (the dock window menu) is available which lists dock windows and can be used to show or hide them. (The popup menu only lists dock windows that have a caption.)
 .PP
-When you construct a dock window you \fImust\fR pass it a QDockArea or a QMainWindow as its parent if you want it docked. Pass 0 for the parent if you want it floated.
+When you construct a dock window you \fImust\fR pass it a QDockArea or a TQMainWindow as its parent if you want it docked. Pass 0 for the parent if you want it floated.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-    QToolBar *fileTools = new QToolBar( this, "File Actions" );
+    TQToolBar *fileTools = new TQToolBar( this, "File Actions" );
 .br
     moveDockWindow( fileTools, Left );
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-In the example above we create a new QToolBar in the constructor of a QMainWindow subclass (so that the \fIthis\fR pointer points to the QMainWindow). By default the toolbar will be added to the Top dock area, but we've moved it to the Left dock area.
+In the example above we create a new TQToolBar in the constructor of a TQMainWindow subclass (so that the \fIthis\fR pointer points to the TQMainWindow). By default the toolbar will be added to the Top dock area, but we've moved it to the Left dock area.
 .PP
 A dock window is often used to contain a single widget. In these cases the widget can be set by calling setWidget(). If you're constructing a dock window that contains multiple widgets, e.g. a toolbar, arrange the widgets within a box layout inside the dock window. To do this use the boxLayout() function to get a pointer to the dock window's box layout, then add widgets to the layout using the box layout's QBoxLayout::addWidget() function. The dock window will dynamically set the orientation of the layout to be vertical or horizontal as necessary, although you can control this yourself with setOrientation().
 .PP
 Although a common use of dock windows is for toolbars, they can be used with any widgets. (See the TQt Designer and TQt Linguist applications, for example.) When using larger widgets it may make sense for the dock window to be resizable by calling setResizeEnabled(). Resizable dock windows are given splitter-like handles to allow the user to resize them within their dock area. When resizable dock windows are undocked they become top level windows and can be resized like any other top level windows, e.g. by dragging a corner or edge.
 .PP
-Dock windows can be docked and undocked using dock() and undock(). A dock window's orientation can be set with setOrientation(). You can also use QDockArea::moveDockWindow(). If you're using a QMainWindow, QMainWindow::moveDockWindow() and QMainWindow::removeDockWindow() are available.
+Dock windows can be docked and undocked using dock() and undock(). A dock window's orientation can be set with setOrientation(). You can also use QDockArea::moveDockWindow(). If you're using a TQMainWindow, TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow() and TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow() are available.
 .PP
 A dock window can have some preferred settings, for example, you can set a preferred offset from the left edge (or top edge for vertical dock areas) of the dock area using setOffset(). If you'd prefer a dock window to start on a new line when it is docked use setNewLine(). The setFixedExtentWidth() and setFixedExtentHeight() functions can be used to define the dock window's preferred size, and the setHorizontallyStretchable() and setVerticallyStretchable() functions set whether the dock window can be stretched or not. Dock windows can be moved by default, but this can be changed with setMovingEnabled(). When a dock window is moved it is shown as a rectangular outline, but it can be shown normally using setOpaqueMoving().
 .PP
@@ -245,11 +245,11 @@ This enum specifies the possible locations for a QDockWindow:
 .SH "QDockWindow::QDockWindow ( Place p = InDock, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )"
 Constructs a QDockWindow with parent \fIparent\fR, called \fIname\fR and with widget flags \fIf\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIp\fR is InDock, the dock window is docked into a dock area and \fIparent\fR \fImust\fR be a QDockArea or a QMainWindow. If the \fIparent\fR is a QMainWindow the dock window will be docked in the main window's Top dock area.
+If \fIp\fR is InDock, the dock window is docked into a dock area and \fIparent\fR \fImust\fR be a QDockArea or a TQMainWindow. If the \fIparent\fR is a TQMainWindow the dock window will be docked in the main window's Top dock area.
 .PP
 If \fIp\fR is OutsideDock, the dock window is created as a floating window.
 .PP
-We recommend creating the dock area InDock with a QMainWindow as parent then calling QMainWindow::moveDockWindow() to move the dock window where you want it.
+We recommend creating the dock area InDock with a TQMainWindow as parent then calling TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow() to move the dock window where you want it.
 .SH "QDockWindow::QDockWindow ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )"
 Constructs a QDockWindow with parent \fIparent\fR, called \fIname\fR and with widget flags \fIf\fR.
 .SH "QDockArea * QDockWindow::area () const"
@@ -269,8 +269,8 @@ If the dock window has no last dock area (e.g. it was created as a floating wind
 .PP
 The dock window will dock with the dock area regardless of the return value of QDockArea::isDockWindowAccepted().
 .PP
-See also undock(), QDockArea::moveDockWindow(), QDockArea::removeDockWindow(), QMainWindow::moveDockWindow(), QMainWindow::removeDockWindow(), and QDockArea::isDockWindowAccepted().
-.SH "QSize QDockWindow::fixedExtent () const"
+See also undock(), QDockArea::moveDockWindow(), QDockArea::removeDockWindow(), TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(), TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow(), and QDockArea::isDockWindowAccepted().
+.SH "TQSize QDockWindow::fixedExtent () const"
 Returns the dock window's preferred size (fixed extent).
 .PP
 See also setFixedExtentWidth() and setFixedExtentHeight().
@@ -307,11 +307,11 @@ This signal is emitted when the orientation of the dock window is changed. The n
 .SH "Place QDockWindow::place () const"
 This function returns where the dock window is placed. This is either InDock or OutsideDock.
 .PP
-See also QDockArea::moveDockWindow(), QDockArea::removeDockWindow(), QMainWindow::moveDockWindow(), and QMainWindow::removeDockWindow().
+See also QDockArea::moveDockWindow(), QDockArea::removeDockWindow(), TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(), and TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow().
 .SH "void QDockWindow::placeChanged ( QDockWindow::Place p )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when the dock window is docked (\fIp\fR is InDock), undocked (\fIp\fR is OutsideDock) or moved inside the the dock area.
 .PP
-See also QDockArea::moveDockWindow(), QDockArea::removeDockWindow(), QMainWindow::moveDockWindow(), and QMainWindow::removeDockWindow().
+See also QDockArea::moveDockWindow(), QDockArea::removeDockWindow(), TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(), and TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow().
 .SH "void QDockWindow::setCloseMode ( int m )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the close mode of a dock window to \fIm\fR. See the "closeMode" property for details.
 .SH "void QDockWindow::setFixedExtentHeight ( int h )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ Sets whether the dock window will be shown normally whilst it is being moved to
 .SH "void QDockWindow::setOrientation ( Orientation o )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Sets the orientation of the dock window to \fIo\fR. The orientation is propagated to the layout boxLayout().
 .PP
-\fBWarning:\fR All undocked QToolBars will always have a horizontal orientation.
+\fBWarning:\fR All undocked TQToolBars will always have a horizontal orientation.
 .SH "void QDockWindow::setResizeEnabled ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets whether the dock window is resizeable to \fIb\fR. See the "resizeEnabled" property for details.
 .SH "void QDockWindow::setVerticalStretchable ( bool b )"
@@ -351,11 +351,11 @@ See also boxLayout().
 .SH "void QDockWindow::undock ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Undocks the QDockWindow from its current dock area if it is docked; otherwise does nothing.
 .PP
-See also dock(), QDockArea::moveDockWindow(), QDockArea::removeDockWindow(), QMainWindow::moveDockWindow(), and QMainWindow::removeDockWindow().
+See also dock(), QDockArea::moveDockWindow(), QDockArea::removeDockWindow(), TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(), and TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow().
 .SH "void QDockWindow::visibilityChanged ( bool visible )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when the visibility of the dock window relatively to its dock area is changed. If \fIvisible\fR is TRUE, the QDockWindow is now visible to the dock area, otherwise it has been hidden.
 .PP
-A dock window can be hidden if it has a close button which the user has clicked. In the case of a QMainWindow a dock window can have its visibility changed (hidden or shown) by clicking its name in the dock window menu that lists the QMainWindow's dock windows.
+A dock window can be hidden if it has a close button which the user has clicked. In the case of a TQMainWindow a dock window can have its visibility changed (hidden or shown) by clicking its name in the dock window menu that lists the TQMainWindow's dock windows.
 .SH "TQWidget * QDockWindow::widget () const"
 Returns the dock window's main widget.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqerrormessage.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqerrormessage.3qt
index f98a93437..81a84b9f5 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqerrormessage.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqerrormessage.3qt
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ In both cases QErrorMessage will queue pending messages, and display them (or no
 .PP
 </center>
 .PP
-See also QMessageBox, QStatusBar::message(), Dialog Classes, and Miscellaneous Classes.
+See also QMessageBox, TQStatusBar::message(), Dialog Classes, and Miscellaneous Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "QErrorMessage::QErrorMessage ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 Constructs and installs an error handler window. The parent \fIparent\fR and name \fIname\fR are passed on to the QDialog constructor.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqfontmetrics.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqfontmetrics.3qt
index d9f860abc..48c59eaac 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqfontmetrics.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqfontmetrics.3qt
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ QFontMetrics \- Font metrics information
 .BI "QRect \fBboundingRect\fR ( int x, int y, int w, int h, int flgs, const TQString & str, int len = -1, int tabstops = 0, int * tabarray = 0, TQTextParag ** intern = 0 ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBsize\fR ( int flgs, const TQString & str, int len = -1, int tabstops = 0, int * tabarray = 0, TQTextParag ** intern = 0 ) const"
+.BI "TQSize \fBsize\fR ( int flgs, const TQString & str, int len = -1, int tabstops = 0, int * tabarray = 0, TQTextParag ** intern = 0 ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBunderlinePos\fR () const"
@@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ See width() for a graphical description of this metric.
 See also leftBearing(), minRightBearing(), and width().
 .PP
 Example: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
-.SH "QSize QFontMetrics::size ( int flgs, const TQString & str, int len = -1, int tabstops = 0, int * tabarray = 0, TQTextParag ** intern = 0 ) const"
+.SH "TQSize QFontMetrics::size ( int flgs, const TQString & str, int len = -1, int tabstops = 0, int * tabarray = 0, TQTextParag ** intern = 0 ) const"
 Returns the size in pixels of the first \fIlen\fR characters of \fIstr\fR.
 .PP
 If \fIlen\fR is negative (the default), the entire string is used.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqframe.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqframe.3qt
index 1c3262290..479448b14 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqframe.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqframe.3qt
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ QFrame \- The base class of widgets that can have a frame
 .PP
 Inherits TQWidget.
 .PP
-Inherited by QGroupBox, QScrollView, QDockWindow, QGrid, QHBox, QLabel, QLCDNumber, QLineEdit, QMenuBar, QPopupMenu, QProgressBar, QSplitter, QToolBox, and TQWidgetStack.
+Inherited by QGroupBox, QScrollView, QDockWindow, QGrid, QHBox, QLabel, QLCDNumber, QLineEdit, TQMenuBar, TQPopupMenu, QProgressBar, QSplitter, TQToolBox, and TQWidgetStack.
 .PP
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ The QFrame class is the base class of widgets that can have a frame.
 .PP
 It draws a frame and calls a virtual function, drawContents(), to fill in the frame. This function is reimplemented by subclasses. There are also two other less useful functions: drawFrame() and frameChanged().
 .PP
-QPopupMenu uses this to "raise" the menu above the surrounding screen. QProgressBar has a "sunken" look. QLabel has a flat look. The frames of widgets like these can be changed.
+TQPopupMenu uses this to "raise" the menu above the surrounding screen. QProgressBar has a "sunken" look. QLabel has a flat look. The frames of widgets like these can be changed.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ This function is reimplemented by subclasses that draw something inside the fram
 .PP
 See also contentsRect and QPainter::setClipRect().
 .PP
-Reimplemented in QLabel, QLCDNumber, QMenuBar, and QPopupMenu.
+Reimplemented in QLabel, QLCDNumber, TQMenuBar, and TQPopupMenu.
 .SH "void QFrame::drawFrame ( QPainter * p )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Draws the frame using the painter \fIp\fR and the current frame attributes and color group. The rectangle inside the frame is not affected.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqgridlayout.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqgridlayout.3qt
index d25e55c0a..73dfa325a 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqgridlayout.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqgridlayout.3qt
@@ -28,13 +28,13 @@ Inherits QLayout.
 .BI "\fB~QGridLayout\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBminimumSize\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBminimumSize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBmaximumSize\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBmaximumSize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetRowStretch\fR ( int row, int stretch )"
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Inherits QLayout.
 .BI "virtual int \fBheightForWidth\fR ( int w ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSizePolicy::ExpandData \fBexpanding\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSizePolicy::ExpandData \fBexpanding\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBinvalidate\fR ()"
@@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ Returns the stretch factor for column \fIcol\fR.
 See also setColStretch().
 .SH "void QGridLayout::expand ( int nRows, int nCols )"
 Expands this grid so that it will have \fInRows\fR rows and \fInCols\fR columns. Will not shrink the grid. You should not need to call this function because QGridLayout expands automatically as new items are inserted.
-.SH "QSizePolicy::ExpandData QGridLayout::expanding () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSizePolicy::ExpandData QGridLayout::expanding () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns whether this layout can make use of more space than sizeHint(). A value of Vertical or Horizontal means that it wants to grow in only one dimension, whereas \fCBothDirections\fR means that it wants to grow in both dimensions.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayout.
@@ -301,11 +301,11 @@ Reimplemented from QLayoutItem.
 Resets cached information.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayout.
-.SH "QSize QGridLayout::maximumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize QGridLayout::maximumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the maximum size needed by this grid.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayout.
-.SH "QSize QGridLayout::minimumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize QGridLayout::minimumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the minimum size needed by this grid.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayout.
@@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ See also rowStretch(), setRowSpacing(), and setColStretch().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l addressbook/centralwidget.cpp and qutlook/centralwidget.cpp.
-.SH "QSize QGridLayout::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize QGridLayout::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the preferred size of this grid.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayoutItem.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqgridview.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqgridview.3qt
index e170b8b09..94157c630 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqgridview.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqgridview.3qt
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ Inherits QScrollView.
 .BI "QRect \fBcellGeometry\fR ( int row, int column )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBgridSize\fR () const"
+.BI "TQSize \fBgridSize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBrowAt\fR ( int y ) const"
@@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ See also rowAt().
 This change handler is called whenever any of the grid's dimensions change. \fIoldNumRows\fR and \fIoldNumCols\fR contain the old dimensions, numRows() and numCols() contain the new dimensions.
 .SH "void QGridView::ensureCellVisible ( int row, int column )"
 Ensures cell (\fIrow\fR, \fIcolumn\fR) is visible, scrolling the grid view if necessary.
-.SH "QSize QGridView::gridSize () const"
+.SH "TQSize QGridView::gridSize () const"
 Returns the size of the grid in pixels.
 .SH "int QGridView::numCols () const"
 Returns the number of columns in the grid. See the "numCols" property for details.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqiconset.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqiconset.3qt
index 8cb5e2634..347960cc3 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqiconset.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqiconset.3qt
@@ -77,22 +77,22 @@ TQIconSet \- Set of icons with different styles and sizes
 .SS "Static Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBsetIconSize\fR ( Size which, const QSize & size )"
+.BI "void \fBsetIconSize\fR ( Size which, const TQSize & size )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "const QSize & \fBiconSize\fR ( Size which )"
+.BI "const TQSize & \fBiconSize\fR ( Size which )"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The TQIconSet class provides a set of icons with different styles and sizes.
 .PP
-A TQIconSet can generate smaller, larger, active, and disabled pixmaps from the set of icons it is given. Such pixmaps are used by QToolButton, QHeader, QPopupMenu, etc. to show an icon representing a particular action.
+A TQIconSet can generate smaller, larger, active, and disabled pixmaps from the set of icons it is given. Such pixmaps are used by TQToolButton, QHeader, TQPopupMenu, etc. to show an icon representing a particular action.
 .PP
 The simplest use of TQIconSet is to create one from a QPixmap and then use it, allowing TQt to work out all the required icon styles and sizes. For example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-    QToolButton *but = new QToolButton( TQIconSet( QPixmap("open.xpm") ), ... );
+    TQToolButton *but = new TQToolButton( TQIconSet( QPixmap("open.xpm") ), ... );
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ You can use the static function setIconSize() to set the preferred size of the g
 .PP
 The isGenerated() function returns TRUE if an icon was generated by TQIconSet or by a factory; clearGenerated() clears all cached pixmaps.
 .SH "Making Classes that Use TQIconSet"
-If you write your own widgets that have an option to set a small pixmap, consider allowing a TQIconSet to be set for that pixmap. The TQt class QToolButton is an example of such a widget.
+If you write your own widgets that have an option to set a small pixmap, consider allowing a TQIconSet to be set for that pixmap. The TQt class TQToolButton is an example of such a widget.
 .PP
 Provide a method to set a TQIconSet, and when you draw the icon, choose whichever icon is appropriate for the current state of your widget. For example:
 .PP
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ You might also make use of the Active mode, perhaps making your widget Active wh
 .PP
 </center>
 .PP
-See also TQIconFactory, QPixmap, QMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps, GUI Design Handbook: Iconic Label, Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
+See also TQIconFactory, QPixmap, TQMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps, GUI Design Handbook: Iconic Label, Graphics Classes, Image Processing Classes, and Implicitly and Explicitly Shared Classes.
 .SS "Member Type Documentation"
 .SH "TQIconSet::Mode"
 This enum type describes the mode for which a pixmap is intended to be used. The currently defined modes are:
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ This enum type describes the size at which a pixmap is intended to be used. The
 .PP
 If a Small pixmap is not set by TQIconSet::setPixmap(), the Large pixmap will be automatically scaled down to the size of a small pixmap to generate the Small pixmap when required. Similarly, a Small pixmap will be automatically scaled up to generate a Large pixmap. The preferred sizes for large/small generated icons can be set using setIconSize().
 .PP
-See also setIconSize(), iconSize(), setPixmap(), pixmap(), and QMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps.
+See also setIconSize(), iconSize(), setPixmap(), pixmap(), and TQMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps.
 .SH "TQIconSet::State"
 This enum describes the state for which a pixmap is intended to be used. The \fIstate\fR can be:
 .TP
@@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Clears all cached pixmaps, including those obtained from an eventual TQIconFacto
 Detaches this icon set from others with which it may share data.
 .PP
 You will never need to call this function; other TQIconSet functions call it as necessary.
-.SH "const QSize & TQIconSet::iconSize ( Size which )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "const TQSize & TQIconSet::iconSize ( Size which )\fC [static]\fR"
 If \fIwhich\fR is Small, returns the preferred size of a small generated icon; if \fIwhich\fR is Large, returns the preferred size of a large generated icon.
 .PP
 See also setIconSize().
@@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ Sets this icon set to use pixmap \fIpixmap\fR for the Normal pixmap, assuming it
 This is equivalent to assigning TQIconSet(\fIpixmap\fR, \fIsize\fR) to this icon set.
 .PP
 This function does nothing if \fIpixmap\fR is a null pixmap.
-.SH "void TQIconSet::setIconSize ( Size which, const QSize & size )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "void TQIconSet::setIconSize ( Size which, const TQSize & size )\fC [static]\fR"
 Set the preferred size for all small or large icons that are generated after this call. If \fIwhich\fR is Small, sets the preferred size of small generated icons to \fIsize\fR. Similarly, if \fIwhich\fR is Large, sets the preferred size of large generated icons to \fIsize\fR.
 .PP
 Note that cached icons will not be regenerated, so it is recommended that you set the preferred icon sizes before generating any icon sets. Also note that the preferred icon sizes will be ignored for icon sets that have been created using both small and large pixmaps.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqiconview.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqiconview.3qt
index 3697b7cab..779f45cc6 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqiconview.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqiconview.3qt
@@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Inherits QScrollView.
 .SS "Public Slots"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBarrangeItemsInGrid\fR ( const QSize & grid, bool update = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBarrangeItemsInGrid\fR ( const TQSize & grid, bool update = TRUE )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBarrangeItemsInGrid\fR ( bool update = TRUE )"
@@ -519,8 +519,8 @@ Constructs an empty icon view called \fIname\fR, with parent \fIparent\fR and us
 Destroys the icon view and deletes all items.
 .SH "void TQIconView::adjustItems ()\fC [virtual protected slot]\fR"
 Adjusts the positions of the items to the geometry of the icon view.
-.SH "void TQIconView::arrangeItemsInGrid ( const QSize & grid, bool update = TRUE )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
-This variant uses \fIgrid\fR instead of (gridX(), gridY()). If \fIgrid\fR is invalid (see QSize::isValid()), arrangeItemsInGrid() calculates a valid grid itself and uses that.
+.SH "void TQIconView::arrangeItemsInGrid ( const TQSize & grid, bool update = TRUE )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+This variant uses \fIgrid\fR instead of (gridX(), gridY()). If \fIgrid\fR is invalid (see TQSize::isValid()), arrangeItemsInGrid() calculates a valid grid itself and uses that.
 .PP
 If \fIupdate\fR is TRUE (the default) the viewport is repainted.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqiconviewitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqiconviewitem.3qt
index 4d2d0fd82..e0d995e36 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqiconviewitem.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqiconviewitem.3qt
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Inherits Qt.
 .BI "int \fBheight\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBsize\fR () const"
+.BI "TQSize \fBsize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "QPoint \fBpos\fR () const"
@@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ See also text().
 Sets the bounding rectangle of the item's text to \fIr\fR. This function is provided for subclasses which reimplement calcRect(), so that they can set the calculated rectangle. \fIAny other use is discouraged.\fR
 .PP
 See also calcRect(), textRect(), setItemRect(), and setPixmapRect().
-.SH "QSize TQIconViewItem::size () const"
+.SH "TQSize TQIconViewItem::size () const"
 Returns the size of the item.
 .SH "TQString TQIconViewItem::text () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the text of the icon view item. Normally you set the text of the item with setText(), but sometimes it's inconvenient to call setText() for every item; so you can subclass TQIconViewItem, reimplement this function, and return the text of the item. If you do this, you must call calcRect() manually each time the text (and therefore its size) changes.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqimage.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqimage.3qt
index ef4aacbf3..5d6dcf2bc 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqimage.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqimage.3qt
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ TQImage \- Hardware-independent pixmap representation with direct access to the
 .BI "\fBTQImage\fR ( int w, int h, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQImage\fR ( const QSize & size, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )"
+.BI "\fBTQImage\fR ( const TQSize & size, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fBTQImage\fR ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )"
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ TQImage \- Hardware-independent pixmap representation with direct access to the
 .BI "int \fBheight\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBsize\fR () const"
+.BI "TQSize \fBsize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "QRect \fBrect\fR () const"
@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ TQImage \- Hardware-independent pixmap representation with direct access to the
 .BI "bool \fBcreate\fR ( int width, int height, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "bool \fBcreate\fR ( const QSize &, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )"
+.BI "bool \fBcreate\fR ( const TQSize &, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBreset\fR ()"
@@ -167,13 +167,13 @@ TQImage \- Hardware-independent pixmap representation with direct access to the
 .BI "TQImage \fBsmoothScale\fR ( int w, int h, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQImage \fBsmoothScale\fR ( const QSize & s, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const"
+.BI "TQImage \fBsmoothScale\fR ( const TQSize & s, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQImage \fBscale\fR ( int w, int h, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQImage \fBscale\fR ( const QSize & s, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const"
+.BI "TQImage \fBscale\fR ( const TQSize & s, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQImage \fBscaleWidth\fR ( int w ) const"
@@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ Constructs an image with \fIw\fR width, \fIh\fR height, \fIdepth\fR bits per pix
 Using this constructor is the same as first constructing a null image and then calling the create() function.
 .PP
 See also create().
-.SH "TQImage::TQImage ( const QSize & size, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )"
+.SH "TQImage::TQImage ( const TQSize & size, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )"
 Constructs an image with size \fIsize\fR pixels, depth \fIdepth\fR bits, \fInumColors\fR and \fIbitOrder\fR endianness.
 .PP
 Using this constructor is the same as first constructing a null image and then calling the create() function.
@@ -560,7 +560,7 @@ This function allocates a color table and a buffer for the image data. The image
 The image buffer is allocated as a single block that consists of a table of scanline pointers (jumpTable()) and the image data (bits()).
 .PP
 See also fill(), width(), height(), depth(), numColors(), bitOrder(), jumpTable(), scanLine(), bits(), bytesPerLine(), and numBytes().
-.SH "bool TQImage::create ( const QSize &, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )"
+.SH "bool TQImage::create ( const TQSize &, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .SH "TQImage TQImage::createAlphaMask ( int conversion_flags = 0 ) const"
 Builds and returns a 1-bpp mask from the alpha buffer in this image. Returns a null image if alpha buffer mode is disabled.
@@ -842,7 +842,7 @@ If either the width \fIw\fR or the height \fIh\fR is 0 or negative, this functio
 This function uses a simple, fast algorithm. If you need better quality, use smoothScale() instead.
 .PP
 See also scaleWidth(), scaleHeight(), smoothScale(), and xForm().
-.SH "TQImage TQImage::scale ( const QSize & s, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const"
+.SH "TQImage TQImage::scale ( const TQSize & s, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 The requested size of the image is \fIs\fR.
@@ -913,7 +913,7 @@ If the image is a paletted image (depth() <= 8) and \fIindex_or_rgb\fR >= numCol
 See also pixelIndex(), pixel(), tqRgb(), tqRgba(), and valid().
 .SH "void TQImage::setText ( const char * key, const char * lang, const TQString & s )"
 Records string \fIs\fR for the keyword \fIkey\fR. The \fIkey\fR should be a portable keyword recognizable by other software - some suggested values can be found in the PNG specification. \fIs\fR can be any text. \fIlang\fR should specify the language code (see RFC 1766) or 0.
-.SH "QSize TQImage::size () const"
+.SH "TQSize TQImage::size () const"
 Returns the size of the image, i.e. its width and height.
 .PP
 See also width(), height(), and rect().
@@ -931,7 +931,7 @@ Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
 Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. This software is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
 .PP
 See also scale() and mirror().
-.SH "TQImage TQImage::smoothScale ( const QSize & s, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const"
+.SH "TQImage TQImage::smoothScale ( const TQSize & s, ScaleMode mode = ScaleFree ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 The requested size of the image is \fIs\fR.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqkeysequence.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqkeysequence.3qt
index 37dd4ac1e..2a811b776 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqkeysequence.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqkeysequence.3qt
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ This contructor is typically used with tr(), so that accelerator keys can be rep
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QPopupMenu *file = new QPopupMenu( this );
+        TQPopupMenu *file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
 .br
         file->insertItem( tr("&Open..."), this, TQ_SLOT(open()),
 .br
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqlayout.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqlayout.3qt
index ffeb4db22..e7dfe53c7 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqlayout.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqlayout.3qt
@@ -48,10 +48,10 @@ Inherited by QGridLayout and QBoxLayout.
 .BI "ResizeMode \fBresizeMode\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBsetMenuBar\fR ( QMenuBar * w )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBsetMenuBar\fR ( TQMenuBar * w )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QMenuBar * \fBmenuBar\fR () const"
+.BI "TQMenuBar * \fBmenuBar\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQWidget * \fBmainWidget\fR ()"
@@ -84,13 +84,13 @@ Inherited by QGridLayout and QBoxLayout.
 .BI "void \fBremoveItem\fR ( QLayoutItem * item )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSizePolicy::ExpandData \fBexpanding\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSizePolicy::ExpandData \fBexpanding\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBminimumSize\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBminimumSize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBmaximumSize\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBmaximumSize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetGeometry\fR ( const QRect & r ) = 0"
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ The QLayout class is the base class of geometry managers.
 .PP
 This is an abstract base class inherited by the concrete classes, QBoxLayout and QGridLayout.
 .PP
-For users of QLayout subclasses or of QMainWindow there is seldom any need to use the basic functions provided by QLayout, such as setResizeMode() or setMenuBar(). See the layout overview page for more information.
+For users of QLayout subclasses or of TQMainWindow there is seldom any need to use the basic functions provided by QLayout, such as setResizeMode() or setMenuBar(). See the layout overview page for more information.
 .PP
 To make your own layout manager, subclass QGLayoutIterator and implement the functions addItem(), sizeHint(), setGeometry(), and iterator(). You should also implement minimumSize() to ensure your layout isn't resized to zero size if there is too little space. To support children whose heights depend on their widths, implement hasHeightForWidth() and heightForWidth(). See the custom layout page for an in-depth description.
 .PP
@@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ Note that a top-level layout is not necessarily associated with the top-level wi
 See also setAutoAdd().
 .SH "void QLayout::deleteAllItems ()\fC [protected]\fR"
 Removes and deletes all items in this layout.
-.SH "QSizePolicy::ExpandData QLayout::expanding () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSizePolicy::ExpandData QLayout::expanding () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns whether this layout can make use of more space than sizeHint(). A value of Vertical or Horizontal means that it wants to grow in only one dimension, whereas \fCBothDirections\fR means that it wants to grow in both dimensions.
 .PP
 The default implementation returns \fCBothDirections\fR.
@@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ Reimplemented from QLayoutItem.
 Returns the main widget (parent widget) of this layout, or 0 if this layout is a sub-layout that is not yet inserted.
 .SH "int QLayout::margin () const"
 Returns the width of the outside border of the layout. See the "margin" property for details.
-.SH "QSize QLayout::maximumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize QLayout::maximumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the maximum size of this layout. This is the largest size that the layout can have while still respecting the specifications. Does not include what's needed by margin() or menuBar().
 .PP
 The default implementation allows unlimited resizing.
@@ -278,9 +278,9 @@ The default implementation allows unlimited resizing.
 Reimplemented from QLayoutItem.
 .PP
 Reimplemented in QGridLayout and QBoxLayout.
-.SH "QMenuBar * QLayout::menuBar () const"
+.SH "TQMenuBar * QLayout::menuBar () const"
 Returns the menu bar set for this layout, or 0 if no menu bar is set.
-.SH "QSize QLayout::minimumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize QLayout::minimumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the minimum size of this layout. This is the smallest size that the layout can have while still respecting the specifications. Does not include what's needed by margin() or menuBar().
 .PP
 The default implementation allows unlimited resizing.
@@ -333,10 +333,10 @@ Reimplemented from QLayoutItem.
 Reimplemented in QGridLayout and QBoxLayout.
 .SH "void QLayout::setMargin ( int )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the width of the outside border of the layout. See the "margin" property for details.
-.SH "void QLayout::setMenuBar ( QMenuBar * w )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void QLayout::setMenuBar ( TQMenuBar * w )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Makes the geometry manager take account of the menu bar \fIw\fR. All child widgets are placed below the bottom edge of the menu bar.
 .PP
-A menu bar does its own geometry management: never do addWidget() on a QMenuBar.
+A menu bar does its own geometry management: never do addWidget() on a TQMenuBar.
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l layout/layout.cpp and scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqlayoutitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqlayoutitem.3qt
index babd5553b..44abfe8d5 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqlayoutitem.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqlayoutitem.3qt
@@ -22,16 +22,16 @@ Inherited by QLayout, QSpacerItem, and TQWidgetItem.
 .BI "virtual \fB~QLayoutItem\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const = 0"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const = 0"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBminimumSize\fR () const = 0"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBminimumSize\fR () const = 0"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBmaximumSize\fR () const = 0"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBmaximumSize\fR () const = 0"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSizePolicy::ExpandData \fBexpanding\fR () const = 0"
+.BI "virtual TQSizePolicy::ExpandData \fBexpanding\fR () const = 0"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetGeometry\fR ( const QRect & r ) = 0"
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Constructs a layout item with an \fIalignment\fR that is a bitwise OR of the TQt
 Destroys the QLayoutItem.
 .SH "int QLayoutItem::alignment () const"
 Returns the alignment of this item.
-.SH "QSizePolicy::ExpandData QLayoutItem::expanding () const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSizePolicy::ExpandData QLayoutItem::expanding () const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 Implemented in subclasses to return the direction(s) this item" wants" to expand in (if any).
 .PP
 Reimplemented in QLayout, QSpacerItem, and TQWidgetItem.
@@ -164,11 +164,11 @@ Reimplement this function in subclasses that can have children.
 Reimplemented in QLayout.
 .SH "QLayout * QLayoutItem::layout ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 If this item is a QLayout, it is returned as a QLayout; otherwise 0 is returned. This function provides type-safe casting.
-.SH "QSize QLayoutItem::maximumSize () const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize QLayoutItem::maximumSize () const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 Implemented in subclasses to return the maximum size of this item.
 .PP
 Reimplemented in QLayout, QSpacerItem, and TQWidgetItem.
-.SH "QSize QLayoutItem::minimumSize () const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize QLayoutItem::minimumSize () const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 Implemented in subclasses to return the minimum size of this item.
 .PP
 Examples:
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Examples:
 .)l customlayout/border.cpp, customlayout/card.cpp, and customlayout/flow.cpp.
 .PP
 Reimplemented in QLayout, QSpacerItem, and TQWidgetItem.
-.SH "QSize QLayoutItem::sizeHint () const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize QLayoutItem::sizeHint () const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 Implemented in subclasses to return the preferred size of this item.
 .PP
 Examples:
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqlineedit.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqlineedit.3qt
index 79c09d9fc..4967166f6 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqlineedit.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqlineedit.3qt
@@ -52,10 +52,10 @@ Inherits QFrame.
 .BI "const QValidator * \fBvalidator\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBminimumSizeHint\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBminimumSizeHint\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBcursorPosition\fR () const"
@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Inherits QFrame.
 .BI "virtual void \fBkeyPressEvent\fR ( QKeyEvent * e )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QPopupMenu * \fBcreatePopupMenu\fR ()"
+.BI "virtual TQPopupMenu * \fBcreatePopupMenu\fR ()"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ This slot is equivalent to setValidator(0).
 Copies the selected text to the clipboard, if there is any, and if echoMode() is Normal.
 .PP
 See also cut() and paste().
-.SH "QPopupMenu * QLineEdit::createPopupMenu ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "TQPopupMenu * QLineEdit::createPopupMenu ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This function is called to create the popup menu which is shown when the user clicks on the line edit with the right mouse button. If you want to create a custom popup menu, reimplement this function and return the popup menu you create. The popup menu's ownership is transferred to the caller.
 .SH "void QLineEdit::cursorBackward ( bool mark, int steps = 1 )"
 Moves the cursor back \fIsteps\fR characters. If \fImark\fR is TRUE each character moved over is added to the selection; if \fImark\fR is FALSE the selection is cleared.
@@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ This signal is emitted when the line edit has lost focus.
 See also focus, TQWidget::focusInEvent(), and TQWidget::focusOutEvent().
 .SH "int QLineEdit::maxLength () const"
 Returns the maximum permitted length of the text. See the "maxLength" property for details.
-.SH "QSize QLineEdit::minimumSizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize QLineEdit::minimumSizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns a minimum size for the line edit.
 .PP
 The width returned is enough for at least one character.
@@ -520,7 +520,7 @@ See also validator(), QIntValidator, QDoubleValidator, and QRegExpValidator.
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l lineedits/lineedits.cpp and wizard/wizard.cpp.
-.SH "QSize QLineEdit::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize QLineEdit::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns a recommended size for the widget.
 .PP
 The width returned, in pixels, is usually enough for about 15 to 20 characters.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmainwindow.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmainwindow.3qt
index c1cdc40fc..1e19375e5 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqmainwindow.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmainwindow.3qt
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 '\" t
-.TH QMainWindow 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
+.TH TQMainWindow 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
 .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.  See the
 .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license
 .\" statement.
@@ -7,28 +7,28 @@
 .ad l
 .nh
 .SH NAME
-QMainWindow \- Main application window, with a menu bar, dock windows (e.g. for toolbars), and a status bar
+TQMainWindow \- Main application window, with a menu bar, dock windows (e.g. for toolbars), and a status bar
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fC#include <ntqmainwindow.h>\fR
+\fC#include <tqmainwindow.h>\fR
 .PP
 Inherits TQWidget.
 .PP
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQMainWindow\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = WType_TopLevel )"
+.BI "\fBTQMainWindow\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = WType_TopLevel )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fB~QMainWindow\fR ()"
+.BI "\fB~TQMainWindow\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QMenuBar * \fBmenuBar\fR () const"
+.BI "TQMenuBar * \fBmenuBar\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QStatusBar * \fBstatusBar\fR () const"
+.BI "TQStatusBar * \fBstatusBar\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QToolTipGroup * \fBtoolTipGroup\fR () const"
+.BI "TQToolTipGroup * \fBtoolTipGroup\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetCentralWidget\fR ( TQWidget * w )"
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Inherits TQWidget.
 .BI "bool toolBarsMovable () const  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQPtrList<QToolBar> \fBtoolBars\fR ( Dock dock ) const"
+.BI "TQPtrList<TQToolBar> \fBtoolBars\fR ( Dock dock ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void lineUpToolBars ( bool keepNewLines = FALSE )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Inherits TQWidget.
 .BI "enum \fBDockWindows\fR { OnlyToolBars, NoToolBars, AllDockWindows }"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QPopupMenu * \fBcreateDockWindowMenu\fR ( DockWindows dockWindows = AllDockWindows ) const"
+.BI "TQPopupMenu * \fBcreateDockWindowMenu\fR ( DockWindows dockWindows = AllDockWindows ) const"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SS "Public Slots"
@@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Inherits TQWidget.
 .BI "void \fBdockWindowPositionChanged\fR ( QDockWindow * dockWindow )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void toolBarPositionChanged ( QToolBar * )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
+.BI "void toolBarPositionChanged ( TQToolBar * )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SS "Properties"
@@ -238,20 +238,20 @@ Inherits TQWidget.
 .SH RELATED FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQTextStream & \fBoperator<<\fR ( TQTextStream & ts, const QMainWindow & mainWindow )"
+.BI "TQTextStream & \fBoperator<<\fR ( TQTextStream & ts, const TQMainWindow & mainWindow )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQTextStream & \fBoperator>>\fR ( TQTextStream & ts, QMainWindow & mainWindow )"
+.BI "TQTextStream & \fBoperator>>\fR ( TQTextStream & ts, TQMainWindow & mainWindow )"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The QMainWindow class provides a main application window, with a menu bar, dock windows (e.g. for toolbars), and a status bar.
+The TQMainWindow class provides a main application window, with a menu bar, dock windows (e.g. for toolbars), and a status bar.
 .PP
-Main windows are most often used to provide menus, toolbars and a status bar around a large central widget, such as a text edit, drawing canvas or QWorkspace (for MDI applications). QMainWindow is usually subclassed since this makes it easier to encapsulate the central widget, menus and toolbars as well as the window's state. Subclassing makes it possible to create the slots that are called when the user clicks menu items or toolbar buttons. You can also create main windows using TQt Designer. We'll briefly review adding menu items and toolbar buttons then describe the facilities of QMainWindow itself.
+Main windows are most often used to provide menus, toolbars and a status bar around a large central widget, such as a text edit, drawing canvas or TQWorkspace (for MDI applications). TQMainWindow is usually subclassed since this makes it easier to encapsulate the central widget, menus and toolbars as well as the window's state. Subclassing makes it possible to create the slots that are called when the user clicks menu items or toolbar buttons. You can also create main windows using TQt Designer. We'll briefly review adding menu items and toolbar buttons then describe the facilities of TQMainWindow itself.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-    QMainWindow *mw = new QMainWindow;
+    TQMainWindow *mw = new TQMainWindow;
 .br
     TQTextEdit *edit = new TQTextEdit( mw, "editor" );
 .br
@@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ Main windows are most often used to provide menus, toolbars and a status bar aro
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-QMainWindows may be created in their own right as shown above. The central widget is set with setCentralWidget(). Popup menus can be added to the default menu bar, widgets can be added to the status bar, toolbars and dock windows can be added to any of the dock areas.
+TQMainWindows may be created in their own right as shown above. The central widget is set with setCentralWidget(). Popup menus can be added to the default menu bar, widgets can be added to the status bar, toolbars and dock windows can be added to any of the dock areas.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -276,13 +276,13 @@ QMainWindows may be created in their own right as shown above. The central widge
         mw->show();
 .fi
 .PP
-In the extract above ApplicationWindow is a subclass of QMainWindow that we must write for ourselves; this is the usual approach to using QMainWindow. (The source for the extracts in this description are taken from application/main.cpp, application/application.cpp, action/main.cpp, and action/application.cpp )
+In the extract above ApplicationWindow is a subclass of TQMainWindow that we must write for ourselves; this is the usual approach to using TQMainWindow. (The source for the extracts in this description are taken from application/main.cpp, application/application.cpp, action/main.cpp, and action/application.cpp )
 .PP
-When subclassing we add the menu items and toolbars in the subclass's constructor. If we've created a QMainWindow instance directly we can add menu items and toolbars just as easily by passing the QMainWindow instance as the parent instead of the \fIthis\fR pointer.
+When subclassing we add the menu items and toolbars in the subclass's constructor. If we've created a TQMainWindow instance directly we can add menu items and toolbars just as easily by passing the TQMainWindow instance as the parent instead of the \fIthis\fR pointer.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QPopupMenu * help = new QPopupMenu( this );
+        TQPopupMenu * help = new TQPopupMenu( this );
 .br
         menuBar()->insertItem( "&Help", help );
 .br
@@ -290,25 +290,25 @@ When subclassing we add the menu items and toolbars in the subclass's constructo
         help->insertItem( "&About", this, TQ_SLOT(about()), Key_F1 );
 .fi
 .PP
-Here we've added a new menu with one menu item. The menu has been inserted into the menu bar that QMainWindow provides by default and which is accessible through the menuBar() function. The slot will be called when the menu item is clicked.
+Here we've added a new menu with one menu item. The menu has been inserted into the menu bar that TQMainWindow provides by default and which is accessible through the menuBar() function. The slot will be called when the menu item is clicked.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QToolBar * fileTools = new QToolBar( this, "file operations" );
+        TQToolBar * fileTools = new TQToolBar( this, "file operations" );
 .br
         fileTools->setLabel( "File Operations" );
 .fi
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QToolButton * fileOpen
+        TQToolButton * fileOpen
 .br
-            = new QToolButton( openIcon, "Open File", TQString::null,
+            = new TQToolButton( openIcon, "Open File", TQString::null,
 .br
                                this, TQ_SLOT(choose()), fileTools, "open file" );
 .fi
 .PP
-This extract shows the creation of a toolbar with one toolbar button. QMainWindow supplies four dock areas for toolbars. When a toolbar is created as a child of a QMainWindow (or derived class) instance it will be placed in a dock area (the Top dock area by default). The slot will be called when the toolbar button is clicked. Any dock window can be added to a dock area either using addDockWindow(), or by creating a dock window with the QMainWindow as the parent.
+This extract shows the creation of a toolbar with one toolbar button. TQMainWindow supplies four dock areas for toolbars. When a toolbar is created as a child of a TQMainWindow (or derived class) instance it will be placed in a dock area (the Top dock area by default). The slot will be called when the toolbar button is clicked. Any dock window can be added to a dock area either using addDockWindow(), or by creating a dock window with the TQMainWindow as the parent.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -321,18 +321,18 @@ This extract shows the creation of a toolbar with one toolbar button. QMainWindo
         statusBar()->message( "Ready", 2000 );
 .fi
 .PP
-Having created the menus and toolbar we create an instance of the large central widget, give it the focus and set it as the main window's central widget. In the example we've also set the status bar, accessed via the statusBar() function, to an initial message which will be displayed for two seconds. Note that you can add additional widgets to the status bar, for example labels, to show further status information. See the QStatusBar documentation for details, particularly the addWidget() function.
+Having created the menus and toolbar we create an instance of the large central widget, give it the focus and set it as the main window's central widget. In the example we've also set the status bar, accessed via the statusBar() function, to an initial message which will be displayed for two seconds. Note that you can add additional widgets to the status bar, for example labels, to show further status information. See the TQStatusBar documentation for details, particularly the addWidget() function.
 .PP
 Often we want to synchronize a toolbar button with a menu item. For example, if the user clicks a 'bold' toolbar button we want the 'bold' menu item to be checked. This synchronization can be achieved automatically by creating actions and adding the actions to the toolbar and menu.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QAction * fileOpenAction;
+        TQAction * fileOpenAction;
 .fi
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        fileOpenAction = new QAction( QPixmap( fileopen ), "&Open...",
+        fileOpenAction = new TQAction( QPixmap( fileopen ), "&Open...",
 .br
                                       CTRL+Key_O, this, "open" );
 .br
@@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ Here we create an action with an icon which will be used in any menu and toolbar
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QPopupMenu * file = new QPopupMenu( this );
+        TQPopupMenu * file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
 .br
         menuBar()->insertItem( "&File", file );
 .fi
@@ -353,54 +353,54 @@ Here we create an action with an icon which will be used in any menu and toolbar
         fileOpenAction->addTo( file );
 .fi
 .PP
-The extract above shows the creation of a popup menu. We add the menu to the QMainWindow's menu bar and add our action.
+The extract above shows the creation of a popup menu. We add the menu to the TQMainWindow's menu bar and add our action.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QToolBar * fileTools = new QToolBar( this, "file operations" );
+        TQToolBar * fileTools = new TQToolBar( this, "file operations" );
 .br
         fileTools->setLabel( "File Operations" );
 .br
         fileOpenAction->addTo( fileTools );
 .fi
 .PP
-Here we create a new toolbar as a child of the QMainWindow and add our action to the toolbar.
+Here we create a new toolbar as a child of the TQMainWindow and add our action to the toolbar.
 .PP
-We'll now explore the functionality offered by QMainWindow.
+We'll now explore the functionality offered by TQMainWindow.
 .PP
-The main window will take care of the dock areas, and the geometry of the central widget, but all other aspects of the central widget are left to you. QMainWindow automatically detects the creation of a menu bar or status bar if you specify the QMainWindow as parent, or you can use the provided menuBar() and statusBar() functions. The functions menuBar() and statusBar() create a suitable widget if one doesn't exist, and update the window's layout to make space.
+The main window will take care of the dock areas, and the geometry of the central widget, but all other aspects of the central widget are left to you. TQMainWindow automatically detects the creation of a menu bar or status bar if you specify the TQMainWindow as parent, or you can use the provided menuBar() and statusBar() functions. The functions menuBar() and statusBar() create a suitable widget if one doesn't exist, and update the window's layout to make space.
 .PP
-QMainWindow provides a QToolTipGroup connected to the status bar. The function toolTipGroup() provides access to the default QToolTipGroup. It isn't possible to set a different tool tip group.
+TQMainWindow provides a TQToolTipGroup connected to the status bar. The function toolTipGroup() provides access to the default TQToolTipGroup. It isn't possible to set a different tool tip group.
 .PP
-New dock windows and toolbars can be added to a QMainWindow using addDockWindow(). Dock windows can be moved using moveDockWindow() and removed with removeDockWindow(). QMainWindow allows default dock window (toolbar) docking in all its dock areas (Top, Left, Right, Bottom). You can use setDockEnabled() to enable and disable docking areas for dock windows. When adding or moving dock windows you can specify their 'edge' (dock area). The currently available edges are: Top, Left, Right, Bottom, Minimized (effectively a 'hidden' dock area) and TornOff (floating). See TQt::Dock for an explanation of these areas. Note that the *ToolBar functions are included for backward compatibility; all new code should use the *DockWindow functions. QToolbar is a subclass of QDockWindow so all functions that work with dock windows work on toolbars in the same way.
+New dock windows and toolbars can be added to a TQMainWindow using addDockWindow(). Dock windows can be moved using moveDockWindow() and removed with removeDockWindow(). TQMainWindow allows default dock window (toolbar) docking in all its dock areas (Top, Left, Right, Bottom). You can use setDockEnabled() to enable and disable docking areas for dock windows. When adding or moving dock windows you can specify their 'edge' (dock area). The currently available edges are: Top, Left, Right, Bottom, Minimized (effectively a 'hidden' dock area) and TornOff (floating). See TQt::Dock for an explanation of these areas. Note that the *ToolBar functions are included for backward compatibility; all new code should use the *DockWindow functions. TQToolbar is a subclass of QDockWindow so all functions that work with dock windows work on toolbars in the same way.
 .PP
-If the user clicks the close button, then the dock window is hidden. A dock window can be hidden or unhidden by the user by right clicking a dock area and clicking the name of the relevant dock window on the pop up dock window menu. This menu lists the names of every dock window; visible dock windows have a tick beside their names. The dock window menu is created automatically as required by createDockWindowMenu(). Since it may not always be appropriate for a dock window to appear on this menu the setAppropriate() function is used to inform the main window whether or not the dock window menu should include a particular dock window. Double clicking a dock window handle (usually on the left-hand side of the dock window) undocks (floats) the dock window. Double clicking a floating dock window's titlebar will dock the floating dock window. (See also QMainWindow::DockWindows.)
+If the user clicks the close button, then the dock window is hidden. A dock window can be hidden or unhidden by the user by right clicking a dock area and clicking the name of the relevant dock window on the pop up dock window menu. This menu lists the names of every dock window; visible dock windows have a tick beside their names. The dock window menu is created automatically as required by createDockWindowMenu(). Since it may not always be appropriate for a dock window to appear on this menu the setAppropriate() function is used to inform the main window whether or not the dock window menu should include a particular dock window. Double clicking a dock window handle (usually on the left-hand side of the dock window) undocks (floats) the dock window. Double clicking a floating dock window's titlebar will dock the floating dock window. (See also TQMainWindow::DockWindows.)
 .PP
-Some functions change the appearance of a QMainWindow globally:
+Some functions change the appearance of a TQMainWindow globally:
 .TP
 QDockWindow::setHorizontalStretchable() and QDockWindow::setVerticalStretchable() are used to make specific dock windows or toolbars stretchable.
 .TP
 setUsesBigPixmaps() is used to set whether tool buttons should draw small or large pixmaps (see TQIconSet for more information).
 .TP
-setUsesTextLabel() is used to set whether tool buttons should display a textual label in addition to pixmaps (see QToolButton for more information).
+setUsesTextLabel() is used to set whether tool buttons should display a textual label in addition to pixmaps (see TQToolButton for more information).
 .PP
 The user can drag dock windows into any enabled docking area. Dock windows can also be dragged \fIwithin\fR a docking area, for example to rearrange the order of some toolbars. Dock windows can also be dragged outside any docking area (undocked or 'floated'). Being able to drag dock windows can be enabled (the default) and disabled using setDockWindowsMovable().
 .PP
-The Minimized edge is a hidden dock area. If this dock area is enabled the user can hide (minimize) a dock window or show (restore) a minimized dock window by clicking the dock window handle. If the user hovers the mouse cursor over one of the handles, the caption of the dock window is displayed in a tool tip (see QDockWindow::caption() or QToolBar::label()), so if you enable the Minimized dock area, it is best to specify a meaningful caption or label for each dock window. To minimize a dock window programmatically use moveDockWindow() with an edge of Minimized.
+The Minimized edge is a hidden dock area. If this dock area is enabled the user can hide (minimize) a dock window or show (restore) a minimized dock window by clicking the dock window handle. If the user hovers the mouse cursor over one of the handles, the caption of the dock window is displayed in a tool tip (see QDockWindow::caption() or TQToolBar::label()), so if you enable the Minimized dock area, it is best to specify a meaningful caption or label for each dock window. To minimize a dock window programmatically use moveDockWindow() with an edge of Minimized.
 .PP
 Dock windows are moved transparently by default, i.e. during the drag an outline rectangle is drawn on the screen representing the position of the dock window as it moves. If you want the dock window to be shown normally whilst it is moved use setOpaqueMoving().
 .PP
 The location of a dock window, i.e. its dock area and position within the dock area, can be determined by calling getLocation(). Movable dock windows can be lined up to minimize wasted space with lineUpDockWindows(). Pointers to the dock areas are available from topDock(), leftDock(), rightDock() and bottomDock(). A customize menu item is added to the pop up dock window menu if isCustomizable() returns TRUE; it returns FALSE by default. Reimplement isCustomizable() and customize() if you want to offer this extra menu item, for example, to allow the user to change settings relating to the main window and its toolbars and dock windows.
 .PP
-The main window's menu bar is fixed (at the top) by default. If you want a movable menu bar, create a QMenuBar as a stretchable widget inside its own movable dock window and restrict this dock window to only live within the Top or Bottom dock:
+The main window's menu bar is fixed (at the top) by default. If you want a movable menu bar, create a TQMenuBar as a stretchable widget inside its own movable dock window and restrict this dock window to only live within the Top or Bottom dock:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-    QToolBar *tb = new QToolBar( this );
+    TQToolBar *tb = new TQToolBar( this );
 .br
     addDockWindow( tb, tr( "Menubar" ), Top, FALSE );
 .br
-    QMenuBar *mb = new QMenuBar( tb );
+    TQMenuBar *mb = new TQMenuBar( tb );
 .br
     mb->setFrameStyle( QFrame::NoFrame );
 .br
@@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ The main window's menu bar is fixed (at the top) by default. If you want a movab
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-An application with multiple dock windows can choose to save the current dock window layout in order to restore it later, e.g. in the next session. You can do this by using the streaming operators for QMainWindow.
+An application with multiple dock windows can choose to save the current dock window layout in order to restore it later, e.g. in the next session. You can do this by using the streaming operators for TQMainWindow.
 .PP
 To save the layout and positions of all the dock windows do this:
 .PP
@@ -452,11 +452,11 @@ To restore the dock window positions and sizes (normally when the application is
 .PP
 The QSettings class can be used in conjunction with the streaming operators to store the application's settings.
 .PP
-QMainWindow's management of dock windows and toolbars is done transparently behind-the-scenes by QDockArea.
+TQMainWindow's management of dock windows and toolbars is done transparently behind-the-scenes by QDockArea.
 .PP
-For multi-document interfaces (MDI), use a QWorkspace as the central widget.
+For multi-document interfaces (MDI), use a TQWorkspace as the central widget.
 .PP
-Adding dock windows, e.g. toolbars, to QMainWindow's dock areas is straightforward. If the supplied dock areas are not sufficient for your application we suggest that you create a TQWidget subclass and add your own dock areas (see QDockArea) to the subclass since QMainWindow provides functionality specific to the standard dock areas it provides.
+Adding dock windows, e.g. toolbars, to TQMainWindow's dock areas is straightforward. If the supplied dock areas are not sufficient for your application we suggest that you create a TQWidget subclass and add your own dock areas (see QDockArea) to the subclass since TQMainWindow provides functionality specific to the standard dock areas it provides.
 .PP
 .ce 1
 .B "[Image Omitted]"
@@ -465,30 +465,30 @@ Adding dock windows, e.g. toolbars, to QMainWindow's dock areas is straightforwa
 .ce 1
 .B "[Image Omitted]"
 .PP
-See also QToolBar, QDockWindow, QStatusBar, QAction, QMenuBar, QPopupMenu, QToolTipGroup, QDialog, and Main Window and Related Classes.
+See also TQToolBar, QDockWindow, TQStatusBar, TQAction, TQMenuBar, TQPopupMenu, TQToolTipGroup, QDialog, and Main Window and Related Classes.
 .SS "Member Type Documentation"
-.SH "QMainWindow::DockWindows"
+.SH "TQMainWindow::DockWindows"
 Right-clicking a dock area will pop-up the dock window menu (createDockWindowMenu() is called automatically). When called in code you can specify what items should appear on the menu with this enum.
 .TP
-\fCQMainWindow::OnlyToolBars\fR - The menu will list all the toolbars, but not any other dock windows.
+\fCTQMainWindow::OnlyToolBars\fR - The menu will list all the toolbars, but not any other dock windows.
 .TP
-\fCQMainWindow::NoToolBars\fR - The menu will list dock windows but not toolbars.
+\fCTQMainWindow::NoToolBars\fR - The menu will list dock windows but not toolbars.
 .TP
-\fCQMainWindow::AllDockWindows\fR - The menu will list all toolbars and other dock windows. (This is the default.)
+\fCTQMainWindow::AllDockWindows\fR - The menu will list all toolbars and other dock windows. (This is the default.)
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "QMainWindow::QMainWindow ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = WType_TopLevel )"
+.SH "TQMainWindow::TQMainWindow ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = WType_TopLevel )"
 Constructs an empty main window. The \fIparent\fR, \fIname\fR and widget flags \fIf\fR, are passed on to the TQWidget constructor.
 .PP
-By default, the widget flags are set to WType_TopLevel rather than 0 as they are with TQWidget. If you don't want your QMainWindow to be a top level widget then you will need to set \fIf\fR to 0.
-.SH "QMainWindow::~QMainWindow ()"
+By default, the widget flags are set to WType_TopLevel rather than 0 as they are with TQWidget. If you don't want your TQMainWindow to be a top level widget then you will need to set \fIf\fR to 0.
+.SH "TQMainWindow::~TQMainWindow ()"
 Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::addDockWindow ( QDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::addDockWindow ( QDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Adds \fIdockWindow\fR to the \fIedge\fR dock area.
 .PP
 If \fInewLine\fR is FALSE (the default) then the \fIdockWindow\fR is added at the end of the \fIedge\fR. For vertical edges the end is at the bottom, for horizontal edges (including Minimized) the end is at the right. If \fInewLine\fR is TRUE a new line of dock windows is started with \fIdockWindow\fR as the first (left-most and top-most) dock window.
 .PP
 If \fIdockWindow\fR is managed by another main window, it is first removed from that window.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::addDockWindow ( QDockWindow * dockWindow, const TQString & label, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::addDockWindow ( QDockWindow * dockWindow, const TQString & label, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Adds \fIdockWindow\fR to the dock area with label \fIlabel\fR.
@@ -496,13 +496,13 @@ Adds \fIdockWindow\fR to the dock area with label \fIlabel\fR.
 If \fInewLine\fR is FALSE (the default) the \fIdockWindow\fR is added at the end of the \fIedge\fR. For vertical edges the end is at the bottom, for horizontal edges (including Minimized) the end is at the right. If \fInewLine\fR is TRUE a new line of dock windows is started with \fIdockWindow\fR as the first (left-most and top-most) dock window.
 .PP
 If \fIdockWindow\fR is managed by another main window, it is first removed from that window.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::addToolBar ( QDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::addToolBar ( QDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::addToolBar ( QDockWindow *, const TQString & label, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::addToolBar ( QDockWindow *, const TQString & label, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-.SH "bool QMainWindow::appropriate ( QDockWindow * dw ) const"
+.SH "bool TQMainWindow::appropriate ( QDockWindow * dw ) const"
 Returns TRUE if it is appropriate to include a menu item for the \fIdw\fR dock window in the dock window menu; otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 The user is able to change the state (show or hide) a dock window that has a menu item by clicking the item.
@@ -510,11 +510,11 @@ The user is able to change the state (show or hide) a dock window that has a men
 Call setAppropriate() to indicate whether or not a particular dock window should appear on the popup menu.
 .PP
 See also setAppropriate().
-.SH "QDockArea * QMainWindow::bottomDock () const"
+.SH "QDockArea * TQMainWindow::bottomDock () const"
 Returns a pointer the Bottom dock area
 .PP
 See also topDock(), leftDock(), and rightDock().
-.SH "TQWidget * QMainWindow::centralWidget () const"
+.SH "TQWidget * TQMainWindow::centralWidget () const"
 Returns a pointer to the main window's central widget.
 .PP
 The central widget is surrounded by the left, top, right and bottom dock areas. The menu bar is above the top dock area.
@@ -522,11 +522,11 @@ The central widget is surrounded by the left, top, right and bottom dock areas.
 See also setCentralWidget().
 .PP
 Example: qfd/qfd.cpp.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::childEvent ( QChildEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::childEvent ( QChildEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Monitors events, recieved in \fIe\fR, to ensure the layout is updated.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQObject.
-.SH "QPopupMenu * QMainWindow::createDockWindowMenu ( DockWindows dockWindows = AllDockWindows ) const"
+.SH "TQPopupMenu * TQMainWindow::createDockWindowMenu ( DockWindows dockWindows = AllDockWindows ) const"
 Creates the dock window menu which contains all toolbars (if \fIdockWindows\fR is OnlyToolBars ), all dock windows (if \fIdockWindows\fR is NoToolBars) or all toolbars and dock windows (if \fIdockWindows\fR is AllDockWindows - the default).
 .PP
 This function is called internally when necessary, e.g. when the user right clicks a dock area (providing isDockMenuEnabled() returns TRUE).
@@ -540,7 +540,7 @@ Toolbars and dock windows which are not appropriate in the current context (see
 The menu also has a menu item for lining up the dock windows.
 .PP
 If isCustomizable() returns TRUE, a Customize menu item is added to the menu, which if clicked will call customize(). The isCustomizable() function we provide returns FALSE and customize() does nothing, so they must be reimplemented in a subclass to be useful.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::customize ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::customize ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 This function is called when the user clicks the Customize menu item on the dock window menu.
 .PP
 The customize menu item will only appear if isCustomizable() returns TRUE (it returns FALSE by default).
@@ -550,21 +550,21 @@ The function is intended, for example, to provide the user with a means of telli
 The default implementation does nothing and the Customize menu item is not shown on the right-click menu by default. If you want the item to appear then reimplement isCustomizable() to return TRUE, and reimplement this function to do whatever you want.
 .PP
 See also isCustomizable().
-.SH "void QMainWindow::dockWindowPositionChanged ( QDockWindow * dockWindow )\fC [signal]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::dockWindowPositionChanged ( QDockWindow * dockWindow )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when the \fIdockWindow\fR has changed its position. A change in position occurs when a dock window is moved within its dock area or moved to another dock area (including the Minimized and \fCTearOff\fR dock areas).
 .PP
 See also getLocation().
-.SH "TQPtrList<QDockWindow> QMainWindow::dockWindows ( Dock dock ) const"
+.SH "TQPtrList<QDockWindow> TQMainWindow::dockWindows ( Dock dock ) const"
 Returns a list of all the dock windows which are in the \fIdock\fR dock area, regardless of their state.
 .PP
 For example, the DockTornOff dock area may contain closed dock windows but these are returned along with the visible dock windows.
-.SH "TQPtrList<QDockWindow> QMainWindow::dockWindows () const"
+.SH "TQPtrList<QDockWindow> TQMainWindow::dockWindows () const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Returns the list of dock windows which belong to this main window, regardless of which dock area they are in or what their state is, (e.g. irrespective of whether they are visible or not).
-.SH "bool QMainWindow::dockWindowsMovable () const"
+.SH "bool TQMainWindow::dockWindowsMovable () const"
 Returns TRUE if the dock windows are movable; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "dockWindowsMovable" property for details.
-.SH "bool QMainWindow::getLocation ( QDockWindow * dw, Dock & dock, int & index, bool & nl, int & extraOffset ) const"
+.SH "bool TQMainWindow::getLocation ( QDockWindow * dw, Dock & dock, int & index, bool & nl, int & extraOffset ) const"
 Finds the location of the dock window \fIdw\fR.
 .PP
 If the \fIdw\fR dock window is found in the main window the function returns TRUE and populates the \fIdock\fR variable with the dw's dock area and the \fIindex\fR with the dw's position within the dock area. It also sets \fInl\fR to TRUE if the \fIdw\fR begins a new line (otherwise FALSE), and \fIextraOffset\fR with the dock window's offset.
@@ -574,67 +574,67 @@ If the \fIdw\fR dock window is not found then the function returns FALSE and the
 If you want to save and restore dock window positions then use operator>>() and operator<<().
 .PP
 See also operator>>() and operator<<().
-.SH "bool QMainWindow::hasDockWindow ( QDockWindow * dw )"
+.SH "bool TQMainWindow::hasDockWindow ( QDockWindow * dw )"
 Returns TRUE if \fIdw\fR is a dock window known to the main window; otherwise returns FALSE.
-.SH "bool QMainWindow::isCustomizable () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "bool TQMainWindow::isCustomizable () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns TRUE if the dock area dock window menu includes the Customize menu item (which calls customize() when clicked). Returns FALSE by default, i.e. the popup menu will not contain a Customize menu item. You will need to reimplement this function and set it to return TRUE if you wish the user to be able to see the dock window menu.
 .PP
 See also customize().
-.SH "bool QMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( Dock dock ) const"
+.SH "bool TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( Dock dock ) const"
 Returns TRUE if the \fIdock\fR dock area is enabled, i.e. it can accept user dragged dock windows; otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 See also setDockEnabled().
-.SH "bool QMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( QDockArea * area ) const"
+.SH "bool TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( QDockArea * area ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Returns TRUE if dock area \fIarea\fR is enabled, i.e. it can accept user dragged dock windows; otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 See also setDockEnabled().
-.SH "bool QMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( QDockWindow * tb, Dock dock ) const"
+.SH "bool TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( QDockWindow * tb, Dock dock ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Returns TRUE if dock area \fIdock\fR is enabled for the dock window \fItb\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 See also setDockEnabled().
-.SH "bool QMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( QDockWindow * dw, QDockArea * area ) const"
+.SH "bool TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( QDockWindow * dw, QDockArea * area ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Returns TRUE if dock area \fIarea\fR is enabled for the dock window \fIdw\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 See also setDockEnabled().
-.SH "bool QMainWindow::isDockMenuEnabled () const"
+.SH "bool TQMainWindow::isDockMenuEnabled () const"
 Returns TRUE, if the dock window menu is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 The menu lists the (appropriate()) dock windows (which may be shown or hidden), and has a "Line Up Dock Windows" menu item. It will also have a "Customize" menu item if isCustomizable() returns TRUE.
 .PP
 See also setDockEnabled(), lineUpDockWindows(), appropriate(), and setAppropriate().
-.SH "QDockArea * QMainWindow::leftDock () const"
+.SH "QDockArea * TQMainWindow::leftDock () const"
 Returns the Left dock area
 .PP
 See also rightDock(), topDock(), and bottomDock().
-.SH "void QMainWindow::lineUpDockWindows ( bool keepNewLines = FALSE )"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::lineUpDockWindows ( bool keepNewLines = FALSE )"
 This function will line up dock windows within the visible dock areas (Top, Left, Right and Bottom) as compactly as possible.
 .PP
 If \fIkeepNewLines\fR is TRUE, all dock windows stay on their original lines. If \fIkeepNewLines\fR is FALSE then newlines may be removed to achieve the most compact layout possible.
 .PP
 The method only works if dockWindowsMovable() returns TRUE.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::lineUpToolBars ( bool keepNewLines = FALSE )"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::lineUpToolBars ( bool keepNewLines = FALSE )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::menuAboutToShow ()\fC [protected slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::menuAboutToShow ()\fC [protected slot]\fR"
 This slot is called from the aboutToShow() signal of the default dock menu of the mainwindow. The default implementation initializes the menu with all dock windows and toolbars in this slot.
-.SH "QMenuBar * QMainWindow::menuBar () const"
+.SH "TQMenuBar * TQMainWindow::menuBar () const"
 Returns the menu bar for this window.
 .PP
 If there isn't one, then menuBar() creates an empty menu bar.
 .PP
 See also statusBar().
-.SH "void QMainWindow::moveDockWindow ( QDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge = DockTop )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow ( QDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge = DockTop )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Moves \fIdockWindow\fR to the end of the \fIedge\fR.
 .PP
 For vertical edges the end is at the bottom, for horizontal edges (including Minimized) the end is at the right.
 .PP
 If \fIdockWindow\fR is managed by another main window, it is first removed from that window.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::moveDockWindow ( QDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset = -1 )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow ( QDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset = -1 )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Moves \fIdockWindow\fR to position \fIindex\fR within the \fIedge\fR dock area.
@@ -646,110 +646,110 @@ If \fInl\fR is TRUE, a new dock window line is created below the line in which t
 The \fIextraOffset\fR is the space to put between the left side of the dock area (top side for vertical dock areas) and the dock window. (This is mostly used for restoring dock windows to the positions the user has dragged them to.)
 .PP
 If \fIdockWindow\fR is managed by another main window, it is first removed from that window.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::moveToolBar ( QDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop )"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::moveToolBar ( QDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::moveToolBar ( QDockWindow *, Dock, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset = -1 )"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::moveToolBar ( QDockWindow *, Dock, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset = -1 )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-.SH "bool QMainWindow::opaqueMoving () const"
+.SH "bool TQMainWindow::opaqueMoving () const"
 Returns TRUE if dock windows are moved opaquely; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "opaqueMoving" property for details.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::pixmapSizeChanged ( bool )\fC [signal]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::pixmapSizeChanged ( bool )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted whenever the setUsesBigPixmaps() is called with a value different to the current setting. All widgets that should respond to such changes, e.g. toolbar buttons, must connect to this signal.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::removeDockWindow ( QDockWindow * dockWindow )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow ( QDockWindow * dockWindow )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Removes \fIdockWindow\fR from the main window's docking area, provided \fIdockWindow\fR is non-null and managed by this main window.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::removeToolBar ( QDockWindow * )"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::removeToolBar ( QDockWindow * )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-.SH "QDockArea * QMainWindow::rightDock () const"
+.SH "QDockArea * TQMainWindow::rightDock () const"
 Returns the Right dock area
 .PP
 See also leftDock(), topDock(), and bottomDock().
-.SH "bool QMainWindow::rightJustification () const"
+.SH "bool TQMainWindow::rightJustification () const"
 Returns TRUE if the main window right-justifies its dock windows; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "rightJustification" property for details.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::setAppropriate ( QDockWindow * dw, bool a )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::setAppropriate ( QDockWindow * dw, bool a )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Use this function to control whether or not the \fIdw\fR dock window's caption should appear as a menu item on the dock window menu that lists the dock windows.
 .PP
 If \fIa\fR is TRUE then the \fIdw\fR will appear as a menu item on the dock window menu. The user is able to change the state (show or hide) a dock window that has a menu item by clicking the item; depending on the state of your application, this may or may not be appropriate. If \fIa\fR is FALSE the \fIdw\fR will not appear on the popup menu.
 .PP
 See also showDockMenu(), isCustomizable(), and customize().
-.SH "void QMainWindow::setCentralWidget ( TQWidget * w )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::setCentralWidget ( TQWidget * w )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the central widget for this main window to \fIw\fR.
 .PP
 The central widget is surrounded by the left, top, right and bottom dock areas. The menu bar is above the top dock area.
 .PP
 See also centralWidget().
-.SH "void QMainWindow::setDockEnabled ( Dock dock, bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::setDockEnabled ( Dock dock, bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 If \fIenable\fR is TRUE then users can dock windows in the \fIdock\fR area. If \fIenable\fR is FALSE users cannot dock windows in the \fIdock\fR dock area.
 .PP
 Users can dock (drag) dock windows into any enabled dock area.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::setDockEnabled ( QDockWindow * dw, Dock dock, bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::setDockEnabled ( QDockWindow * dw, Dock dock, bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 If \fIenable\fR is TRUE then users can dock the \fIdw\fR dock window in the \fIdock\fR area. If \fIenable\fR is FALSE users cannot dock the \fIdw\fR dock window in the \fIdock\fR area.
 .PP
 In general users can dock (drag) dock windows into any enabled dock area. Using this function particular dock areas can be enabled (or disabled) as docking points for particular dock windows.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::setDockMenuEnabled ( bool b )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::setDockMenuEnabled ( bool b )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 If \fIb\fR is TRUE, then right clicking on a dock window or dock area will pop up the dock window menu. If \fIb\fR is FALSE, right clicking a dock window or dock area will not pop up the menu.
 .PP
 The menu lists the (appropriate()) dock windows (which may be shown or hidden), and has a "Line Up Dock Windows" item. It will also have a "Customize" menu item if isCustomizable() returns TRUE.
 .PP
 See also lineUpDockWindows() and isDockMenuEnabled().
-.SH "void QMainWindow::setDockWindowsMovable ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::setDockWindowsMovable ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Sets whether the dock windows are movable. See the "dockWindowsMovable" property for details.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::setOpaqueMoving ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::setOpaqueMoving ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Sets whether dock windows are moved opaquely. See the "opaqueMoving" property for details.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::setRightJustification ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::setRightJustification ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Sets whether the main window right-justifies its dock windows. See the "rightJustification" property for details.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::setToolBarsMovable ( bool )\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::setToolBarsMovable ( bool )\fC [slot]\fR"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::setUpLayout ()\fC [virtual protected slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::setUpLayout ()\fC [virtual protected slot]\fR"
 Sets up the geometry management of the window. It is called automatically when needed, so you shouldn't need to call it.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Sets whether big pixmaps are enabled. See the "usesBigPixmaps" property for details.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::setUsesTextLabel ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::setUsesTextLabel ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Sets whether text labels for toolbar buttons are enabled. See the "usesTextLabel" property for details.
-.SH "bool QMainWindow::showDockMenu ( const QPoint & globalPos )\fC [virtual protected slot]\fR"
+.SH "bool TQMainWindow::showDockMenu ( const QPoint & globalPos )\fC [virtual protected slot]\fR"
 Shows the dock menu at the position \fIglobalPos\fR. The menu lists the dock windows so that they can be shown (or hidden), lined up, and possibly customized. Returns TRUE if the menu is shown; otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 If you want a custom menu, reimplement this function. You can create the menu from scratch or call createDockWindowMenu() and modify the result.
-.SH "QStatusBar * QMainWindow::statusBar () const"
+.SH "TQStatusBar * TQMainWindow::statusBar () const"
 Returns this main window's status bar. If there isn't one, statusBar() creates an empty status bar, and if necessary a tool tip group too.
 .PP
 See also menuBar() and toolTipGroup().
 .PP
 Example: qfd/qfd.cpp.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::toolBarPositionChanged ( QToolBar * )\fC [signal]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::toolBarPositionChanged ( TQToolBar * )\fC [signal]\fR"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-.SH "TQPtrList<QToolBar> QMainWindow::toolBars ( Dock dock ) const"
+.SH "TQPtrList<TQToolBar> TQMainWindow::toolBars ( Dock dock ) const"
 Returns a list of all the toolbars which are in the \fIdock\fR dock area, regardless of their state.
 .PP
 For example, the TornOff dock area may contain closed toolbars but these are returned along with the visible toolbars.
 .PP
 See also dockWindows().
-.SH "bool QMainWindow::toolBarsMovable () const"
+.SH "bool TQMainWindow::toolBarsMovable () const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-.SH "QToolTipGroup * QMainWindow::toolTipGroup () const"
+.SH "TQToolTipGroup * TQMainWindow::toolTipGroup () const"
 Returns this main window's tool tip group. If there isn't one, toolTipGroup() creates an empty tool tip group.
 .PP
 See also menuBar() and statusBar().
-.SH "QDockArea * QMainWindow::topDock () const"
+.SH "QDockArea * TQMainWindow::topDock () const"
 Returns the Top dock area
 .PP
 See also bottomDock(), leftDock(), and rightDock().
-.SH "bool QMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps () const"
+.SH "bool TQMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps () const"
 Returns TRUE if big pixmaps are enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "usesBigPixmaps" property for details.
-.SH "bool QMainWindow::usesTextLabel () const"
+.SH "bool TQMainWindow::usesTextLabel () const"
 Returns TRUE if text labels for toolbar buttons are enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "usesTextLabel" property for details.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::usesTextLabelChanged ( bool )\fC [signal]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::usesTextLabelChanged ( bool )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted whenever the setUsesTextLabel() is called with a value different to the current setting. All widgets that should respond to such changes, e.g. toolbar buttons, must connect to this signal.
-.SH "void QMainWindow::whatsThis ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::whatsThis ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Enters 'What's This?' mode and returns immediately.
 .PP
 This is the same as QWhatsThis::enterWhatsThisMode(), but implemented as a main window object's slot. This way it can easily be used for popup menus, for example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-    QPopupMenu * help = new QPopupMenu( this );
+    TQPopupMenu * help = new TQPopupMenu( this );
 .br
     help->insertItem( "What's &This", this , TQ_SLOT(whatsThis()), SHIFT+Key_F1);
 .br
@@ -760,7 +760,7 @@ See also QWhatsThis::enterWhatsThisMode().
 .SH "bool dockWindowsMovable"
 This property holds whether the dock windows are movable.
 .PP
-If TRUE (the default), the user will be able to move movable dock windows from one QMainWindow dock area to another, including the \fCTearOff\fR area (i.e. where the dock window floats freely as a window in its own right), and the Minimized area (where only the dock window's handle is shown below the menu bar). Moveable dock windows can also be moved within QMainWindow dock areas, i.e. to rearrange them within a dock area.
+If TRUE (the default), the user will be able to move movable dock windows from one TQMainWindow dock area to another, including the \fCTearOff\fR area (i.e. where the dock window floats freely as a window in its own right), and the Minimized area (where only the dock window's handle is shown below the menu bar). Moveable dock windows can also be moved within TQMainWindow dock areas, i.e. to rearrange them within a dock area.
 .PP
 If FALSE the user will not be able to move any dock windows.
 .PP
@@ -802,25 +802,25 @@ If disabled (the default), the tool buttons will not use text labels. If enabled
 .PP
 Tool buttons and other widgets that wish to respond to this setting are responsible for reading the correct state on startup, and for connecting to the main window's widget's usesTextLabelChanged() signal.
 .PP
-See also QToolButton::usesTextLabel.
+See also TQToolButton::usesTextLabel.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setUsesTextLabel() and get this property's value with usesTextLabel().
 .SH RELATED FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQTextStream & operator<< ( TQTextStream & ts, const QMainWindow & mainWindow )"
-Writes the layout (sizes and positions) of the dock windows in the dock areas of the QMainWindow \fImainWindow\fR, including Minimized and TornOff dock windows, to the text stream \fIts\fR.
+.SH "TQTextStream & operator<< ( TQTextStream & ts, const TQMainWindow & mainWindow )"
+Writes the layout (sizes and positions) of the dock windows in the dock areas of the TQMainWindow \fImainWindow\fR, including Minimized and TornOff dock windows, to the text stream \fIts\fR.
 .PP
 This can be used, for example, in conjunction with QSettings to save the user's layout when the \\mainWindow receives a closeEvent.
 .PP
 See also operator>>() and closeEvent().
-.SH "TQTextStream & operator>> ( TQTextStream & ts, QMainWindow & mainWindow )"
-Reads the layout (sizes and positions) of the dock windows in the dock areas of the QMainWindow \fImainWindow\fR from the text stream, \fIts\fR, including Minimized and TornOff dock windows. Restores the dock windows and dock areas to these sizes and positions. The layout information must be in the format produced by operator<<().
+.SH "TQTextStream & operator>> ( TQTextStream & ts, TQMainWindow & mainWindow )"
+Reads the layout (sizes and positions) of the dock windows in the dock areas of the TQMainWindow \fImainWindow\fR from the text stream, \fIts\fR, including Minimized and TornOff dock windows. Restores the dock windows and dock areas to these sizes and positions. The layout information must be in the format produced by operator<<().
 .PP
 This can be used, for example, in conjunction with QSettings to restore the user's layout.
 .PP
 See also operator<<().
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqmainwindow.html
+.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqmainwindow.html
 .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html
 .SH COPYRIGHT
 Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com.  See the
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmenubar.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmenubar.3qt
index 75c597585..8331e1882 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqmenubar.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmenubar.3qt
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 '\" t
-.TH QMenuBar 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
+.TH TQMenuBar 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
 .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.  See the
 .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license
 .\" statement.
@@ -7,19 +7,19 @@
 .ad l
 .nh
 .SH NAME
-QMenuBar \- Horizontal menu bar
+TQMenuBar \- Horizontal menu bar
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fC#include <ntqmenubar.h>\fR
+\fC#include <tqmenubar.h>\fR
 .PP
-Inherits QFrame and QMenuData.
+Inherits QFrame and TQMenuData.
 .PP
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQMenuBar\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQMenuBar\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fB~QMenuBar\fR ()"
+.BI "\fB~TQMenuBar\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBshow\fR ()"
@@ -76,10 +76,10 @@ Inherits QFrame and QMenuData.
 .BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQString & text, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const QPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
@@ -88,10 +88,10 @@ Inherits QFrame and QMenuData.
 .BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const QPixmap & pixmap, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const QPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( TQWidget * widget, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
@@ -146,9 +146,9 @@ Inherits QFrame and QMenuData.
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The QMenuBar class provides a horizontal menu bar.
+The TQMenuBar class provides a horizontal menu bar.
 .PP
-A menu bar consists of a list of pull-down menu items. You add menu items with insertItem(). For example, asuming that \fCmenubar\fR is a pointer to a QMenuBar and \fCfilemenu\fR is a pointer to a QPopupMenu, the following statement inserts the menu into the menu bar:
+A menu bar consists of a list of pull-down menu items. You add menu items with insertItem(). For example, asuming that \fCmenubar\fR is a pointer to a TQMenuBar and \fCfilemenu\fR is a pointer to a TQPopupMenu, the following statement inserts the menu into the menu bar:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ Example of creating a menu bar with menu items (from menu/menu.cpp):
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QPopupMenu *file = new QPopupMenu( this );
+        TQPopupMenu *file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
 .fi
 .PP
 .nf
@@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Example of creating a menu bar with menu items (from menu/menu.cpp):
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        menu = new QMenuBar( this );
+        menu = new TQMenuBar( this );
 .fi
 .PP
 .nf
@@ -185,13 +185,13 @@ Example of creating a menu bar with menu items (from menu/menu.cpp):
         menu->insertItem( "&File", file );
 .fi
 .PP
-In most main window style applications you would use the menuBar() provided in QMainWindow, adding QPopupMenus to the menu bar and adding QActions to the popup menus.
+In most main window style applications you would use the menuBar() provided in TQMainWindow, adding TQPopupMenus to the menu bar and adding TQActions to the popup menus.
 .PP
 Example (from action/application.cpp):
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QPopupMenu * file = new QPopupMenu( this );
+        TQPopupMenu * file = new TQPopupMenu( this );
 .br
         menuBar()->insertItem( "&File", file );
 .br
@@ -209,12 +209,12 @@ Menu items may be removed with removeItem() and enabled or disabled with setItem
 .ce 1
 .B "[Image Omitted]"
 .PP
-.SH "QMenuBar on Qt/Mac"
-QMenuBar on Qt/Mac is a wrapper for using the system-wide menubar. If you have multiple menubars in one dialog the outermost menubar (normally inside a widget with widget flag WType_TopLevel) will be used for the system-wide menubar.
+.SH "TQMenuBar on Qt/Mac"
+TQMenuBar on Qt/Mac is a wrapper for using the system-wide menubar. If you have multiple menubars in one dialog the outermost menubar (normally inside a widget with widget flag WType_TopLevel) will be used for the system-wide menubar.
 .PP
-Note that arbitrary TQt widgets \fIcannot\fR be inserted into a QMenuBar on the Mac because TQt uses Mac's native menus which don't support this functionality. This limitation does not apply to stand-alone QPopupMenus.
+Note that arbitrary TQt widgets \fIcannot\fR be inserted into a TQMenuBar on the Mac because TQt uses Mac's native menus which don't support this functionality. This limitation does not apply to stand-alone TQPopupMenus.
 .PP
-Qt/Mac also provides a menubar merging feature to make QMenuBar conform more closely to accepted Mac OS X menubar layout. The merging functionality is based on string matching the title of a QPopupMenu entry. These strings are translated (using TQObject::tr()) in the "QMenuBar" context. If an entry is moved its slots will still fire as if it was in the original place. The table below outlines the strings looked for and where the entry is placed if matched:
+Qt/Mac also provides a menubar merging feature to make TQMenuBar conform more closely to accepted Mac OS X menubar layout. The merging functionality is based on string matching the title of a TQPopupMenu entry. These strings are translated (using TQObject::tr()) in the "TQMenuBar" context. If an entry is moved its slots will still fire as if it was in the original place. The table below outlines the strings looked for and where the entry is placed if matched:
 .PP
 <center>.nf
 .TS
@@ -223,59 +223,59 @@ l - l. String matches Placement Notes about.* Application Menu | About If this e
 .fi
 </center>
 .PP
-menu/menu.cpp is an example of QMenuBar and QPopupMenu use.
+menu/menu.cpp is an example of TQMenuBar and TQPopupMenu use.
 .PP
-See also QPopupMenu, QAccel, QAction, Aqua Style Guidelines, GUI Design Handbook: Menu Bar, and Main Window and Related Classes.
+See also TQPopupMenu, QAccel, TQAction, Aqua Style Guidelines, GUI Design Handbook: Menu Bar, and Main Window and Related Classes.
 .SS "Member Type Documentation"
-.SH "QMenuBar::Separator"
-This enum type is used to decide whether QMenuBar should draw a separator line at its bottom.
+.SH "TQMenuBar::Separator"
+This enum type is used to decide whether TQMenuBar should draw a separator line at its bottom.
 .TP
-\fCQMenuBar::Never\fR - In many applications there is already a separator, and having two looks wrong.
+\fCTQMenuBar::Never\fR - In many applications there is already a separator, and having two looks wrong.
 .TP
-\fCQMenuBar::InWindowsStyle\fR - In some other applications a separator looks good in Windows style, but nowhere else.
+\fCTQMenuBar::InWindowsStyle\fR - In some other applications a separator looks good in Windows style, but nowhere else.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "QMenuBar::QMenuBar ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
+.SH "TQMenuBar::TQMenuBar ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
 Constructs a menu bar called \fIname\fR with parent \fIparent\fR.
-.SH "QMenuBar::~QMenuBar ()"
+.SH "TQMenuBar::~TQMenuBar ()"
 Destroys the menu bar.
-.SH "void QMenuBar::activated ( int id )\fC [signal]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMenuBar::activated ( int id )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when a menu item is selected; \fIid\fR is the id of the selected item.
 .PP
-Normally you will connect each menu item to a single slot using QMenuData::insertItem(), but sometimes you will want to connect several items to a single slot (most often if the user selects from an array). This signal is useful in such cases.
+Normally you will connect each menu item to a single slot using TQMenuData::insertItem(), but sometimes you will want to connect several items to a single slot (most often if the user selects from an array). This signal is useful in such cases.
 .PP
-See also highlighted() and QMenuData::insertItem().
+See also highlighted() and TQMenuData::insertItem().
 .PP
 Example: progress/progress.cpp.
-.SH "void QMenuData::clear ()"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::clear ()"
 Removes all menu items.
 .PP
 See also removeItem() and removeItemAt().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l mdi/application.cpp and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-.SH "void QMenuBar::drawContents ( QPainter * p )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMenuBar::drawContents ( QPainter * p )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Called from QFrame::paintEvent(). Draws the menu bar contents using painter \fIp\fR.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QFrame.
-.SH "int QMenuBar::heightForWidth ( int max_width ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "int TQMenuBar::heightForWidth ( int max_width ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the height that the menu would resize itself to if its parent (and hence itself) resized to the given \fImax_width\fR. This can be useful for simple layout tasks in which the height of the menu bar is needed after items have been inserted. See showimg/showimg.cpp for an example of the usage.
 .PP
 Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-.SH "void QMenuBar::hide ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMenuBar::hide ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Reimplements TQWidget::hide() in order to deselect any selected item, and calls setUpLayout() for the main window.
 .PP
 Example: grapher/grapher.cpp.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-.SH "void QMenuBar::highlighted ( int id )\fC [signal]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMenuBar::highlighted ( int id )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when a menu item is highlighted; \fIid\fR is the id of the highlighted item.
 .PP
-Normally, you will connect each menu item to a single slot using QMenuData::insertItem(), but sometimes you will want to connect several items to a single slot (most often if the user selects from an array). This signal is useful in such cases.
+Normally, you will connect each menu item to a single slot using TQMenuData::insertItem(), but sometimes you will want to connect several items to a single slot (most often if the user selects from an array). This signal is useful in such cases.
 .PP
-See also activated() and QMenuData::insertItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+See also activated() and TQMenuData::insertItem().
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 The family of insertItem() functions inserts menu items into a popup menu or a menu bar.
 .PP
 A menu item is usually either a text string or a pixmap, both with an optional icon or keyboard accelerator. For special cases it is also possible to insert custom items (see QCustomMenuItem) or even widgets into popup menus.
@@ -290,9 +290,9 @@ Example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QMenuBar   *mainMenu = new QMenuBar;
+        TQMenuBar   *mainMenu = new TQMenuBar;
 .br
-        QPopupMenu *fileMenu = new QPopupMenu;
+        TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new TQPopupMenu;
 .br
         fileMenu->insertItem( "New",  myView, TQ_SLOT(newFile()), CTRL+Key_N );
 .br
@@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ The \fIid\fR specifies the identification number associated with the menu item.
 .PP
 The \fIindex\fR specifies the position in the menu. The menu item is appended at the end of the list if \fIindex\fR is negative.
 .PP
-Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global, instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example, accelerators in QPopupMenu items only work for menus that are associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget() chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent QAccel object.
+Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global, instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example, accelerators in TQPopupMenu items only work for menus that are associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget() chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent QAccel object.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR Be careful when passing a literal 0 to insertItem() because some C++ compilers choose the wrong overloaded function. Cast the 0 to what you mean, e.g. \fC(TQObject*)0\fR.
 .PP
@@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), QAccel, and ntqn
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, canvas/canvas.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sound/sound.cpp.
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, text \fItext\fR, accelerator \fIaccel\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position. The menu item is connected it to the \fIreceiver\fR's \fImember\fR slot. The icon will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
@@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, text \fItext\fR, accelerator \fIaccel\
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), QAccel, and ntqnamespace.h.
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const QPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const QPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with pixmap \fIpixmap\fR, accelerator \fIaccel\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position. The menu item is connected it to the \fIreceiver\fR's \fImember\fR slot. The icon will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
@@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap should provide a
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, pixmap \fIpixmap\fR, accelerator \fIaccel\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item. The item is connected to the \fImember\fR slot in the \fIreceiver\fR object.
@@ -362,7 +362,7 @@ To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap should provide a
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), QAccel, and ntqnamespace.h.
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with text \fItext\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position.
@@ -370,7 +370,7 @@ Inserts a menu item with text \fItext\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fI
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, text \fItext\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
@@ -378,7 +378,7 @@ Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, text \fItext\fR, optional id \fIid\fR,
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with text \fItext\fR, submenu \fIpopup\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position.
@@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ The \fIpopup\fR must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent widget. It is
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, text \fItext\fR, submenu \fIpopup\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
@@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ The \fIpopup\fR must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent widget. It is
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const QPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const QPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with pixmap \fIpixmap\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position.
@@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap should provide a
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, pixmap \fIpixmap\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item.
@@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, pixmap \fIpixmap\fR, optional id \fIid
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const QPixmap & pixmap, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const QPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with pixmap \fIpixmap\fR, submenu \fIpopup\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position.
@@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ The \fIpopup\fR must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent widget. It is
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, pixmap \fIpixmap\fR submenu \fIpopup\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item.
@@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ The \fIpopup\fR must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent widget. It is
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( TQWidget * widget, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( TQWidget * widget, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item that consists of the widget \fIwidget\fR with optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position.
@@ -455,7 +455,7 @@ If the widget is focus-enabled it will get focus when the user traverses the pop
 .br
              parentWidget() &&
 .br
-             parentWidget()->inherits("QPopupMenu") )
+             parentWidget()->inherits("TQPopupMenu") )
 .br
             parentWidget()->close();
 .br
@@ -464,7 +464,7 @@ If the widget is focus-enabled it will get focus when the user traverses the pop
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, QCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, QCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a custom menu item \fIcustom\fR with an \fIicon\fR and with optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position.
@@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ If you want to connect a custom item to a slot, use connectItem().
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also connectItem(), removeItem(), and QCustomMenuItem.
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( QCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( QCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a custom menu item \fIcustom\fR with optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position.
@@ -488,59 +488,59 @@ If you want to connect a custom item to a slot, use connectItem().
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also connectItem(), removeItem(), and QCustomMenuItem.
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertSeparator ( int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertSeparator ( int index = -1 )"
 Inserts a separator at position \fIindex\fR, and returns the menu identifier number allocated to it. The separator becomes the last menu item if \fIindex\fR is negative.
 .PP
 In a popup menu a separator is rendered as a horizontal line. In a Motif menu bar a separator is spacing, so the rest of the items (normally just "Help") are drawn right-justified. In a Windows menu bar separators are ignored (to comply with the Windows style guidelines).
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sound/sound.cpp.
-.SH "bool QMenuBar::isDefaultUp () const"
+.SH "bool TQMenuBar::isDefaultUp () const"
 Returns the popup orientation. See the "defaultUp" property for details.
-.SH "bool QMenuData::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const"
+.SH "bool TQMenuData::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const"
 Returns TRUE if the item with identifier \fIid\fR is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE
 .PP
 See also setItemEnabled() and isItemVisible().
-.SH "bool QMenuData::isItemVisible ( int id ) const"
+.SH "bool TQMenuData::isItemVisible ( int id ) const"
 Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id \fIid\fR is visible; otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 See also setItemVisible().
-.SH "void QMenuBar::menuContentsChanged ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMenuBar::menuContentsChanged ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Recomputes the menu bar's display data according to the new contents.
 .PP
-You should never need to call this; it is called automatically by QMenuData whenever it needs to be called.
+You should never need to call this; it is called automatically by TQMenuData whenever it needs to be called.
 .PP
-Reimplemented from QMenuData.
-.SH "void QMenuBar::menuStateChanged ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+Reimplemented from TQMenuData.
+.SH "void TQMenuBar::menuStateChanged ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Recomputes the menu bar's display data according to the new state.
 .PP
-You should never need to call this; it is called automatically by QMenuData whenever it needs to be called.
+You should never need to call this; it is called automatically by TQMenuData whenever it needs to be called.
 .PP
-Reimplemented from QMenuData.
-.SH "void QMenuData::removeItem ( int id )"
+Reimplemented from TQMenuData.
+.SH "void TQMenuData::removeItem ( int id )"
 Removes the menu item that has the identifier \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 See also removeItemAt() and clear().
 .PP
 Example: chart/chartform.cpp.
-.SH "Separator QMenuBar::separator () const"
+.SH "Separator TQMenuBar::separator () const"
 Returns in which cases a menubar sparator is drawn. See the "separator" property for details.
-.SH "void QMenuBar::setDefaultUp ( bool )"
+.SH "void TQMenuBar::setDefaultUp ( bool )"
 Sets the popup orientation. See the "defaultUp" property for details.
-.SH "void QMenuData::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )"
 If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, enables the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR; otherwise disables the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 See also isItemEnabled().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l mdi/application.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-.SH "void QMenuData::setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible )"
 If \fIvisible\fR is TRUE, shows the menu item with id \fIid\fR; otherwise hides the menu item with id \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 See also isItemVisible() and isItemEnabled().
-.SH "void QMenuBar::setSeparator ( Separator when )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMenuBar::setSeparator ( Separator when )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets in which cases a menubar sparator is drawn to \fIwhen\fR. See the "separator" property for details.
-.SH "void QMenuBar::show ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMenuBar::show ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Reimplements TQWidget::show() in order to set up the correct keyboard accelerators and to raise itself to the top of the widget stack.
 .PP
 Example: grapher/grapher.cpp.
@@ -563,7 +563,7 @@ This property holds in which cases a menubar sparator is drawn.
 Set this property's value with setSeparator() and get this property's value with separator().
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqmenubar.html
+.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqmenubar.html
 .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html
 .SH COPYRIGHT
 Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com.  See the
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmenudata.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmenudata.3qt
index 6c71fdf0b..ba5de1daa 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqmenudata.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmenudata.3qt
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 '\" t
-.TH QMenuData 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
+.TH TQMenuData 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
 .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.  See the
 .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license
 .\" statement.
@@ -7,19 +7,19 @@
 .ad l
 .nh
 .SH NAME
-QMenuData \- Base class for QMenuBar and QPopupMenu
+TQMenuData \- Base class for TQMenuBar and TQPopupMenu
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fC#include <ntqmenudata.h>\fR
+\fC#include <tqmenudata.h>\fR
 .PP
-Inherited by QMenuBar and QPopupMenu.
+Inherited by TQMenuBar and TQPopupMenu.
 .PP
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQMenuData\fR ()"
+.BI "\fBTQMenuData\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual \fB~QMenuData\fR ()"
+.BI "virtual \fB~TQMenuData\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "uint \fBcount\fR () const"
@@ -43,10 +43,10 @@ Inherited by QMenuBar and QPopupMenu.
 .BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQString & text, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const QPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
@@ -55,10 +55,10 @@ Inherited by QMenuBar and QPopupMenu.
 .BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const QPixmap & pixmap, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const QPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( TQWidget * widget, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
@@ -169,10 +169,10 @@ Inherited by QMenuBar and QPopupMenu.
 .BI "int \fBitemParameter\fR ( int id ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QMenuItem * \fBfindItem\fR ( int id ) const"
+.BI "TQMenuItem * \fBfindItem\fR ( int id ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QMenuItem * \fBfindItem\fR ( int id, QMenuData ** parent ) const"
+.BI "TQMenuItem * \fBfindItem\fR ( int id, TQMenuData ** parent ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBactivateItemAt\fR ( int index )"
@@ -187,16 +187,16 @@ Inherited by QMenuBar and QPopupMenu.
 .BI "virtual void \fBmenuStateChanged\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBmenuInsPopup\fR ( QPopupMenu * )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBmenuInsPopup\fR ( TQPopupMenu * )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBmenuDelPopup\fR ( QPopupMenu * )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBmenuDelPopup\fR ( TQPopupMenu * )"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The QMenuData class is a base class for QMenuBar and QPopupMenu.
+The TQMenuData class is a base class for TQMenuBar and TQPopupMenu.
 .PP
-QMenuData has an internal list of menu items. A menu item can have a text(), an accelerator, a pixmap(), an iconSet(), a whatsThis() text and a popup menu (unless it is a separator). Menu items may optionally be checked (except for separators).
+TQMenuData has an internal list of menu items. A menu item can have a text(), an accelerator, a pixmap(), an iconSet(), a whatsThis() text and a popup menu (unless it is a separator). Menu items may optionally be checked (except for separators).
 .PP
 The menu item sends out an activated() signal when it is chosen and a highlighted() signal when it receives the user input focus.
 .PP
@@ -208,68 +208,68 @@ Menu items can be removed with removeItem() and removeItemAt(), or changed with
 .PP
 Menu items are stored in a list. Use findItem() to find an item by its list position or by its menu identifier. (See also indexOf() and idAt().)
 .PP
-See also QAccel, QPopupMenu, QAction, and Miscellaneous Classes.
+See also QAccel, TQPopupMenu, TQAction, and Miscellaneous Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "QMenuData::QMenuData ()"
+.SH "TQMenuData::TQMenuData ()"
 Constructs an empty menu data list.
-.SH "QMenuData::~QMenuData ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQMenuData::~TQMenuData ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Removes all menu items and disconnects any signals that have been connected.
-.SH "QKeySequence QMenuData::accel ( int id ) const"
+.SH "QKeySequence TQMenuData::accel ( int id ) const"
 Returns the accelerator key that has been defined for the menu item \fIid\fR, or 0 if it has no accelerator key or if there is no such menu item.
 .PP
 See also setAccel(), QAccel, and ntqnamespace.h.
-.SH "void QMenuData::activateItemAt ( int index )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::activateItemAt ( int index )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Activates the menu item at position \fIindex\fR.
 .PP
 If the index is invalid (for example, -1), the object itself is deactivated.
-.SH "void QMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQString & text )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQString & text )"
 Changes the text of the menu item \fIid\fR to \fItext\fR. If the item has an icon, the icon remains unchanged.
 .PP
 See also text().
-.SH "void QMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const QPixmap & pixmap )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const QPixmap & pixmap )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Changes the pixmap of the menu item \fIid\fR to the pixmap \fIpixmap\fR. If the item has an icon, the icon is unchanged.
 .PP
 See also pixmap().
-.SH "void QMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Changes the iconset and text of the menu item \fIid\fR to the \fIicon\fR and \fItext\fR respectively.
 .PP
 See also pixmap().
-.SH "void QMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Changes the iconset and pixmap of the menu item \fIid\fR to \fIicon\fR and \fIpixmap\fR respectively.
 .PP
 See also pixmap().
-.SH "void QMenuData::changeItem ( const TQString & text, int id )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::changeItem ( const TQString & text, int id )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
 Changes the text of the menu item \fIid\fR. If the item has an icon, the icon remains unchanged.
 .PP
 See also text().
-.SH "void QMenuData::changeItem ( const QPixmap & pixmap, int id )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::changeItem ( const QPixmap & pixmap, int id )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
 Changes the pixmap of the menu item \fIid\fR. If the item has an icon, the icon remains unchanged.
 .PP
 See also pixmap().
-.SH "void QMenuData::changeItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::changeItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
 Changes the icon and text of the menu item \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 See also pixmap().
-.SH "void QMenuData::clear ()"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::clear ()"
 Removes all menu items.
 .PP
 See also removeItem() and removeItemAt().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l mdi/application.cpp and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-.SH "bool QMenuData::connectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )"
+.SH "bool TQMenuData::connectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )"
 Connects the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR to \fIreceiver\fR's \fImember\fR slot or signal.
 .PP
 The receiver's slot (or signal) is activated when the menu item is activated.
@@ -277,45 +277,45 @@ The receiver's slot (or signal) is activated when the menu item is activated.
 See also disconnectItem() and setItemParameter().
 .PP
 Example: menu/menu.cpp.
-.SH "uint QMenuData::count () const"
+.SH "uint TQMenuData::count () const"
 Returns the number of items in the menu.
-.SH "bool QMenuData::disconnectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )"
+.SH "bool TQMenuData::disconnectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )"
 Disconnects the \fIreceiver\fR's \fImember\fR from the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 All connections are removed when the menu data object is destroyed.
 .PP
 See also connectItem() and setItemParameter().
-.SH "QMenuItem * QMenuData::findItem ( int id ) const"
+.SH "TQMenuItem * TQMenuData::findItem ( int id ) const"
 Returns the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR, or 0 if there is no item with this identifier.
 .PP
-Note that QMenuItem is an internal class, and that you should not need to call this function. Use the higher level functions like text(), pixmap() and changeItem() to get and modify menu item attributes instead.
+Note that TQMenuItem is an internal class, and that you should not need to call this function. Use the higher level functions like text(), pixmap() and changeItem() to get and modify menu item attributes instead.
 .PP
 See also indexOf().
 .PP
 Example: chart/chartform.cpp.
-.SH "QMenuItem * QMenuData::findItem ( int id, QMenuData ** parent ) const"
+.SH "TQMenuItem * TQMenuData::findItem ( int id, TQMenuData ** parent ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Returns the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR, or 0 if there is no item with this identifier. Changes \fI*parent\fR to point to the parent of the return value.
 .PP
-Note that QMenuItem is an internal class, and that you should not need to call this function. Use the higher level functions like text(), pixmap() and changeItem() to get and modify menu item attributes instead.
+Note that TQMenuItem is an internal class, and that you should not need to call this function. Use the higher level functions like text(), pixmap() and changeItem() to get and modify menu item attributes instead.
 .PP
 See also indexOf().
-.SH "TQIconSet * QMenuData::iconSet ( int id ) const"
+.SH "TQIconSet * TQMenuData::iconSet ( int id ) const"
 Returns the icon set that has been set for menu item \fIid\fR, or 0 if no icon set has been set.
 .PP
 See also changeItem(), text(), and pixmap().
-.SH "int QMenuData::idAt ( int index ) const"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::idAt ( int index ) const"
 Returns the identifier of the menu item at position \fIindex\fR in the internal list, or -1 if \fIindex\fR is out of range.
 .PP
 See also setId() and indexOf().
-.SH "int QMenuData::indexOf ( int id ) const"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::indexOf ( int id ) const"
 Returns the index of the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR, or -1 if there is no item with this identifier.
 .PP
 See also idAt() and findItem().
 .PP
 Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 The family of insertItem() functions inserts menu items into a popup menu or a menu bar.
 .PP
 A menu item is usually either a text string or a pixmap, both with an optional icon or keyboard accelerator. For special cases it is also possible to insert custom items (see QCustomMenuItem) or even widgets into popup menus.
@@ -330,9 +330,9 @@ Example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QMenuBar   *mainMenu = new QMenuBar;
+        TQMenuBar   *mainMenu = new TQMenuBar;
 .br
-        QPopupMenu *fileMenu = new QPopupMenu;
+        TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new TQPopupMenu;
 .br
         fileMenu->insertItem( "New",  myView, TQ_SLOT(newFile()), CTRL+Key_N );
 .br
@@ -362,7 +362,7 @@ The \fIid\fR specifies the identification number associated with the menu item.
 .PP
 The \fIindex\fR specifies the position in the menu. The menu item is appended at the end of the list if \fIindex\fR is negative.
 .PP
-Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global, instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example, accelerators in QPopupMenu items only work for menus that are associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget() chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent QAccel object.
+Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global, instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example, accelerators in TQPopupMenu items only work for menus that are associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget() chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent QAccel object.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR Be careful when passing a literal 0 to insertItem() because some C++ compilers choose the wrong overloaded function. Cast the 0 to what you mean, e.g. \fC(TQObject*)0\fR.
 .PP
@@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), QAccel, and ntqn
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, canvas/canvas.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sound/sound.cpp.
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, text \fItext\fR, accelerator \fIaccel\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position. The menu item is connected it to the \fIreceiver\fR's \fImember\fR slot. The icon will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
@@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, text \fItext\fR, accelerator \fIaccel\
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), QAccel, and ntqnamespace.h.
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const QPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const QPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with pixmap \fIpixmap\fR, accelerator \fIaccel\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position. The menu item is connected it to the \fIreceiver\fR's \fImember\fR slot. The icon will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
@@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap should provide a
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, pixmap \fIpixmap\fR, accelerator \fIaccel\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item. The item is connected to the \fImember\fR slot in the \fIreceiver\fR object.
@@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap should provide a
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), QAccel, and ntqnamespace.h.
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with text \fItext\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position.
@@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ Inserts a menu item with text \fItext\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fI
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, text \fItext\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
@@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, text \fItext\fR, optional id \fIid\fR,
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with text \fItext\fR, submenu \fIpopup\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position.
@@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ The \fIpopup\fR must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent widget. It is
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, text \fItext\fR, submenu \fIpopup\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
@@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ The \fIpopup\fR must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent widget. It is
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const QPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const QPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with pixmap \fIpixmap\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position.
@@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap should provide a
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, pixmap \fIpixmap\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item.
@@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, pixmap \fIpixmap\fR, optional id \fIid
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const QPixmap & pixmap, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const QPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with pixmap \fIpixmap\fR, submenu \fIpopup\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position.
@@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ The \fIpopup\fR must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent widget. It is
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, pixmap \fIpixmap\fR submenu \fIpopup\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item.
@@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ The \fIpopup\fR must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent widget. It is
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( TQWidget * widget, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( TQWidget * widget, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item that consists of the widget \fIwidget\fR with optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position.
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ If the widget is focus-enabled it will get focus when the user traverses the pop
 .br
              parentWidget() &&
 .br
-             parentWidget()->inherits("QPopupMenu") )
+             parentWidget()->inherits("TQPopupMenu") )
 .br
             parentWidget()->close();
 .br
@@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ If the widget is focus-enabled it will get focus when the user traverses the pop
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, QCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, QCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a custom menu item \fIcustom\fR with an \fIicon\fR and with optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position.
@@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ If you want to connect a custom item to a slot, use connectItem().
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also connectItem(), removeItem(), and QCustomMenuItem.
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( QCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( QCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a custom menu item \fIcustom\fR with optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position.
@@ -528,78 +528,78 @@ If you want to connect a custom item to a slot, use connectItem().
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also connectItem(), removeItem(), and QCustomMenuItem.
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertSeparator ( int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertSeparator ( int index = -1 )"
 Inserts a separator at position \fIindex\fR, and returns the menu identifier number allocated to it. The separator becomes the last menu item if \fIindex\fR is negative.
 .PP
 In a popup menu a separator is rendered as a horizontal line. In a Motif menu bar a separator is spacing, so the rest of the items (normally just "Help") are drawn right-justified. In a Windows menu bar separators are ignored (to comply with the Windows style guidelines).
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sound/sound.cpp.
-.SH "bool QMenuData::isItemActive ( int id ) const"
+.SH "bool TQMenuData::isItemActive ( int id ) const"
 Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id \fIid\fR is currently active; otherwise returns FALSE.
-.SH "bool QMenuData::isItemChecked ( int id ) const"
+.SH "bool TQMenuData::isItemChecked ( int id ) const"
 Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id \fIid\fR has been checked; otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 See also setItemChecked().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l canvas/canvas.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-.SH "bool QMenuData::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const"
+.SH "bool TQMenuData::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const"
 Returns TRUE if the item with identifier \fIid\fR is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE
 .PP
 See also setItemEnabled() and isItemVisible().
-.SH "bool QMenuData::isItemVisible ( int id ) const"
+.SH "bool TQMenuData::isItemVisible ( int id ) const"
 Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id \fIid\fR is visible; otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 See also setItemVisible().
-.SH "int QMenuData::itemParameter ( int id ) const"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::itemParameter ( int id ) const"
 Returns the parameter of the activation signal of item \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 If no parameter has been specified for this item with setItemParameter(), the value defaults to \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 See also connectItem(), disconnectItem(), and setItemParameter().
-.SH "void QMenuData::menuContentsChanged ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::menuContentsChanged ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Virtual function; notifies subclasses that one or more items have been inserted or removed.
 .PP
-Reimplemented in QMenuBar.
-.SH "void QMenuData::menuDelPopup ( QPopupMenu * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+Reimplemented in TQMenuBar.
+.SH "void TQMenuData::menuDelPopup ( TQPopupMenu * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Virtual function; notifies subclasses that a popup menu item has been removed.
-.SH "void QMenuData::menuInsPopup ( QPopupMenu * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::menuInsPopup ( TQPopupMenu * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Virtual function; notifies subclasses that a popup menu item has been inserted.
-.SH "void QMenuData::menuStateChanged ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::menuStateChanged ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Virtual function; notifies subclasses that one or more items have changed state (enabled/disabled or checked/unchecked).
 .PP
-Reimplemented in QMenuBar.
-.SH "QPixmap * QMenuData::pixmap ( int id ) const"
+Reimplemented in TQMenuBar.
+.SH "QPixmap * TQMenuData::pixmap ( int id ) const"
 Returns the pixmap that has been set for menu item \fIid\fR, or 0 if no pixmap has been set.
 .PP
 See also changeItem(), text(), and iconSet().
-.SH "void QMenuData::removeItem ( int id )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::removeItem ( int id )"
 Removes the menu item that has the identifier \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 See also removeItemAt() and clear().
 .PP
 Example: chart/chartform.cpp.
-.SH "void QMenuData::removeItemAt ( int index )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::removeItemAt ( int index )"
 Removes the menu item at position \fIindex\fR.
 .PP
 See also removeItem() and clear().
-.SH "void QMenuData::setAccel ( const QKeySequence & key, int id )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::setAccel ( const QKeySequence & key, int id )"
 Sets the accelerator key for the menu item \fIid\fR to \fIkey\fR.
 .PP
 An accelerator key consists of a key code and a combination of the modifiers \fCSHIFT\fR, \fCCTRL\fR, \fCALT\fR or \fCUNICODE_ACCEL\fR (OR'ed or added). The header file ntqnamespace.h contains a list of key codes.
 .PP
 Defining an accelerator key produces a text that is added to the menu item; for instance, \fCCTRL\fR + \fCKey_O\fR produces "Ctrl+O". The text is formatted differently for different platforms.
 .PP
-Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global, instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example, accelerators in QPopupMenu items only work for menus that are associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget() chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent QAccel object.
+Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global, instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example, accelerators in TQPopupMenu items only work for menus that are associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget() chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent QAccel object.
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QMenuBar *mainMenu = new QMenuBar;
+        TQMenuBar *mainMenu = new TQMenuBar;
 .br
-        QPopupMenu *fileMenu = new QPopupMenu;       // file sub menu
+        TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new TQPopupMenu;       // file sub menu
 .br
         fileMenu->insertItem( "Open Document", 67 ); // add "Open" item
 .br
@@ -621,32 +621,32 @@ If you need to translate accelerators, use tr() with a string:
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-You can also specify the accelerator in the insertItem() function. You may prefer to use QAction to associate accelerators with menu items.
+You can also specify the accelerator in the insertItem() function. You may prefer to use TQAction to associate accelerators with menu items.
 .PP
-See also accel(), insertItem(), QAccel, and QAction.
+See also accel(), insertItem(), QAccel, and TQAction.
 .PP
 Example: menu/menu.cpp.
-.SH "void QMenuData::setId ( int index, int id )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::setId ( int index, int id )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the menu identifier of the item at \fIindex\fR to \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 If \fIindex\fR is out of range, the operation is ignored.
 .PP
 See also idAt().
-.SH "void QMenuData::setItemChecked ( int id, bool check )"
-If \fIcheck\fR is TRUE, checks the menu item with id \fIid\fR; otherwise unchecks the menu item with id \fIid\fR. Calls QPopupMenu::setCheckable( TRUE ) if necessary.
+.SH "void TQMenuData::setItemChecked ( int id, bool check )"
+If \fIcheck\fR is TRUE, checks the menu item with id \fIid\fR; otherwise unchecks the menu item with id \fIid\fR. Calls TQPopupMenu::setCheckable( TRUE ) if necessary.
 .PP
 See also isItemChecked().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l canvas/canvas.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-.SH "void QMenuData::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )"
 If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, enables the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR; otherwise disables the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 See also isItemEnabled().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l mdi/application.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-.SH "bool QMenuData::setItemParameter ( int id, int param )"
+.SH "bool TQMenuData::setItemParameter ( int id, int param )"
 Sets the parameter of the activation signal of item \fIid\fR to \fIparam\fR.
 .PP
 If any receiver takes an integer parameter, this value is passed.
@@ -654,35 +654,35 @@ If any receiver takes an integer parameter, this value is passed.
 See also connectItem(), disconnectItem(), and itemParameter().
 .PP
 Example: mdi/application.cpp.
-.SH "void QMenuData::setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible )"
 If \fIvisible\fR is TRUE, shows the menu item with id \fIid\fR; otherwise hides the menu item with id \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 See also isItemVisible() and isItemEnabled().
-.SH "void QMenuData::setWhatsThis ( int id, const TQString & text )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::setWhatsThis ( int id, const TQString & text )"
 Sets \fItext\fR as What's This help for the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 See also whatsThis().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l application/application.cpp, helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
-.SH "TQString QMenuData::text ( int id ) const"
+.SH "TQString TQMenuData::text ( int id ) const"
 Returns the text that has been set for menu item \fIid\fR, or TQString::null if no text has been set.
 .PP
 See also changeItem(), pixmap(), and iconSet().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l qdir/qdir.cpp and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-.SH "void QMenuData::updateItem ( int id )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::updateItem ( int id )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Virtual function; notifies subclasses about an item with \fIid\fR that has been changed.
 .PP
-Reimplemented in QPopupMenu.
-.SH "TQString QMenuData::whatsThis ( int id ) const"
+Reimplemented in TQPopupMenu.
+.SH "TQString TQMenuData::whatsThis ( int id ) const"
 Returns the What's This help text for the item with identifier \fIid\fR or TQString::null if no text has yet been defined.
 .PP
 See also setWhatsThis().
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqmenudata.html
+.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqmenudata.html
 .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html
 .SH COPYRIGHT
 Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com.  See the
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmovie.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmovie.3qt
index 06433a077..15af6c124 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqmovie.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmovie.3qt
@@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ Destroys the QMovie. If this is the last reference to the data of the movie, the
 .SH "const TQColor & QMovie::backgroundColor () const"
 Returns the background color of the movie set by setBackgroundColor().
 .SH "void QMovie::connectResize ( TQObject * receiver, const char * member )"
-Connects the \fIreceiver\fR's \fImember\fR of type \fCvoid member(const QSize&)\fR so that it is signalled when the movie changes size.
+Connects the \fIreceiver\fR's \fImember\fR of type \fCvoid member(const TQSize&)\fR so that it is signalled when the movie changes size.
 .PP
 Note that due to the explicit sharing of QMovie objects, these connections persist until they are explicitly disconnected with disconnectResize() or until \fIevery\fR shared copy of the movie is deleted.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqnpinstance.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqnpinstance.3qt
index 3effb55f1..e48d1a0b7 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqnpinstance.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqnpinstance.3qt
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ The QNPInstance is responsible for creating an appropriate QNPWidget window if r
 .PP
 Note that there is \fIabsolutely no guarantee\fR regarding the order in which functions are called. Sometimes the browser will call newWindow() first, at other times, newStreamCreated() will be called first (assuming the \fC<EMBED>\fR tag has a SRC parameter).
 .PP
-\fINone of Qt's GUI functionality\fR may be used until after the first call to newWindow(). This includes any use of QPaintDevice (i.e. QPixmap, TQWidget, and all subclasses), QApplication, anything related to QPainter (QBrush, etc.), fonts, QMovie, QToolTip, etc. Useful classes which specifically \fIcan\fR be used are TQImage, QFile, and QBuffer.
+\fINone of Qt's GUI functionality\fR may be used until after the first call to newWindow(). This includes any use of QPaintDevice (i.e. QPixmap, TQWidget, and all subclasses), QApplication, anything related to QPainter (QBrush, etc.), fonts, QMovie, TQToolTip, etc. Useful classes which specifically \fIcan\fR be used are TQImage, QFile, and QBuffer.
 .PP
 This restriction can easily be accommodated by structuring your plugin so that the task of the QNPInstance is to gather data, while the task of the QNPWidget is to provide a graphical interface to that data.
 .SS "Member Type Documentation"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqobject.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqobject.3qt
index 9d0c29a1e..4d0e92de2 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqobject.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqobject.3qt
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread supp
 .PP
 Inherits Qt.
 .PP
--Inherited by QAccel, QAccessibleObject, QAction, QApplication, QAssistantClient, QDataPump, TQWidget, TQCanvas, TQStyle, QClipboard, QDns, QLayout, QDragObject, TQEditorFactory, QEventLoop, QFileIconProvider, QNetworkProtocol, QNetworkOperation, QNPInstance, TQObjectCleanupHandler, QProcess, QServerSocket, QSessionManager, QSignal, QSignalMapper, QSocket, QSocketNotifier, QSound, TQSqlDatabase, TQSqlDriver, TQSqlForm, TQStyleSheet, TQTimer, QToolTipGroup, QTranslator, QUrlOperator, and QValidator.
+-Inherited by QAccel, QAccessibleObject, TQAction, QApplication, QAssistantClient, QDataPump, TQWidget, TQCanvas, TQStyle, QClipboard, QDns, QLayout, QDragObject, TQEditorFactory, QEventLoop, QFileIconProvider, QNetworkProtocol, QNetworkOperation, QNPInstance, TQObjectCleanupHandler, QProcess, QServerSocket, TQSessionManager, QSignal, QSignalMapper, QSocket, QSocketNotifier, QSound, TQSqlDatabase, TQSqlDriver, TQSqlForm, TQStyleSheet, TQTimer, TQToolTipGroup, QTranslator, QUrlOperator, and QValidator.
 .PP
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ in functions that depend on the state. One notable example is TQWidget::sizeHint
 .PP
 See also event() and QChildEvent.
 .PP
-Reimplemented in QMainWindow and QSplitter.
+Reimplemented in TQMainWindow and QSplitter.
 .SH "const TQObjectList * TQObject::children () const"
 Returns a list of child objects, or 0 if this object has no children.
 .PP
@@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ Example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-    class MyMainWindow : public QMainWindow
+    class MyMainWindow : public TQMainWindow
 .br
     {
 .br
@@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ Example:
 .br
     MyMainWindow::MyMainWindow( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
 .br
-        : QMainWindow( parent, name )
+        : TQMainWindow( parent, name )
 .br
     {
 .br
@@ -569,7 +569,7 @@ Example:
 .br
             // pass the event on to the parent class
 .br
-            return QMainWindow::eventFilter( obj, ev );
+            return TQMainWindow::eventFilter( obj, ev );
 .br
         }
 .br
@@ -779,7 +779,7 @@ Searches the children and optionally grandchildren of this object, and returns a
 .PP
 If \fIregexpMatch\fR is TRUE (the default), \fIobjName\fR is a regular expression that the objects's names must match. The syntax is that of a QRegExp. If \fIregexpMatch\fR is FALSE, \fIobjName\fR is a string and object names must match it exactly.
 .PP
-Note that \fIinheritsClass\fR uses single inheritance from TQObject, the way inherits() does. According to inherits(), QMenuBar inherits TQWidget but not QMenuData. This does not quite match reality, but is the best that can be done on the wide variety of compilers TQt supports.
+Note that \fIinheritsClass\fR uses single inheritance from TQObject, the way inherits() does. According to inherits(), TQMenuBar inherits TQWidget but not TQMenuData. This does not quite match reality, but is the best that can be done on the wide variety of compilers TQt supports.
 .PP
 Finally, if \fIrecursiveSearch\fR is TRUE (the default), queryList() searches \fIn\fRth-generation as well as first-generation children.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqpixmap.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqpixmap.3qt
index 7cbeb19fa..7be27685d 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqpixmap.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqpixmap.3qt
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ Inherited by QBitmap and TQCanvasPixmap.
 .BI "\fBQPixmap\fR ( int w, int h, int depth = -1, Optimization optimization = DefaultOptim )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQPixmap\fR ( const QSize & size, int depth = -1, Optimization optimization = DefaultOptim )"
+.BI "\fBQPixmap\fR ( const TQSize & size, int depth = -1, Optimization optimization = DefaultOptim )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fBQPixmap\fR ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0, ColorMode mode = Auto )"
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Inherited by QBitmap and TQCanvasPixmap.
 .BI "int \fBheight\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBsize\fR () const"
+.BI "TQSize \fBsize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "QRect \fBrect\fR () const"
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Inherited by QBitmap and TQCanvasPixmap.
 .BI "void \fBresize\fR ( int w, int h )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBresize\fR ( const QSize & size )"
+.BI "void \fBresize\fR ( const TQSize & size )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "const QBitmap * \fBmask\fR () const"
@@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ The \fIdepth\fR can be either 1 (monochrome) or the depth of the current video m
 If either \fIw\fR or \fIh\fR is zero, a null pixmap is constructed.
 .PP
 See also isNull() and QPixmap::Optimization.
-.SH "QPixmap::QPixmap ( const QSize & size, int depth = -1, Optimization optimization = DefaultOptim )"
+.SH "QPixmap::QPixmap ( const TQSize & size, int depth = -1, Optimization optimization = DefaultOptim )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Constructs a pixmap of size \fIsize\fR, \fIdepth\fR bits per pixel, optimized in accordance with the \fIoptimization\fR value.
@@ -631,7 +631,7 @@ If both \fIw\fR and \fIh\fR are greater than 0, a valid pixmap is created. New p
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l desktop/desktop.cpp and grapher/grapher.cpp.
-.SH "void QPixmap::resize ( const QSize & size )"
+.SH "void QPixmap::resize ( const TQSize & size )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Resizes the pixmap to size \fIsize\fR.
@@ -710,7 +710,7 @@ Use the setDefaultOptimization() to change the default optimization for all new
 See also optimization(), setDefaultOptimization(), and defaultOptimization().
 .PP
 Example: desktop/desktop.cpp.
-.SH "QSize QPixmap::size () const"
+.SH "TQSize QPixmap::size () const"
 Returns the size of the pixmap.
 .PP
 See also width(), height(), and rect().
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqpoint.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqpoint.3qt
index c017a6223..1f042cb1d 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqpoint.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqpoint.3qt
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Example:
 .PP
 QPoints can be compared for equality or inequality, and they can be written to and read from a QStream.
 .PP
-See also QPointArray, QSize, QRect, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
+See also QPointArray, TQSize, QRect, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "QPoint::QPoint ()"
 Constructs a point with coordinates (0, 0) (isNull() returns TRUE).
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqpopupmenu.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqpopupmenu.3qt
index 82a6acab5..f6c5bb47f 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqpopupmenu.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqpopupmenu.3qt
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 '\" t
-.TH QPopupMenu 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
+.TH TQPopupMenu 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
 .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.  See the
 .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license
 .\" statement.
@@ -7,19 +7,19 @@
 .ad l
 .nh
 .SH NAME
-QPopupMenu \- Popup menu widget
+TQPopupMenu \- Popup menu widget
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fC#include <ntqpopupmenu.h>\fR
+\fC#include <tqpopupmenu.h>\fR
 .PP
-Inherits QFrame and QMenuData.
+Inherits QFrame and TQMenuData.
 .PP
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQPopupMenu\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQPopupMenu\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fB~QPopupMenu\fR ()"
+.BI "\fB~TQPopupMenu\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBpopup\fR ( const QPoint & pos, int indexAtPoint = -1 )"
@@ -88,10 +88,10 @@ Inherits QFrame and QMenuData.
 .BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQString & text, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const QPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
@@ -100,10 +100,10 @@ Inherits QFrame and QMenuData.
 .BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const QPixmap & pixmap, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const QPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBinsertItem\fR ( TQWidget * widget, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
@@ -202,10 +202,10 @@ Inherits QFrame and QMenuData.
 .BI "int \fBitemHeight\fR ( int row ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBitemHeight\fR ( QMenuItem * mi ) const"
+.BI "int \fBitemHeight\fR ( TQMenuItem * mi ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBdrawItem\fR ( QPainter * p, int tab_, QMenuItem * mi, bool act, int x, int y, int w, int h )"
+.BI "void \fBdrawItem\fR ( QPainter * p, int tab_, TQMenuItem * mi, bool act, int x, int y, int w, int h )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBdrawContents\fR ( QPainter * p )"
@@ -215,15 +215,15 @@ Inherits QFrame and QMenuData.
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The QPopupMenu class provides a popup menu widget.
+The TQPopupMenu class provides a popup menu widget.
 .PP
-A popup menu widget is a selection menu. It can be either a pull-down menu in a menu bar or a standalone context (popup) menu. Pull-down menus are shown by the menu bar when the user clicks on the respective item or presses the specified shortcut key. Use QMenuBar::insertItem() to insert a popup menu into a menu bar. Show a context menu either asynchronously with popup() or synchronously with exec().
+A popup menu widget is a selection menu. It can be either a pull-down menu in a menu bar or a standalone context (popup) menu. Pull-down menus are shown by the menu bar when the user clicks on the respective item or presses the specified shortcut key. Use TQMenuBar::insertItem() to insert a popup menu into a menu bar. Show a context menu either asynchronously with popup() or synchronously with exec().
 .PP
 Technically, a popup menu consists of a list of menu items. You add items with insertItem(). An item is either a string, a pixmap or a custom item that provides its own drawing function (see QCustomMenuItem). In addition, items can have an optional icon drawn on the very left side and an accelerator key such as" Ctrl+X".
 .PP
-There are three kinds of menu items: separators, menu items that perform an action and menu items that show a submenu. Separators are inserted with insertSeparator(). For submenus, you pass a pointer to a QPopupMenu in your call to insertItem(). All other items are considered action items.
+There are three kinds of menu items: separators, menu items that perform an action and menu items that show a submenu. Separators are inserted with insertSeparator(). For submenus, you pass a pointer to a TQPopupMenu in your call to insertItem(). All other items are considered action items.
 .PP
-When inserting action items you usually specify a receiver and a slot. The receiver will be notifed whenever the item is selected. In addition, QPopupMenu provides two signals, activated() and highlighted(), which signal the identifier of the respective menu item. It is sometimes practical to connect several items to one slot. To distinguish between them, specify a slot that takes an integer argument and use setItemParameter() to associate a unique value with each item.
+When inserting action items you usually specify a receiver and a slot. The receiver will be notifed whenever the item is selected. In addition, TQPopupMenu provides two signals, activated() and highlighted(), which signal the identifier of the respective menu item. It is sometimes practical to connect several items to one slot. To distinguish between them, specify a slot that takes an integer argument and use setItemParameter() to associate a unique value with each item.
 .PP
 You clear a popup menu with clear() and remove single items with removeItem() or removeItemAt().
 .PP
@@ -235,9 +235,9 @@ You can provide What's This? help for single menu items with setWhatsThis(). See
 .PP
 For ultimate flexibility, you can also add entire widgets as items into a popup menu (for example, a color selector).
 .PP
-A QPopupMenu can also provide a tear-off menu. A tear-off menu is a top-level window that contains a copy of the menu. This makes it possible for the user to "tear off" frequently used menus and position them in a convenient place on the screen. If you want that functionality for a certain menu, insert a tear-off handle with insertTearOffHandle(). When using tear-off menus, bear in mind that the concept isn't typically used on Microsoft Windows so users may not be familiar with it. Consider using a QToolBar instead. Tear-off menus cannot contain custom widgets; if the original menu contains a custom widget item, this item is omitted.
+A TQPopupMenu can also provide a tear-off menu. A tear-off menu is a top-level window that contains a copy of the menu. This makes it possible for the user to "tear off" frequently used menus and position them in a convenient place on the screen. If you want that functionality for a certain menu, insert a tear-off handle with insertTearOffHandle(). When using tear-off menus, bear in mind that the concept isn't typically used on Microsoft Windows so users may not be familiar with it. Consider using a TQToolBar instead. Tear-off menus cannot contain custom widgets; if the original menu contains a custom widget item, this item is omitted.
 .PP
-menu/menu.cpp is an example of QMenuBar and QPopupMenu use.
+menu/menu.cpp is an example of TQMenuBar and TQPopupMenu use.
 .PP
 .ce 1
 .B "[Image Omitted]"
@@ -246,75 +246,75 @@ menu/menu.cpp is an example of QMenuBar and QPopupMenu use.
 .ce 1
 .B "[Image Omitted]"
 .PP
-See also QMenuBar, GUI Design Handbook: Menu, Drop-Down and Pop-Up, Main Window and Related Classes, and Basic Widgets.
+See also TQMenuBar, GUI Design Handbook: Menu, Drop-Down and Pop-Up, Main Window and Related Classes, and Basic Widgets.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "QPopupMenu::QPopupMenu ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
+.SH "TQPopupMenu::TQPopupMenu ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
 Constructs a popup menu called \fIname\fR with parent \fIparent\fR.
 .PP
 Although a popup menu is always a top-level widget, if a parent is passed the popup menu will be deleted when that parent is destroyed (as with any other TQObject).
-.SH "QPopupMenu::~QPopupMenu ()"
+.SH "TQPopupMenu::~TQPopupMenu ()"
 Destroys the popup menu.
-.SH "void QPopupMenu::aboutToHide ()\fC [signal]\fR"
+.SH "void TQPopupMenu::aboutToHide ()\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted just before the popup menu is hidden after it has been displayed.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR Do not open a widget in a slot connected to this signal.
 .PP
 See also aboutToShow(), setItemEnabled(), setItemChecked(), insertItem(), and removeItem().
-.SH "void QPopupMenu::aboutToShow ()\fC [signal]\fR"
+.SH "void TQPopupMenu::aboutToShow ()\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted just before the popup menu is displayed. You can connect it to any slot that sets up the menu contents (e.g. to ensure that the right items are enabled).
 .PP
 See also aboutToHide(), setItemEnabled(), setItemChecked(), insertItem(), and removeItem().
 .PP
 Example: mdi/application.cpp.
-.SH "QKeySequence QMenuData::accel ( int id ) const"
+.SH "QKeySequence TQMenuData::accel ( int id ) const"
 Returns the accelerator key that has been defined for the menu item \fIid\fR, or 0 if it has no accelerator key or if there is no such menu item.
 .PP
 See also setAccel(), QAccel, and ntqnamespace.h.
-.SH "void QPopupMenu::activated ( int id )\fC [signal]\fR"
+.SH "void TQPopupMenu::activated ( int id )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when a menu item is selected; \fIid\fR is the id of the selected item.
 .PP
-Normally, you connect each menu item to a single slot using QMenuData::insertItem(), but sometimes you will want to connect several items to a single slot (most often if the user selects from an array). This signal is useful in such cases.
+Normally, you connect each menu item to a single slot using TQMenuData::insertItem(), but sometimes you will want to connect several items to a single slot (most often if the user selects from an array). This signal is useful in such cases.
 .PP
-See also highlighted() and QMenuData::insertItem().
+See also highlighted() and TQMenuData::insertItem().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l grapher/grapher.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-.SH "void QMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQString & text )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQString & text )"
 Changes the text of the menu item \fIid\fR to \fItext\fR. If the item has an icon, the icon remains unchanged.
 .PP
 See also text().
-.SH "void QMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const QPixmap & pixmap )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const QPixmap & pixmap )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Changes the pixmap of the menu item \fIid\fR to the pixmap \fIpixmap\fR. If the item has an icon, the icon is unchanged.
 .PP
 See also pixmap().
-.SH "void QMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Changes the iconset and text of the menu item \fIid\fR to the \fIicon\fR and \fItext\fR respectively.
 .PP
 See also pixmap().
-.SH "void QMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::changeItem ( int id, const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Changes the iconset and pixmap of the menu item \fIid\fR to \fIicon\fR and \fIpixmap\fR respectively.
 .PP
 See also pixmap().
-.SH "void QMenuData::clear ()"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::clear ()"
 Removes all menu items.
 .PP
 See also removeItem() and removeItemAt().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l mdi/application.cpp and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
-.SH "int QPopupMenu::columns () const\fC [protected]\fR"
+.SH "int TQPopupMenu::columns () const\fC [protected]\fR"
 If a popup menu does not fit on the screen it lays itself out so that it does fit. It is style dependent what layout means (for example, on Windows it will use multiple columns).
 .PP
 This functions returns the number of columns necessary.
 .PP
 See also sizeHint.
-.SH "bool QMenuData::connectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )"
+.SH "bool TQMenuData::connectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )"
 Connects the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR to \fIreceiver\fR's \fImember\fR slot or signal.
 .PP
 The receiver's slot (or signal) is activated when the menu item is activated.
@@ -322,21 +322,21 @@ The receiver's slot (or signal) is activated when the menu item is activated.
 See also disconnectItem() and setItemParameter().
 .PP
 Example: menu/menu.cpp.
-.SH "bool QMenuData::disconnectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )"
+.SH "bool TQMenuData::disconnectItem ( int id, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )"
 Disconnects the \fIreceiver\fR's \fImember\fR from the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 All connections are removed when the menu data object is destroyed.
 .PP
 See also connectItem() and setItemParameter().
-.SH "void QPopupMenu::drawContents ( QPainter * p )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQPopupMenu::drawContents ( QPainter * p )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Draws all menu items using painter \fIp\fR.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QFrame.
-.SH "void QPopupMenu::drawItem ( QPainter * p, int tab_, QMenuItem * mi, bool act, int x, int y, int w, int h )\fC [protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQPopupMenu::drawItem ( QPainter * p, int tab_, TQMenuItem * mi, bool act, int x, int y, int w, int h )\fC [protected]\fR"
 Draws menu item \fImi\fR in the area \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIw\fR, \fIh\fR, using painter \fIp\fR. The item is drawn active if \fIact\fR is TRUE or drawn inactive if \fIact\fR is FALSE. The rightmost \fItab_\fR pixels are used for accelerator text.
 .PP
 See also TQStyle::drawControl().
-.SH "int QPopupMenu::exec ()"
+.SH "int TQPopupMenu::exec ()"
 Executes this popup synchronously.
 .PP
 This is equivalent to \fCexec(mapToGlobal(QPoint(0,0)))\fR. In most situations you'll want to specify the position yourself, for example at the current mouse position:
@@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ or aligned to a widget:
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l fileiconview/qfileiconview.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, and scribble/scribble.cpp.
-.SH "int QPopupMenu::exec ( const QPoint & pos, int indexAtPoint = 0 )"
+.SH "int TQPopupMenu::exec ( const QPoint & pos, int indexAtPoint = 0 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Executes this popup synchronously.
@@ -385,25 +385,25 @@ or aligned to a widget:
 When positioning a popup with exec() or popup(), bear in mind that you cannot rely on the popup menu's current size(). For performance reasons, the popup adapts its size only when necessary. So in many cases, the size before and after the show is different. Instead, use sizeHint(). It calculates the proper size depending on the menu's current contents.
 .PP
 See also popup() and sizeHint.
-.SH "void QPopupMenu::highlighted ( int id )\fC [signal]\fR"
+.SH "void TQPopupMenu::highlighted ( int id )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when a menu item is highlighted; \fIid\fR is the id of the highlighted item.
 .PP
-See also activated() and QMenuData::insertItem().
-.SH "TQIconSet * QMenuData::iconSet ( int id ) const"
+See also activated() and TQMenuData::insertItem().
+.SH "TQIconSet * TQMenuData::iconSet ( int id ) const"
 Returns the icon set that has been set for menu item \fIid\fR, or 0 if no icon set has been set.
 .PP
 See also changeItem(), text(), and pixmap().
-.SH "int QPopupMenu::idAt ( int index ) const"
+.SH "int TQPopupMenu::idAt ( int index ) const"
 Returns the identifier of the menu item at position \fIindex\fR in the internal list, or -1 if \fIindex\fR is out of range.
 .PP
-See also QMenuData::setId() and QMenuData::indexOf().
+See also TQMenuData::setId() and TQMenuData::indexOf().
 .PP
 Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
-.SH "int QPopupMenu::idAt ( const QPoint & pos ) const"
+.SH "int TQPopupMenu::idAt ( const QPoint & pos ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Returns the id of the item at \fIpos\fR, or -1 if there is no item there or if it is a separator.
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 The family of insertItem() functions inserts menu items into a popup menu or a menu bar.
 .PP
 A menu item is usually either a text string or a pixmap, both with an optional icon or keyboard accelerator. For special cases it is also possible to insert custom items (see QCustomMenuItem) or even widgets into popup menus.
@@ -418,9 +418,9 @@ Example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QMenuBar   *mainMenu = new QMenuBar;
+        TQMenuBar   *mainMenu = new TQMenuBar;
 .br
-        QPopupMenu *fileMenu = new QPopupMenu;
+        TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new TQPopupMenu;
 .br
         fileMenu->insertItem( "New",  myView, TQ_SLOT(newFile()), CTRL+Key_N );
 .br
@@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ The \fIid\fR specifies the identification number associated with the menu item.
 .PP
 The \fIindex\fR specifies the position in the menu. The menu item is appended at the end of the list if \fIindex\fR is negative.
 .PP
-Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global, instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example, accelerators in QPopupMenu items only work for menus that are associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget() chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent QAccel object.
+Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global, instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example, accelerators in TQPopupMenu items only work for menus that are associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget() chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent QAccel object.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR Be careful when passing a literal 0 to insertItem() because some C++ compilers choose the wrong overloaded function. Cast the 0 to what you mean, e.g. \fC(TQObject*)0\fR.
 .PP
@@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), QAccel, and ntqn
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, canvas/canvas.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sound/sound.cpp.
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, text \fItext\fR, accelerator \fIaccel\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position. The menu item is connected it to the \fIreceiver\fR's \fImember\fR slot. The icon will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
@@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, text \fItext\fR, accelerator \fIaccel\
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), QAccel, and ntqnamespace.h.
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const QPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const QPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with pixmap \fIpixmap\fR, accelerator \fIaccel\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position. The menu item is connected it to the \fIreceiver\fR's \fImember\fR slot. The icon will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
@@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap should provide a
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member, const QKeySequence & accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, pixmap \fIpixmap\fR, accelerator \fIaccel\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item. The item is connected to the \fImember\fR slot in the \fIreceiver\fR object.
@@ -490,7 +490,7 @@ To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap should provide a
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), QAccel, and ntqnamespace.h.
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with text \fItext\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position.
@@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ Inserts a menu item with text \fItext\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fI
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, text \fItext\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
@@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, text \fItext\fR, optional id \fIid\fR,
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with text \fItext\fR, submenu \fIpopup\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position.
@@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ The \fIpopup\fR must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent widget. It is
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, text \fItext\fR, submenu \fIpopup\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
@@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ The \fIpopup\fR must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent widget. It is
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const QPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const QPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with pixmap \fIpixmap\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position.
@@ -536,7 +536,7 @@ To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap should provide a
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, pixmap \fIpixmap\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item.
@@ -544,7 +544,7 @@ Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, pixmap \fIpixmap\fR, optional id \fIid
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const QPixmap & pixmap, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const QPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with pixmap \fIpixmap\fR, submenu \fIpopup\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position.
@@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ The \fIpopup\fR must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent widget. It is
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, QPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, const QPixmap & pixmap, TQPopupMenu * popup, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item with icon \fIicon\fR, pixmap \fIpixmap\fR submenu \fIpopup\fR, optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item.
@@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ The \fIpopup\fR must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent widget. It is
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), and connectItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( TQWidget * widget, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( TQWidget * widget, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a menu item that consists of the widget \fIwidget\fR with optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position.
@@ -583,7 +583,7 @@ If the widget is focus-enabled it will get focus when the user traverses the pop
 .br
              parentWidget() &&
 .br
-             parentWidget()->inherits("QPopupMenu") )
+             parentWidget()->inherits("TQPopupMenu") )
 .br
             parentWidget()->close();
 .br
@@ -592,7 +592,7 @@ If the widget is focus-enabled it will get focus when the user traverses the pop
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also removeItem().
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, QCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( const TQIconSet & icon, QCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a custom menu item \fIcustom\fR with an \fIicon\fR and with optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position.
@@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ If you want to connect a custom item to a slot, use connectItem().
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also connectItem(), removeItem(), and QCustomMenuItem.
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertItem ( QCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertItem ( QCustomMenuItem * custom, int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts a custom menu item \fIcustom\fR with optional id \fIid\fR, and optional \fIindex\fR position.
@@ -616,14 +616,14 @@ If you want to connect a custom item to a slot, use connectItem().
 Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\fIid\fR if \fIid\fR >= 0).
 .PP
 See also connectItem(), removeItem(), and QCustomMenuItem.
-.SH "int QMenuData::insertSeparator ( int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::insertSeparator ( int index = -1 )"
 Inserts a separator at position \fIindex\fR, and returns the menu identifier number allocated to it. The separator becomes the last menu item if \fIindex\fR is negative.
 .PP
 In a popup menu a separator is rendered as a horizontal line. In a Motif menu bar a separator is spacing, so the rest of the items (normally just "Help") are drawn right-justified. In a Windows menu bar separators are ignored (to comply with the Windows style guidelines).
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sound/sound.cpp.
-.SH "int QPopupMenu::insertTearOffHandle ( int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
+.SH "int TQPopupMenu::insertTearOffHandle ( int id = -1, int index = -1 )"
 Inserts a tear-off handle into the menu. A tear-off handle is a special menu item that creates a copy of the menu when the menu is selected. This "torn-off" copy lives in a separate window. It contains the same menu items as the original menu, with the exception of the tear-off handle.
 .PP
 The handle item is assigned the identifier \fIid\fR or an automatically generated identifier if \fIid\fR is < 0. The generated identifiers (negative integers) are guaranteed to be unique within the entire application.
@@ -631,71 +631,71 @@ The handle item is assigned the identifier \fIid\fR or an automatically generate
 The \fIindex\fR specifies the position in the menu. The tear-off handle is appended at the end of the list if \fIindex\fR is negative.
 .PP
 Example: menu/menu.cpp.
-.SH "bool QPopupMenu::isCheckable () const"
+.SH "bool TQPopupMenu::isCheckable () const"
 Returns TRUE if the display of check marks on menu items is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "checkable" property for details.
-.SH "bool QMenuData::isItemChecked ( int id ) const"
+.SH "bool TQMenuData::isItemChecked ( int id ) const"
 Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id \fIid\fR has been checked; otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 See also setItemChecked().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l canvas/canvas.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-.SH "bool QMenuData::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const"
+.SH "bool TQMenuData::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const"
 Returns TRUE if the item with identifier \fIid\fR is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE
 .PP
 See also setItemEnabled() and isItemVisible().
-.SH "bool QMenuData::isItemVisible ( int id ) const"
+.SH "bool TQMenuData::isItemVisible ( int id ) const"
 Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id \fIid\fR is visible; otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 See also setItemVisible().
-.SH "int QPopupMenu::itemHeight ( int row ) const\fC [protected]\fR"
+.SH "int TQPopupMenu::itemHeight ( int row ) const\fC [protected]\fR"
 Calculates the height in pixels of the item in row \fIrow\fR.
-.SH "int QPopupMenu::itemHeight ( QMenuItem * mi ) const\fC [protected]\fR"
+.SH "int TQPopupMenu::itemHeight ( TQMenuItem * mi ) const\fC [protected]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Calculates the height in pixels of the menu item \fImi\fR.
-.SH "int QMenuData::itemParameter ( int id ) const"
+.SH "int TQMenuData::itemParameter ( int id ) const"
 Returns the parameter of the activation signal of item \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 If no parameter has been specified for this item with setItemParameter(), the value defaults to \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 See also connectItem(), disconnectItem(), and setItemParameter().
-.SH "QPixmap * QMenuData::pixmap ( int id ) const"
+.SH "QPixmap * TQMenuData::pixmap ( int id ) const"
 Returns the pixmap that has been set for menu item \fIid\fR, or 0 if no pixmap has been set.
 .PP
 See also changeItem(), text(), and iconSet().
-.SH "void QPopupMenu::popup ( const QPoint & pos, int indexAtPoint = -1 )"
+.SH "void TQPopupMenu::popup ( const QPoint & pos, int indexAtPoint = -1 )"
 Displays the popup menu so that the item number \fIindexAtPoint\fR will be at the specified \fIglobal\fR position \fIpos\fR. To translate a widget's local coordinates into global coordinates, use TQWidget::mapToGlobal().
 .PP
 When positioning a popup with exec() or popup(), bear in mind that you cannot rely on the popup menu's current size(). For performance reasons, the popup adapts its size only when necessary, so in many cases, the size before and after the show is different. Instead, use sizeHint(). It calculates the proper size depending on the menu's current contents.
 .PP
 Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
-.SH "void QMenuData::removeItem ( int id )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::removeItem ( int id )"
 Removes the menu item that has the identifier \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 See also removeItemAt() and clear().
 .PP
 Example: chart/chartform.cpp.
-.SH "void QMenuData::removeItemAt ( int index )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::removeItemAt ( int index )"
 Removes the menu item at position \fIindex\fR.
 .PP
 See also removeItem() and clear().
-.SH "void QMenuData::setAccel ( const QKeySequence & key, int id )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::setAccel ( const QKeySequence & key, int id )"
 Sets the accelerator key for the menu item \fIid\fR to \fIkey\fR.
 .PP
 An accelerator key consists of a key code and a combination of the modifiers SHIFT, CTRL, ALT or UNICODE_ACCEL (OR'ed or added). The header file ntqnamespace.h contains a list of key codes.
 .PP
 Defining an accelerator key produces a text that is added to the menu item; for instance, CTRL + Key_O produces "Ctrl+O". The text is formatted differently for different platforms.
 .PP
-Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global, instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example, accelerators in QPopupMenu items only work for menus that are associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget() chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent QAccel object.
+Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global, instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example, accelerators in TQPopupMenu items only work for menus that are associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget() chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent QAccel object.
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QMenuBar *mainMenu = new QMenuBar;
+        TQMenuBar *mainMenu = new TQMenuBar;
 .br
-        QPopupMenu *fileMenu = new QPopupMenu;       // file sub menu
+        TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new TQPopupMenu;       // file sub menu
 .br
         fileMenu->insertItem( "Open Document", 67 ); // add "Open" item
 .br
@@ -717,30 +717,30 @@ If you need to translate accelerators, use tr() with a string:
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-You can also specify the accelerator in the insertItem() function. You may prefer to use QAction to associate accelerators with menu items.
+You can also specify the accelerator in the insertItem() function. You may prefer to use TQAction to associate accelerators with menu items.
 .PP
-See also accel(), insertItem(), QAccel, and QAction.
+See also accel(), insertItem(), QAccel, and TQAction.
 .PP
 Example: menu/menu.cpp.
-.SH "void QPopupMenu::setActiveItem ( int i )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQPopupMenu::setActiveItem ( int i )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the currently active item to index \fIi\fR and repaints as necessary.
-.SH "void QPopupMenu::setCheckable ( bool )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQPopupMenu::setCheckable ( bool )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets whether the display of check marks on menu items is enabled. See the "checkable" property for details.
-.SH "void QMenuData::setItemChecked ( int id, bool check )"
-If \fIcheck\fR is TRUE, checks the menu item with id \fIid\fR; otherwise unchecks the menu item with id \fIid\fR. Calls QPopupMenu::setCheckable( TRUE ) if necessary.
+.SH "void TQMenuData::setItemChecked ( int id, bool check )"
+If \fIcheck\fR is TRUE, checks the menu item with id \fIid\fR; otherwise unchecks the menu item with id \fIid\fR. Calls TQPopupMenu::setCheckable( TRUE ) if necessary.
 .PP
 See also isItemChecked().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l canvas/canvas.cpp, grapher/grapher.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-.SH "void QMenuData::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )"
 If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, enables the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR; otherwise disables the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 See also isItemEnabled().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l mdi/application.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-.SH "bool QMenuData::setItemParameter ( int id, int param )"
+.SH "bool TQMenuData::setItemParameter ( int id, int param )"
 Sets the parameter of the activation signal of item \fIid\fR to \fIparam\fR.
 .PP
 If any receiver takes an integer parameter, this value is passed.
@@ -748,29 +748,29 @@ If any receiver takes an integer parameter, this value is passed.
 See also connectItem(), disconnectItem(), and itemParameter().
 .PP
 Example: mdi/application.cpp.
-.SH "void QMenuData::setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible )"
 If \fIvisible\fR is TRUE, shows the menu item with id \fIid\fR; otherwise hides the menu item with id \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 See also isItemVisible() and isItemEnabled().
-.SH "void QMenuData::setWhatsThis ( int id, const TQString & text )"
+.SH "void TQMenuData::setWhatsThis ( int id, const TQString & text )"
 Sets \fItext\fR as What's This help for the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 See also whatsThis().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l application/application.cpp, helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
-.SH "TQString QMenuData::text ( int id ) const"
+.SH "TQString TQMenuData::text ( int id ) const"
 Returns the text that has been set for menu item \fIid\fR, or TQString::null if no text has been set.
 .PP
 See also changeItem(), pixmap(), and iconSet().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l qdir/qdir.cpp and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-.SH "void QPopupMenu::updateItem ( int id )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQPopupMenu::updateItem ( int id )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Updates the item with identity \fIid\fR.
 .PP
-Reimplemented from QMenuData.
-.SH "TQString QMenuData::whatsThis ( int id ) const"
+Reimplemented from TQMenuData.
+.SH "TQString TQMenuData::whatsThis ( int id ) const"
 Returns the What's This help text for the item with identifier \fIid\fR or TQString::null if no text has yet been defined.
 .PP
 See also setWhatsThis().
@@ -780,12 +780,12 @@ This property holds whether the display of check marks on menu items is enabled.
 .PP
 When TRUE, the display of check marks on menu items is enabled. Checking is always enabled when in Windows-style.
 .PP
-See also QMenuData::setItemChecked().
+See also TQMenuData::setItemChecked().
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setCheckable() and get this property's value with isCheckable().
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqpopupmenu.html
+.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqpopupmenu.html
 .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html
 .SH COPYRIGHT
 Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com.  See the
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqprinter.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqprinter.3qt
index f9ee148c2..190396a85 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqprinter.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqprinter.3qt
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Inherits QPaintDevice.
 .BI "bool \fBfullPage\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBmargins\fR () const"
+.BI "TQSize \fBmargins\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBsetMargins\fR ( uint top, uint left, uint bottom, uint right )"
@@ -452,7 +452,7 @@ See also setFullPage(), PageSize, and QPaintDeviceMetrics.
 Returns TRUE if the printer option with identifier \fIoption\fR is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 See also setOptionEnabled().
-.SH "QSize QPrinter::margins () const"
+.SH "TQSize QPrinter::margins () const"
 Returns the width of the left margin and the height of the top margin of the printer. On Unix, this is a best-effort guess, not based on perfect knowledge.
 .PP
 If you have called setFullPage( TRUE ), margins().width() may be treated as the smallest sane left margin you can use, and margins().height() as the smallest sane top margin you can use.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqprogressdialog.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqprogressdialog.3qt
index 42deb5a79..f9c199e8b 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqprogressdialog.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqprogressdialog.3qt
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ Inherits QDialog.
 .BI "int \fBprogress\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQString \fBlabelText\fR () const"
@@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ Sets the current amount of progress to \fIprogress\fR and the total number of st
 See also totalSteps.
 .SH "void QProgressDialog::setTotalSteps ( int totalSteps )\fC [slot]\fR"
 Sets the total number of steps to \fItotalSteps\fR. See the "totalSteps" property for details.
-.SH "QSize QProgressDialog::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize QProgressDialog::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns a size that fits the contents of the progress dialog. The progress dialog resizes itself as required, so you should not need to call this yourself.
 .SH "int QProgressDialog::totalSteps () const"
 Returns the total number of steps. See the "totalSteps" property for details.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqpushbutton.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqpushbutton.3qt
index aefb21929..d0298868c 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqpushbutton.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqpushbutton.3qt
@@ -49,10 +49,10 @@ Inherits QButton.
 .BI "bool isMenuButton () const  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBsetPopup\fR ( QPopupMenu * popup )"
+.BI "void \fBsetPopup\fR ( TQPopupMenu * popup )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QPopupMenu * \fBpopup\fR () const"
+.BI "TQPopupMenu * \fBpopup\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBsetIconSet\fR ( const TQIconSet & )"
@@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Auto-repeat or not.
 .TP
 Pressed down or not.
 .PP
-As a general rule, use a push button when the application or dialog window performs an action when the user clicks on it (such as Apply, Cancel, Close and Help) \fIand\fR when the widget is supposed to have a wide, rectangular shape with a text label. Small, typically square buttons that change the state of the window rather than performing an action (such as the buttons in the top-right corner of the QFileDialog) are not command buttons, but tool buttons. TQt provides a special class (QToolButton) for these buttons.
+As a general rule, use a push button when the application or dialog window performs an action when the user clicks on it (such as Apply, Cancel, Close and Help) \fIand\fR when the widget is supposed to have a wide, rectangular shape with a text label. Small, typically square buttons that change the state of the window rather than performing an action (such as the buttons in the top-right corner of the QFileDialog) are not command buttons, but tool buttons. TQt provides a special class (TQToolButton) for these buttons.
 .PP
 If you need toggle behavior (see setToggleButton()) or a button that auto-repeats the activation signal when being pushed down like the arrows in a scroll bar (see setAutoRepeat()), a command button is probably not what you want. When in doubt, use a tool button.
 .PP
@@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Other classes of buttons are option buttons (see QRadioButton) and check boxes (
 .PP
 In Qt, the QButton abstract base class provides most of the modes and other API, and QPushButton provides GUI logic. See QButton for more information about the API.
 .PP
-See also QToolButton, QRadioButton, QCheckBox, GUI Design Handbook: Push Button, and Basic Widgets.
+See also TQToolButton, QRadioButton, QCheckBox, GUI Design Handbook: Push Button, and Basic Widgets.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "QPushButton::QPushButton ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 Constructs a push button with no text.
@@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Returns TRUE if the button is toggled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "on" pro
 Returns TRUE if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "toggleButton" property for details.
 .SH "const QPixmap * QButton::pixmap () const"
 Returns the pixmap shown on the button. See the "pixmap" property for details.
-.SH "QPopupMenu * QPushButton::popup () const"
+.SH "TQPopupMenu * QPushButton::popup () const"
 Returns the button's associated popup menu or 0 if no popup menu has been set.
 .PP
 See also setPopup().
@@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Sets the icon set on the push button. See the "iconSet" property for details.
 Sets whether the push button is toggled. See the "on" property for details.
 .SH "void QButton::setPixmap ( const QPixmap & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the pixmap shown on the button. See the "pixmap" property for details.
-.SH "void QPushButton::setPopup ( QPopupMenu * popup )"
+.SH "void QPushButton::setPopup ( TQPopupMenu * popup )"
 Associates the popup menu \fIpopup\fR with this push button. This turns the button into a menu button.
 .PP
 Ownership of the popup menu is \fInot\fR transferred to the push button.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqradiobutton.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqradiobutton.3qt
index 826ea8285..116f0c981 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqradiobutton.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqradiobutton.3qt
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Just like QPushButton, a radio button can display text or a pixmap. The text can
 .ce 1
 .B "[Image Omitted]"
 .PP
-See also QPushButton, QToolButton, GUI Design Handbook: Radio Button, and Basic Widgets.
+See also QPushButton, TQToolButton, GUI Design Handbook: Radio Button, and Basic Widgets.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "QRadioButton::QRadioButton ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 Constructs a radio button with no text.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqrect.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqrect.3qt
index 80b56227b..68141b0ee 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqrect.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqrect.3qt
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ QRect \- Defines a rectangle in the plane
 .BI "\fBQRect\fR ( const QPoint & topLeft, const QPoint & bottomRight )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQRect\fR ( const QPoint & topLeft, const QSize & size )"
+.BI "\fBQRect\fR ( const QPoint & topLeft, const TQSize & size )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fBQRect\fR ( int left, int top, int width, int height )"
@@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ QRect \- Defines a rectangle in the plane
 .BI "void \fBaddCoords\fR ( int xp1, int yp1, int xp2, int yp2 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBsize\fR () const"
+.BI "TQSize \fBsize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBwidth\fR () const"
@@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ QRect \- Defines a rectangle in the plane
 .BI "void \fBsetHeight\fR ( int h )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBsetSize\fR ( const QSize & s )"
+.BI "void \fBsetSize\fR ( const TQSize & s )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "QRect \fBoperator|\fR ( const QRect & r ) const"
@@ -237,17 +237,17 @@ Generally, \fIwidth = right - left + 1\fR and \fIheight = bottom - top + 1\fR. W
 .PP
 The default coordinate system has origin (0, 0) in the top-left corner. The positive direction of the y axis is down, and the positive x axis is from left to right.
 .PP
-A QRect can be constructed with a set of left, top, width and height integers, from two QPoints or from a QPoint and a QSize. After creation the dimensions can be changed, e.g. with setLeft(), setRight(), setTop() and setBottom(), or by setting sizes, e.g. setWidth(), setHeight() and setSize(). The dimensions can also be changed with the move functions, e.g. moveBy(), moveCenter(), moveBottomRight(), etc. You can also add coordinates to a rectangle with addCoords().
+A QRect can be constructed with a set of left, top, width and height integers, from two QPoints or from a QPoint and a TQSize. After creation the dimensions can be changed, e.g. with setLeft(), setRight(), setTop() and setBottom(), or by setting sizes, e.g. setWidth(), setHeight() and setSize(). The dimensions can also be changed with the move functions, e.g. moveBy(), moveCenter(), moveBottomRight(), etc. You can also add coordinates to a rectangle with addCoords().
 .PP
 You can test to see if a QRect contains a specific point with contains(). You can also test to see if two QRects intersect with intersects() (see also intersect()). To get the bounding rectangle of two QRects use unite().
 .PP
-See also QPoint, QSize, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
+See also QPoint, TQSize, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "QRect::QRect ()"
 Constructs an invalid rectangle.
 .SH "QRect::QRect ( const QPoint & topLeft, const QPoint & bottomRight )"
 Constructs a rectangle with \fItopLeft\fR as the top-left corner and \fIbottomRight\fR as the bottom-right corner.
-.SH "QRect::QRect ( const QPoint & topLeft, const QSize & size )"
+.SH "QRect::QRect ( const QPoint & topLeft, const TQSize & size )"
 Constructs a rectangle with \fItopLeft\fR as the top-left corner and \fIsize\fR as the rectangle size.
 .SH "QRect::QRect ( int left, int top, int width, int height )"
 Constructs a rectangle with the \fItop\fR, \fIleft\fR corner and \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR.
@@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Example (creates three identical rectangles):
 .br
         QRect r1( QPoint(100,200), QPoint(110,215) );
 .br
-        QRect r2( QPoint(100,200), QSize(11,16) );
+        QRect r2( QPoint(100,200), TQSize(11,16) );
 .br
         QRect r3( 100, 200, 11, 16 );
 .br
@@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ Sets the right edge of the rectangle to \fIpos\fR. May change the width, but wil
 See also right(), setLeft(), and setWidth().
 .PP
 Example: scribble/scribble.cpp.
-.SH "void QRect::setSize ( const QSize & s )"
+.SH "void QRect::setSize ( const TQSize & s )"
 Sets the size of the rectangle to \fIs\fR. The top-left corner is not moved.
 .PP
 See also size(), setWidth(), and setHeight().
@@ -569,7 +569,7 @@ Sets the y position of the rectangle (its top) to \fIy\fR. May change the height
 Identical to setTop().
 .PP
 See also y() and setX().
-.SH "QSize QRect::size () const"
+.SH "TQSize QRect::size () const"
 Returns the size of the rectangle.
 .PP
 See also width() and height().
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqresizeevent.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqresizeevent.3qt
index 212eec402..41f8067c1 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqresizeevent.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqresizeevent.3qt
@@ -16,13 +16,13 @@ Inherits QEvent.
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQResizeEvent\fR ( const QSize & size, const QSize & oldSize )"
+.BI "\fBQResizeEvent\fR ( const TQSize & size, const TQSize & oldSize )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "const QSize & \fBsize\fR () const"
+.BI "const TQSize & \fBsize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "const QSize & \fBoldSize\fR () const"
+.BI "const TQSize & \fBoldSize\fR () const"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -34,11 +34,11 @@ The event handler TQWidget::resizeEvent() receives resize events.
 .PP
 See also TQWidget::size, TQWidget::geometry, and Event Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "QResizeEvent::QResizeEvent ( const QSize & size, const QSize & oldSize )"
+.SH "QResizeEvent::QResizeEvent ( const TQSize & size, const TQSize & oldSize )"
 Constructs a resize event with the new and old widget sizes, \fIsize\fR and \fIoldSize\fR respectively.
-.SH "const QSize & QResizeEvent::oldSize () const"
+.SH "const TQSize & QResizeEvent::oldSize () const"
 Returns the old size of the widget.
-.SH "const QSize & QResizeEvent::size () const"
+.SH "const TQSize & QResizeEvent::size () const"
 Returns the new size of the widget, which is the same as TQWidget::size().
 .PP
 Examples:
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqscrollview.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqscrollview.3qt
index 07eb4e2a3..abfcb3b8f 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqscrollview.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqscrollview.3qt
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Inherited by TQCanvasView, QTable, QGridView, TQIconView, QListBox, QListView, a
 .BI "bool \fBhasStaticBackground\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBviewportSize\fR ( int x, int y ) const"
+.BI "TQSize \fBviewportSize\fR ( int x, int y ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "bool \fBisHorizontalSliderPressed\fR ()"
@@ -813,7 +813,7 @@ To provide simple processing of events on the contents, this function receives a
 See also TQWidget::resizeEvent().
 .PP
 Example: chart/canvasview.cpp.
-.SH "QSize QScrollView::viewportSize ( int x, int y ) const"
+.SH "TQSize QScrollView::viewportSize ( int x, int y ) const"
 Returns the viewport size for size (\fIx\fR, \fIy\fR).
 .PP
 The viewport size depends on \fI(x, y)\fR (the size of the contents), the size of this widget and the modes of the horizontal and vertical scroll bars.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsessionmanager.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsessionmanager.3qt
index 79472a0e6..4ae80cd58 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsessionmanager.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsessionmanager.3qt
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 '\" t
-.TH QSessionManager 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
+.TH TQSessionManager 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
 .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.  See the
 .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license
 .\" statement.
@@ -7,9 +7,9 @@
 .ad l
 .nh
 .SH NAME
-QSessionManager \- Access to the session manager
+TQSessionManager \- Access to the session manager
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fC#include <ntqsessionmanager.h>\fR
+\fC#include <tqsessionmanager.h>\fR
 .PP
 Inherits TQObject.
 .PP
@@ -71,38 +71,38 @@ Inherits TQObject.
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The QSessionManager class provides access to the session manager.
+The TQSessionManager class provides access to the session manager.
 .PP
 The session manager is responsible for session management, most importantly for interruption and resumption. A "session" is a kind of record of the state of the system, e.g. which applications were run at start up and which applications are currently running. The session manager is used to save the session, e.g. when the machine is shut down; and to restore a session, e.g. when the machine is started up. Use QSettings to save and restore an individual application's settings, e.g. window positions, recently used files, etc.
 .PP
-QSessionManager provides an interface between the application and the session manager so that the program can work well with the session manager. In Qt, session management requests for action are handled by the two virtual functions QApplication::commitData() and QApplication::saveState(). Both provide a reference to a session manager object as argument, to allow the application to communicate with the session manager.
+TQSessionManager provides an interface between the application and the session manager so that the program can work well with the session manager. In Qt, session management requests for action are handled by the two virtual functions QApplication::commitData() and QApplication::saveState(). Both provide a reference to a session manager object as argument, to allow the application to communicate with the session manager.
 .PP
 During a session management action (i.e. within commitData() and saveState()), no user interaction is possible \fIunless\fR the application got explicit permission from the session manager. You ask for permission by calling allowsInteraction() or, if it's really urgent, allowsErrorInteraction(). TQt does not enforce this, but the session manager may.
 .PP
 You can try to abort the shutdown process by calling cancel(). The default commitData() function does this if some top-level window rejected its closeEvent().
 .PP
-For sophisticated session managers provided on Unix/X11, QSessionManager offers further possibilites to fine-tune an application's session management behavior: setRestartCommand(), setDiscardCommand(), setRestartHint(), setProperty(), requestPhase2(). See the respective function descriptions for further details.
+For sophisticated session managers provided on Unix/X11, TQSessionManager offers further possibilites to fine-tune an application's session management behavior: setRestartCommand(), setDiscardCommand(), setRestartHint(), setProperty(), requestPhase2(). See the respective function descriptions for further details.
 .PP
 See also Main Window and Related Classes and Environment Classes.
 .SS "Member Type Documentation"
-.SH "QSessionManager::RestartHint"
+.SH "TQSessionManager::RestartHint"
 This enum type defines the circumstances under which this application wants to be restarted by the session manager. The current values are
 .TP
-\fCQSessionManager::RestartIfRunning\fR - if the application is still running when the session is shut down, it wants to be restarted at the start of the next session.
+\fCTQSessionManager::RestartIfRunning\fR - if the application is still running when the session is shut down, it wants to be restarted at the start of the next session.
 .TP
-\fCQSessionManager::RestartAnyway\fR - the application wants to be started at the start of the next session, no matter what. (This is useful for utilities that run just after startup and then quit.)
+\fCTQSessionManager::RestartAnyway\fR - the application wants to be started at the start of the next session, no matter what. (This is useful for utilities that run just after startup and then quit.)
 .TP
-\fCQSessionManager::RestartImmediately\fR - the application wants to be started immediately whenever it is not running.
+\fCTQSessionManager::RestartImmediately\fR - the application wants to be started immediately whenever it is not running.
 .TP
-\fCQSessionManager::RestartNever\fR - the application does not want to be restarted automatically.
+\fCTQSessionManager::RestartNever\fR - the application does not want to be restarted automatically.
 .PP
 The default hint is RestartIfRunning.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "bool QSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction ()"
+.SH "bool TQSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction ()"
 This is similar to allowsInteraction(), but also tells the session manager that an error occurred. Session managers may give error interaction request higher priority, which means that it is more likely that an error interaction is permitted. However, you are still not guaranteed that the session manager will allow interaction.
 .PP
 See also allowsInteraction(), release(), and cancel().
-.SH "bool QSessionManager::allowsInteraction ()"
+.SH "bool TQSessionManager::allowsInteraction ()"
 Asks the session manager for permission to interact with the user. Returns TRUE if interaction is permitted; otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 The rationale behind this mechanism is to make it possible to synchronize user interaction during a shutdown. Advanced session managers may ask all applications simultaneously to commit their data, resulting in a much faster shutdown.
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Here's an example of how an application's QApplication::commitData() might be im
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-void MyApplication::commitData( QSessionManager& sm ) {
+void MyApplication::commitData( TQSessionManager& sm ) {
 .br
     if ( sm.allowsInteraction() ) {
 .br
@@ -169,11 +169,11 @@ void MyApplication::commitData( QSessionManager& sm ) {
 If an error occurred within the application while saving its data, you may want to try allowsErrorInteraction() instead.
 .PP
 See also QApplication::commitData(), release(), and cancel().
-.SH "void QSessionManager::cancel ()"
+.SH "void TQSessionManager::cancel ()"
 Tells the session manager to cancel the shutdown process. Applications should not call this function without first asking the user.
 .PP
 See also allowsInteraction() and allowsErrorInteraction().
-.SH "TQStringList QSessionManager::discardCommand () const"
+.SH "TQStringList TQSessionManager::discardCommand () const"
 Returns the currently set discard command.
 .PP
 Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate over a copy, e.g.
@@ -195,17 +195,17 @@ Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate over a copy,
 .fi
 .PP
 See also setDiscardCommand(), restartCommand(), and setRestartCommand().
-.SH "void * QSessionManager::handle () const"
+.SH "void * TQSessionManager::handle () const"
 X11 only: returns a handle to the current \fCSmcConnection\fR.
-.SH "bool QSessionManager::isPhase2 () const"
+.SH "bool TQSessionManager::isPhase2 () const"
 Returns TRUE if the session manager is currently performing a second session management phase; otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 See also requestPhase2().
-.SH "void QSessionManager::release ()"
+.SH "void TQSessionManager::release ()"
 Releases the session manager's interaction semaphore after an interaction phase.
 .PP
 See also allowsInteraction() and allowsErrorInteraction().
-.SH "void QSessionManager::requestPhase2 ()"
+.SH "void TQSessionManager::requestPhase2 ()"
 Requests a second session management phase for the application. The application may then return immediately from the QApplication::commitData() or QApplication::saveState() function, and they will be called again once most or all other applications have finished their session management.
 .PP
 The two phases are useful for applications such as the X11 window manager that need to store information about another application's windows and therefore have to wait until these applications have completed their respective session management tasks.
@@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ The two phases are useful for applications such as the X11 window manager that n
 Note that if another application has requested a second phase it may get called before, simultaneously with, or after your application's second phase.
 .PP
 See also isPhase2().
-.SH "TQStringList QSessionManager::restartCommand () const"
+.SH "TQStringList TQSessionManager::restartCommand () const"
 Returns the currently set restart command.
 .PP
 Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate over a copy, e.g.
@@ -235,17 +235,17 @@ Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate over a copy,
 .fi
 .PP
 See also setRestartCommand() and restartHint().
-.SH "RestartHint QSessionManager::restartHint () const"
+.SH "RestartHint TQSessionManager::restartHint () const"
 Returns the application's current restart hint. The default is RestartIfRunning.
 .PP
 See also setRestartHint().
-.SH "TQString QSessionManager::sessionId () const"
+.SH "TQString TQSessionManager::sessionId () const"
 Returns the identifier of the current session.
 .PP
 If the application has been restored from an earlier session, this identifier is the same as it was in that earlier session.
 .PP
 See also sessionKey() and QApplication::sessionId().
-.SH "TQString QSessionManager::sessionKey () const"
+.SH "TQString TQSessionManager::sessionKey () const"
 Returns the session key in the current session.
 .PP
 If the application has been restored from an earlier session, this key is the same as it was when the previous session ended.
@@ -253,19 +253,19 @@ If the application has been restored from an earlier session, this key is the sa
 The session key changes with every call of commitData() or saveState().
 .PP
 See also sessionId() and QApplication::sessionKey().
-.SH "void QSessionManager::setDiscardCommand ( const TQStringList & )"
+.SH "void TQSessionManager::setDiscardCommand ( const TQStringList & )"
 See also discardCommand() and setRestartCommand().
-.SH "void QSessionManager::setManagerProperty ( const TQString & name, const TQStringList & value )"
+.SH "void TQSessionManager::setManagerProperty ( const TQString & name, const TQStringList & value )"
 Low-level write access to the application's identification and state record are kept in the session manager.
 .PP
 The property called \fIname\fR has its value set to the string list \fIvalue\fR.
-.SH "void QSessionManager::setManagerProperty ( const TQString & name, const TQString & value )"
+.SH "void TQSessionManager::setManagerProperty ( const TQString & name, const TQString & value )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Low-level write access to the application's identification and state records are kept in the session manager.
 .PP
 The property called \fIname\fR has its value set to the string \fIvalue\fR.
-.SH "void QSessionManager::setRestartCommand ( const TQStringList & command )"
+.SH "void TQSessionManager::setRestartCommand ( const TQStringList & command )"
 If the session manager is capable of restoring sessions it will execute \fIcommand\fR in order to restore the application. The command defaults to
 .PP
 .nf
@@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ The \fC-session\fR option is mandatory; otherwise QApplication cannot tell wheth
 If your application is very simple, it may be possible to store the entire application state in additional command line options. This is usually a very bad idea because command lines are often limited to a few hundred bytes. Instead, use QSettings, or temporary files or a database for this purpose. By marking the data with the unique sessionId(), you will be able to restore the application in a future session.
 .PP
 See also restartCommand(), setDiscardCommand(), and setRestartHint().
-.SH "void QSessionManager::setRestartHint ( RestartHint hint )"
+.SH "void TQSessionManager::setRestartHint ( RestartHint hint )"
 Sets the application's restart hint to \fIhint\fR. On application startup the hint is set to RestartIfRunning.
 .PP
 Note that these flags are only hints, a session manager may or may not respect them.
@@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ We recommend setting the restart hint in QApplication::saveState() because most
 See also restartHint().
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqsessionmanager.html
+.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqsessionmanager.html
 .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html
 .SH COPYRIGHT
 Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com.  See the
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsettings.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsettings.3qt
index 76320600f..e28aa332d 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsettings.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsettings.3qt
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ On Unix systems, QSettings uses text files to store settings. On Windows systems
 .PP
 Each setting comprises an identifying key and the data associated with the key. A key is a unicode string which consists of \fItwo\fR or more subkeys. A subkey is a slash, '/', followed by one or more unicode characters (excluding slashes, newlines, carriage returns and equals, '=', signs). The associated data, called the entry or value, may be a boolean, an integer, a double, a string or a list of strings. Entry strings may contain any unicode characters.
 .PP
-If you want to save and restore the entire desktop's settings, i.e. which applications are running, use QSettings to save the settings for each individual application and QSessionManager to save the desktop's session.
+If you want to save and restore the entire desktop's settings, i.e. which applications are running, use QSettings to save the settings for each individual application and TQSessionManager to save the desktop's session.
 .PP
 Example settings:
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsignal.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsignal.3qt
index c5b80d848..f2fd48f62 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsignal.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsignal.3qt
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ Inherits TQObject.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The QSignal class can be used to send signals for classes that don't inherit TQObject.
 .PP
-If you want to send signals from a class that does not inherit TQObject, you can create an internal QSignal object to emit the signal. You must also provide a function that connects the signal to an outside object slot. This is how we have implemented signals in the QMenuData class, which is not a TQObject.
+If you want to send signals from a class that does not inherit TQObject, you can create an internal QSignal object to emit the signal. You must also provide a function that connects the signal to an outside object slot. This is how we have implemented signals in the TQMenuData class, which is not a TQObject.
 .PP
 In general, we recommend inheriting TQObject instead. TQObject provides much more functionality.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsize.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsize.3qt
index 1df1a7b44..510dba354 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsize.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsize.3qt
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 '\" t
-.TH QSize 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
+.TH TQSize 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
 .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.  See the
 .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license
 .\" statement.
@@ -7,9 +7,9 @@
 .ad l
 .nh
 .SH NAME
-QSize \- Defines the size of a two-dimensional object
+TQSize \- Defines the size of a two-dimensional object
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fC#include <ntqsize.h>\fR
+\fC#include <tqsize.h>\fR
 .PP
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
@@ -17,10 +17,10 @@ QSize \- Defines the size of a two-dimensional object
 .BI "enum \fBScaleMode\fR { ScaleFree, ScaleMin, ScaleMax }"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQSize\fR ()"
+.BI "\fBTQSize\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQSize\fR ( int w, int h )"
+.BI "\fBTQSize\fR ( int w, int h )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "bool \fBisNull\fR () const"
@@ -50,13 +50,13 @@ QSize \- Defines the size of a two-dimensional object
 .BI "void \fBscale\fR ( int w, int h, ScaleMode mode )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBscale\fR ( const QSize & s, ScaleMode mode )"
+.BI "void \fBscale\fR ( const TQSize & s, ScaleMode mode )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBexpandedTo\fR ( const QSize & otherSize ) const"
+.BI "TQSize \fBexpandedTo\fR ( const TQSize & otherSize ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBboundedTo\fR ( const QSize & otherSize ) const"
+.BI "TQSize \fBboundedTo\fR ( const TQSize & otherSize ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "QCOORD & \fBrwidth\fR ()"
@@ -65,65 +65,65 @@ QSize \- Defines the size of a two-dimensional object
 .BI "QCOORD & \fBrheight\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize & \fBoperator+=\fR ( const QSize & s )"
+.BI "TQSize & \fBoperator+=\fR ( const TQSize & s )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize & \fBoperator-=\fR ( const QSize & s )"
+.BI "TQSize & \fBoperator-=\fR ( const TQSize & s )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize & \fBoperator*=\fR ( int c )"
+.BI "TQSize & \fBoperator*=\fR ( int c )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize & \fBoperator*=\fR ( double c )"
+.BI "TQSize & \fBoperator*=\fR ( double c )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize & \fBoperator/=\fR ( int c )"
+.BI "TQSize & \fBoperator/=\fR ( int c )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize & \fBoperator/=\fR ( double c )"
+.BI "TQSize & \fBoperator/=\fR ( double c )"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH RELATED FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "bool \fBoperator==\fR ( const QSize & s1, const QSize & s2 )"
+.BI "bool \fBoperator==\fR ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "bool \fBoperator!=\fR ( const QSize & s1, const QSize & s2 )"
+.BI "bool \fBoperator!=\fR ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "const QSize \fBoperator+\fR ( const QSize & s1, const QSize & s2 )"
+.BI "const TQSize \fBoperator+\fR ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "const QSize \fBoperator-\fR ( const QSize & s1, const QSize & s2 )"
+.BI "const TQSize \fBoperator-\fR ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "const QSize \fBoperator*\fR ( const QSize & s, int c )"
+.BI "const TQSize \fBoperator*\fR ( const TQSize & s, int c )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "const QSize \fBoperator*\fR ( int c, const QSize & s )"
+.BI "const TQSize \fBoperator*\fR ( int c, const TQSize & s )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "const QSize \fBoperator*\fR ( const QSize & s, double c )"
+.BI "const TQSize \fBoperator*\fR ( const TQSize & s, double c )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "const QSize \fBoperator*\fR ( double c, const QSize & s )"
+.BI "const TQSize \fBoperator*\fR ( double c, const TQSize & s )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "const QSize \fBoperator/\fR ( const QSize & s, int c )"
+.BI "const TQSize \fBoperator/\fR ( const TQSize & s, int c )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "const QSize \fBoperator/\fR ( const QSize & s, double c )"
+.BI "const TQSize \fBoperator/\fR ( const TQSize & s, double c )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QDataStream & \fBoperator<<\fR ( QDataStream & s, const QSize & sz )"
+.BI "QDataStream & \fBoperator<<\fR ( QDataStream & s, const TQSize & sz )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QDataStream & \fBoperator>>\fR ( QDataStream & s, QSize & sz )"
+.BI "QDataStream & \fBoperator>>\fR ( QDataStream & s, TQSize & sz )"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The QSize class defines the size of a two-dimensional object.
+The TQSize class defines the size of a two-dimensional object.
 .PP
 A size is specified by a width and a height.
 .PP
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ The size can be set in the constructor and changed with setWidth() and setHeight
 .PP
 See also QPoint, QRect, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
 .SS "Member Type Documentation"
-.SH "QSize::ScaleMode"
+.SH "TQSize::ScaleMode"
 This enum type defines the different ways of scaling a size.
 .PP
 <center>
@@ -142,82 +142,82 @@ This enum type defines the different ways of scaling a size.
 .PP
 </center> 
 .TP
-\fCQSize::ScaleFree\fR - The size is scaled freely. The ratio is not preserved.
+\fCTQSize::ScaleFree\fR - The size is scaled freely. The ratio is not preserved.
 .TP
-\fCQSize::ScaleMin\fR - The size is scaled to a rectangle as large as possible inside a given rectangle, preserving the aspect ratio.
+\fCTQSize::ScaleMin\fR - The size is scaled to a rectangle as large as possible inside a given rectangle, preserving the aspect ratio.
 .TP
-\fCQSize::ScaleMax\fR - The size is scaled to a rectangle as small as possible outside a given rectangle, preserving the aspect ratio.
+\fCTQSize::ScaleMax\fR - The size is scaled to a rectangle as small as possible outside a given rectangle, preserving the aspect ratio.
 .PP
-See also QSize::scale(), TQImage::scale(), and TQImage::smoothScale().
+See also TQSize::scale(), TQImage::scale(), and TQImage::smoothScale().
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "QSize::QSize ()"
+.SH "TQSize::TQSize ()"
 Constructs a size with invalid (negative) width and height.
-.SH "QSize::QSize ( int w, int h )"
+.SH "TQSize::TQSize ( int w, int h )"
 Constructs a size with width \fIw\fR and height \fIh\fR.
-.SH "QSize QSize::boundedTo ( const QSize & otherSize ) const"
+.SH "TQSize TQSize::boundedTo ( const TQSize & otherSize ) const"
 Returns a size with the minimum width and height of this size and \fIotherSize\fR.
-.SH "QSize QSize::expandedTo ( const QSize & otherSize ) const"
+.SH "TQSize TQSize::expandedTo ( const TQSize & otherSize ) const"
 Returns a size with the maximum width and height of this size and \fIotherSize\fR.
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l customlayout/card.cpp and customlayout/flow.cpp.
-.SH "int QSize::height () const"
+.SH "int TQSize::height () const"
 Returns the height.
 .PP
 See also width().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l movies/main.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, and qfd/qfd.cpp.
-.SH "bool QSize::isEmpty () const"
+.SH "bool TQSize::isEmpty () const"
 Returns TRUE if the width is less than or equal to 0, or the height is less than or equal to 0; otherwise returns FALSE.
-.SH "bool QSize::isNull () const"
+.SH "bool TQSize::isNull () const"
 Returns TRUE if the width is 0 and the height is 0; otherwise returns FALSE.
-.SH "bool QSize::isValid () const"
+.SH "bool TQSize::isValid () const"
 Returns TRUE if the width is equal to or greater than 0 and the height is equal to or greater than 0; otherwise returns FALSE.
-.SH "QSize & QSize::operator*= ( int c )"
+.SH "TQSize & TQSize::operator*= ( int c )"
 Multiplies both the width and height by \fIc\fR and returns a reference to the size.
-.SH "QSize & QSize::operator*= ( double c )"
+.SH "TQSize & TQSize::operator*= ( double c )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Multiplies both the width and height by \fIc\fR and returns a reference to the size.
 .PP
 Note that the result is truncated.
-.SH "QSize & QSize::operator+= ( const QSize & s )"
+.SH "TQSize & TQSize::operator+= ( const TQSize & s )"
 Adds \fIs\fR to the size and returns a reference to this size.
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-    QSize s(  3, 7 );
+    TQSize s(  3, 7 );
 .br
-    QSize r( -1, 4 );
+    TQSize r( -1, 4 );
 .br
     s += r;                     // s becomes (2,11)
 .fi
-.SH "QSize & QSize::operator-= ( const QSize & s )"
+.SH "TQSize & TQSize::operator-= ( const TQSize & s )"
 Subtracts \fIs\fR from the size and returns a reference to this size.
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-    QSize s(  3, 7 );
+    TQSize s(  3, 7 );
 .br
-    QSize r( -1, 4 );
+    TQSize r( -1, 4 );
 .br
     s -= r;                     // s becomes (4,3)
 .br
 .fi
-.SH "QSize & QSize::operator/= ( int c )"
+.SH "TQSize & TQSize::operator/= ( int c )"
 Divides both the width and height by \fIc\fR and returns a reference to the size.
-.SH "QSize & QSize::operator/= ( double c )"
+.SH "TQSize & TQSize::operator/= ( double c )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Divides both the width and height by \fIc\fR and returns a reference to the size.
 .PP
 Note that the result is truncated.
-.SH "QCOORD & QSize::rheight ()"
+.SH "QCOORD & TQSize::rheight ()"
 Returns a reference to the height.
 .PP
 Using a reference makes it possible to directly manipulate the height.
@@ -226,14 +226,14 @@ Example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-    QSize s( 100, 10 );
+    TQSize s( 100, 10 );
 .br
     s.rheight() += 5;           // s becomes (100,15)
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
 See also rwidth().
-.SH "QCOORD & QSize::rwidth ()"
+.SH "QCOORD & TQSize::rwidth ()"
 Returns a reference to the width.
 .PP
 Using a reference makes it possible to directly manipulate the width.
@@ -242,14 +242,14 @@ Example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-    QSize s( 100, 10 );
+    TQSize s( 100, 10 );
 .br
     s.rwidth() += 20;           // s becomes (120,10)
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
 See also rheight().
-.SH "void QSize::scale ( int w, int h, ScaleMode mode )"
+.SH "void TQSize::scale ( int w, int h, ScaleMode mode )"
 Scales the size to a rectangle of width \fIw\fR and height \fIh\fR according to the ScaleMode \fImode\fR.
 .TP
 If \fImode\fR is ScaleFree, the size is set to (\fIw\fR, \fIh\fR).
@@ -262,42 +262,42 @@ Example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-    QSize t1( 10, 12 );
+    TQSize t1( 10, 12 );
 .br
-    t1.scale( 60, 60, QSize::ScaleFree );
+    t1.scale( 60, 60, TQSize::ScaleFree );
 .br
     // t1 is (60, 60)
 .br
 .br
-    QSize t2( 10, 12 );
+    TQSize t2( 10, 12 );
 .br
-    t2.scale( 60, 60, QSize::ScaleMin );
+    t2.scale( 60, 60, TQSize::ScaleMin );
 .br
     // t2 is (50, 60)
 .br
 .br
-    QSize t3( 10, 12 );
+    TQSize t3( 10, 12 );
 .br
-    t3.scale( 60, 60, QSize::ScaleMax );
+    t3.scale( 60, 60, TQSize::ScaleMax );
 .br
     // t3 is (60, 72)
 .br
 .fi
-.SH "void QSize::scale ( const QSize & s, ScaleMode mode )"
+.SH "void TQSize::scale ( const TQSize & s, ScaleMode mode )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Equivalent to scale(\fIs\fR.width(), \fIs\fR.height(), \fImode\fR).
-.SH "void QSize::setHeight ( int h )"
+.SH "void TQSize::setHeight ( int h )"
 Sets the height to \fIh\fR.
 .PP
 See also height() and setWidth().
-.SH "void QSize::setWidth ( int w )"
+.SH "void TQSize::setWidth ( int w )"
 Sets the width to \fIw\fR.
 .PP
 See also width() and setHeight().
-.SH "void QSize::transpose ()"
+.SH "void TQSize::transpose ()"
 Swaps the values of width and height.
-.SH "int QSize::width () const"
+.SH "int TQSize::width () const"
 Returns the width.
 .PP
 See also height().
@@ -305,47 +305,47 @@ See also height().
 Examples:
 .)l movies/main.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, and qfd/qfd.cpp.
 .SH RELATED FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "bool operator!= ( const QSize & s1, const QSize & s2 )"
+.SH "bool operator!= ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )"
 Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR and \fIs2\fR are different; otherwise returns FALSE.
-.SH "const QSize operator* ( const QSize & s, int c )"
+.SH "const TQSize operator* ( const TQSize & s, int c )"
 Multiplies \fIs\fR by \fIc\fR and returns the result.
-.SH "const QSize operator* ( int c, const QSize & s )"
+.SH "const TQSize operator* ( int c, const TQSize & s )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Multiplies \fIs\fR by \fIc\fR and returns the result.
-.SH "const QSize operator* ( const QSize & s, double c )"
+.SH "const TQSize operator* ( const TQSize & s, double c )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Multiplies \fIs\fR by \fIc\fR and returns the result.
-.SH "const QSize operator* ( double c, const QSize & s )"
+.SH "const TQSize operator* ( double c, const TQSize & s )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Multiplies \fIs\fR by \fIc\fR and returns the result.
-.SH "const QSize operator+ ( const QSize & s1, const QSize & s2 )"
+.SH "const TQSize operator+ ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )"
 Returns the sum of \fIs1\fR and \fIs2\fR; each component is added separately.
-.SH "const QSize operator- ( const QSize & s1, const QSize & s2 )"
+.SH "const TQSize operator- ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )"
 Returns \fIs2\fR subtracted from \fIs1\fR; each component is subtracted separately.
-.SH "const QSize operator/ ( const QSize & s, int c )"
+.SH "const TQSize operator/ ( const TQSize & s, int c )"
 Divides \fIs\fR by \fIc\fR and returns the result.
-.SH "const QSize operator/ ( const QSize & s, double c )"
+.SH "const TQSize operator/ ( const TQSize & s, double c )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Divides \fIs\fR by \fIc\fR and returns the result.
 .PP
 Note that the result is truncated.
-.SH "QDataStream & operator<< ( QDataStream & s, const QSize & sz )"
+.SH "QDataStream & operator<< ( QDataStream & s, const TQSize & sz )"
 Writes the size \fIsz\fR to the stream \fIs\fR and returns a reference to the stream.
 .PP
 See also Format of the QDataStream operators.
-.SH "bool operator== ( const QSize & s1, const QSize & s2 )"
+.SH "bool operator== ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )"
 Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR and \fIs2\fR are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
-.SH "QDataStream & operator>> ( QDataStream & s, QSize & sz )"
+.SH "QDataStream & operator>> ( QDataStream & s, TQSize & sz )"
 Reads the size from the stream \fIs\fR into size \fIsz\fR and returns a reference to the stream.
 .PP
 See also Format of the QDataStream operators.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqsize.html
+.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqsize.html
 .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html
 .SH COPYRIGHT
 Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com.  See the
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsizegrip.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsizegrip.3qt
index 38a30de6e..fddde80a1 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsizegrip.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsizegrip.3qt
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 '\" t
-.TH QSizeGrip 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
+.TH TQSizeGrip 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
 .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.  See the
 .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license
 .\" statement.
@@ -7,22 +7,22 @@
 .ad l
 .nh
 .SH NAME
-QSizeGrip \- Corner-grip for resizing a top-level window
+TQSizeGrip \- Corner-grip for resizing a top-level window
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fC#include <ntqsizegrip.h>\fR
+\fC#include <tqsizegrip.h>\fR
 .PP
 Inherits TQWidget.
 .PP
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQSizeGrip\fR ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQSizeGrip\fR ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fB~QSizeGrip\fR ()"
+.BI "\fB~TQSizeGrip\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SS "Protected Members"
@@ -38,11 +38,11 @@ Inherits TQWidget.
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The QSizeGrip class provides a corner-grip for resizing a top-level window.
+The TQSizeGrip class provides a corner-grip for resizing a top-level window.
 .PP
 This widget works like the standard Windows resize handle. In the X11 version this resize handle generally works differently from the one provided by the system; we hope to reduce this difference in the future.
 .PP
-Put this widget anywhere in a widget tree and the user can use it to resize the top-level window. Generally, this should be in the lower right-hand corner. Note that QStatusBar already uses this widget, so if you have a status bar (e.g. you are using QMainWindow), then you don't need to use this widget explicitly.
+Put this widget anywhere in a widget tree and the user can use it to resize the top-level window. Generally, this should be in the lower right-hand corner. Note that TQStatusBar already uses this widget, so if you have a status bar (e.g. you are using TQMainWindow), then you don't need to use this widget explicitly.
 .PP
 .ce 1
 .B "[Image Omitted]"
@@ -51,31 +51,31 @@ Put this widget anywhere in a widget tree and the user can use it to resize the
 .ce 1
 .B "[Image Omitted]"
 .PP
-See also QStatusBar, Widget Appearance and Style, Main Window and Related Classes, and Basic Widgets.
+See also TQStatusBar, Widget Appearance and Style, Main Window and Related Classes, and Basic Widgets.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "QSizeGrip::QSizeGrip ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
+.SH "TQSizeGrip::TQSizeGrip ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 Constructs a resize corner called \fIname\fR, as a child widget of \fIparent\fR.
-.SH "QSizeGrip::~QSizeGrip ()"
+.SH "TQSizeGrip::~TQSizeGrip ()"
 Destroys the size grip.
-.SH "void QSizeGrip::mouseMoveEvent ( QMouseEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQSizeGrip::mouseMoveEvent ( QMouseEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Resizes the top-level widget containing this widget. The event is in \fIe\fR.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-.SH "void QSizeGrip::mousePressEvent ( QMouseEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQSizeGrip::mousePressEvent ( QMouseEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Primes the resize operation. The event is in \fIe\fR.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-.SH "void QSizeGrip::paintEvent ( QPaintEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQSizeGrip::paintEvent ( QPaintEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Paints the resize grip. Resize grips are usually rendered as small diagonal textured lines in the lower-right corner. The event is in \fIe\fR.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-.SH "QSize QSizeGrip::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize TQSizeGrip::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the size grip's size hint; this is a small size.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQWidget.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqsizegrip.html
+.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqsizegrip.html
 .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html
 .SH COPYRIGHT
 Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com.  See the
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsizepolicy.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsizepolicy.3qt
index 7dd60fc5b..96fae066b 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsizepolicy.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsizepolicy.3qt
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 '\" t
-.TH QSizePolicy 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
+.TH TQSizePolicy 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
 .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.  See the
 .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license
 .\" statement.
@@ -7,9 +7,9 @@
 .ad l
 .nh
 .SH NAME
-QSizePolicy \- Layout attribute describing horizontal and vertical resizing policy
+TQSizePolicy \- Layout attribute describing horizontal and vertical resizing policy
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fC#include <ntqsizepolicy.h>\fR
+\fC#include <tqsizepolicy.h>\fR
 .PP
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
@@ -20,13 +20,13 @@ QSizePolicy \- Layout attribute describing horizontal and vertical resizing poli
 .BI "enum \fBExpandData\fR { NoDirection = 0, Horizontally = 1, Vertically = 2, Horizontal = Horizontally, Vertical = Vertically, BothDirections = Horizontally | Vertically }"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQSizePolicy\fR ()"
+.BI "\fBTQSizePolicy\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQSizePolicy\fR ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQSizePolicy\fR ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQSizePolicy\fR ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, uchar horStretch, uchar verStretch, bool hfw = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQSizePolicy\fR ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, uchar horStretch, uchar verStretch, bool hfw = FALSE )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "SizeType \fBhorData\fR () const"
@@ -62,10 +62,10 @@ QSizePolicy \- Layout attribute describing horizontal and vertical resizing poli
 .BI "bool \fBhasHeightForWidth\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "bool \fBoperator==\fR ( const QSizePolicy & s ) const"
+.BI "bool \fBoperator==\fR ( const TQSizePolicy & s ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "bool \fBoperator!=\fR ( const QSizePolicy & s ) const"
+.BI "bool \fBoperator!=\fR ( const TQSizePolicy & s ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "uint \fBhorStretch\fR () const"
@@ -84,136 +84,136 @@ QSizePolicy \- Layout attribute describing horizontal and vertical resizing poli
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The QSizePolicy class is a layout attribute describing horizontal and vertical resizing policy.
+The TQSizePolicy class is a layout attribute describing horizontal and vertical resizing policy.
 .PP
 The size policy of a widget is an expression of its willingness to be resized in various ways.
 .PP
-Widgets that reimplement TQWidget::sizePolicy() return a QSizePolicy that describes the horizontal and vertical resizing policy they prefer when being laid out. Only one of the constructors is of interest in most applications.
+Widgets that reimplement TQWidget::sizePolicy() return a TQSizePolicy that describes the horizontal and vertical resizing policy they prefer when being laid out. Only one of the constructors is of interest in most applications.
 .PP
-QSizePolicy contains two independent SizeType objects; one describes the widgets's horizontal size policy, and the other describes its vertical size policy. It also contains a flag to indicate whether the height and width of its preferred size are related.
+TQSizePolicy contains two independent SizeType objects; one describes the widgets's horizontal size policy, and the other describes its vertical size policy. It also contains a flag to indicate whether the height and width of its preferred size are related.
 .PP
 The horizontal and vertical SizeTypes are set in the usual constructor and can be queried using a variety of functions.
 .PP
 The hasHeightForWidth() flag indicates whether the widget's sizeHint() is width-dependent (such as a word-wrapping label) or not.
 .PP
-See also QSizePolicy::SizeType, Widget Appearance and Style, and Layout Management.
+See also TQSizePolicy::SizeType, Widget Appearance and Style, and Layout Management.
 .SS "Member Type Documentation"
-.SH "QSizePolicy::ExpandData"
+.SH "TQSizePolicy::ExpandData"
 This enum type describes in which directions a widget can make use of extra space. There are four possible values:
 .TP
-\fCQSizePolicy::NoDirection\fR - the widget cannot make use of extra space in any direction.
+\fCTQSizePolicy::NoDirection\fR - the widget cannot make use of extra space in any direction.
 .TP
-\fCQSizePolicy::Horizontally\fR - the widget can usefully be wider than the sizeHint().
+\fCTQSizePolicy::Horizontally\fR - the widget can usefully be wider than the sizeHint().
 .TP
-\fCQSizePolicy::Vertically\fR - the widget can usefully be taller than the sizeHint().
+\fCTQSizePolicy::Vertically\fR - the widget can usefully be taller than the sizeHint().
 .TP
-\fCQSizePolicy::BothDirections\fR - the widget can usefully be both wider and taller than the sizeHint().
-.SH "QSizePolicy::SizeType"
-The per-dimension sizing types used when constructing a QSizePolicy are:
+\fCTQSizePolicy::BothDirections\fR - the widget can usefully be both wider and taller than the sizeHint().
+.SH "TQSizePolicy::SizeType"
+The per-dimension sizing types used when constructing a TQSizePolicy are:
 .TP
-\fCQSizePolicy::Fixed\fR - The TQWidget::sizeHint() is the only acceptable alternative, so the widget can never grow or shrink (e.g. the vertical direction of a push button).
+\fCTQSizePolicy::Fixed\fR - The TQWidget::sizeHint() is the only acceptable alternative, so the widget can never grow or shrink (e.g. the vertical direction of a push button).
 .TP
-\fCQSizePolicy::Minimum\fR - The sizeHint() is minimal, and sufficient. The widget can be expanded, but there is no advantage to it being larger (e.g. the horizontal direction of a push button). It cannot be smaller than the size provided by sizeHint().
+\fCTQSizePolicy::Minimum\fR - The sizeHint() is minimal, and sufficient. The widget can be expanded, but there is no advantage to it being larger (e.g. the horizontal direction of a push button). It cannot be smaller than the size provided by sizeHint().
 .TP
-\fCQSizePolicy::Maximum\fR - The sizeHint() is a maximum. The widget can be shrunk any amount without detriment if other widgets need the space (e.g. a separator line). It cannot be larger than the size provided by sizeHint().
+\fCTQSizePolicy::Maximum\fR - The sizeHint() is a maximum. The widget can be shrunk any amount without detriment if other widgets need the space (e.g. a separator line). It cannot be larger than the size provided by sizeHint().
 .TP
-\fCQSizePolicy::Preferred\fR - The sizeHint() is best, but the widget can be shrunk and still be useful. The widget can be expanded, but there is no advantage to it being larger than sizeHint() (the default TQWidget policy).
+\fCTQSizePolicy::Preferred\fR - The sizeHint() is best, but the widget can be shrunk and still be useful. The widget can be expanded, but there is no advantage to it being larger than sizeHint() (the default TQWidget policy).
 .TP
-\fCQSizePolicy::Expanding\fR - The sizeHint() is a sensible size, but the widget can be shrunk and still be useful. The widget can make use of extra space, so it should get as much space as possible (e.g. the horizontal direction of a slider).
+\fCTQSizePolicy::Expanding\fR - The sizeHint() is a sensible size, but the widget can be shrunk and still be useful. The widget can make use of extra space, so it should get as much space as possible (e.g. the horizontal direction of a slider).
 .TP
-\fCQSizePolicy::MinimumExpanding\fR - The sizeHint() is minimal, and sufficient. The widget can make use of extra space, so it should get as much space as possible (e.g. the horizontal direction of a slider).
+\fCTQSizePolicy::MinimumExpanding\fR - The sizeHint() is minimal, and sufficient. The widget can make use of extra space, so it should get as much space as possible (e.g. the horizontal direction of a slider).
 .TP
-\fCQSizePolicy::Ignored\fR - the sizeHint() is ignored. The widget will get as much space as possible.
+\fCTQSizePolicy::Ignored\fR - the sizeHint() is ignored. The widget will get as much space as possible.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "QSizePolicy::QSizePolicy ()"
-Constructs a minimally initialized QSizePolicy.
-.SH "QSizePolicy::QSizePolicy ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE )"
+.SH "TQSizePolicy::TQSizePolicy ()"
+Constructs a minimally initialized TQSizePolicy.
+.SH "TQSizePolicy::TQSizePolicy ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE )"
 This is the constructor normally used to return a value in the overridden TQWidget::sizePolicy() function of a TQWidget subclass.
 .PP
-It constructs a QSizePolicy with independent horizontal and vertical sizing types, \fIhor\fR and \fIver\fR respectively. These sizing types affect how the widget is treated by the layout engine.
+It constructs a TQSizePolicy with independent horizontal and vertical sizing types, \fIhor\fR and \fIver\fR respectively. These sizing types affect how the widget is treated by the layout engine.
 .PP
 If \fIhfw\fR is TRUE, the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the width of the widget (for example, a QLabel with line wrapping).
 .PP
 See also horData(), verData(), and hasHeightForWidth().
-.SH "QSizePolicy::QSizePolicy ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, uchar horStretch, uchar verStretch, bool hfw = FALSE )"
-Constructs a QSizePolicy with independent horizontal and vertical sizing types \fIhor\fR and \fIver\fR, and stretch factors \fIhorStretch\fR and \fIverStretch\fR.
+.SH "TQSizePolicy::TQSizePolicy ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, uchar horStretch, uchar verStretch, bool hfw = FALSE )"
+Constructs a TQSizePolicy with independent horizontal and vertical sizing types \fIhor\fR and \fIver\fR, and stretch factors \fIhorStretch\fR and \fIverStretch\fR.
 .PP
 If \fIhfw\fR is TRUE, the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the width of the widget.
 .PP
 See also horStretch() and verStretch().
-.SH "ExpandData QSizePolicy::expanding () const"
+.SH "ExpandData TQSizePolicy::expanding () const"
 Returns whether this layout can make use of more space than sizeHint(). A value of Vertical or Horizontal means that it wants to grow in only one dimension, whereas BothDirections means that it wants to grow in both dimensions.
 .PP
 See also mayShrinkHorizontally(), mayGrowHorizontally(), mayShrinkVertically(), and mayGrowVertically().
-.SH "bool QSizePolicy::hasHeightForWidth () const"
+.SH "bool TQSizePolicy::hasHeightForWidth () const"
 Returns TRUE if the widget's preferred height depends on its width; otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 See also setHeightForWidth().
-.SH "SizeType QSizePolicy::horData () const"
+.SH "SizeType TQSizePolicy::horData () const"
 Returns the horizontal component of the size policy.
 .PP
 See also setHorData(), verData(), and horStretch().
-.SH "uint QSizePolicy::horStretch () const"
+.SH "uint TQSizePolicy::horStretch () const"
 Returns the horizontal stretch factor of the size policy.
 .PP
 See also setHorStretch() and verStretch().
-.SH "bool QSizePolicy::mayGrowHorizontally () const"
+.SH "bool TQSizePolicy::mayGrowHorizontally () const"
 Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be wider than its sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 See also mayGrowVertically() and mayShrinkHorizontally().
-.SH "bool QSizePolicy::mayGrowVertically () const"
+.SH "bool TQSizePolicy::mayGrowVertically () const"
 Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be taller than its sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 See also mayGrowHorizontally() and mayShrinkVertically().
-.SH "bool QSizePolicy::mayShrinkHorizontally () const"
+.SH "bool TQSizePolicy::mayShrinkHorizontally () const"
 Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be narrower than its sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 See also mayShrinkVertically() and mayGrowHorizontally().
-.SH "bool QSizePolicy::mayShrinkVertically () const"
+.SH "bool TQSizePolicy::mayShrinkVertically () const"
 Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be shorter than its sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 See also mayShrinkHorizontally() and mayGrowVertically().
-.SH "bool QSizePolicy::operator!= ( const QSizePolicy & s ) const"
+.SH "bool TQSizePolicy::operator!= ( const TQSizePolicy & s ) const"
 Returns TRUE if this policy is different from \fIs\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 See also operator==().
-.SH "bool QSizePolicy::operator== ( const QSizePolicy & s ) const"
+.SH "bool TQSizePolicy::operator== ( const TQSizePolicy & s ) const"
 Returns TRUE if this policy is equal to \fIs\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 See also operator!=().
-.SH "void QSizePolicy::setHeightForWidth ( bool b )"
+.SH "void TQSizePolicy::setHeightForWidth ( bool b )"
 Sets the hasHeightForWidth() flag to \fIb\fR.
 .PP
 See also hasHeightForWidth().
-.SH "void QSizePolicy::setHorData ( SizeType d )"
+.SH "void TQSizePolicy::setHorData ( SizeType d )"
 Sets the horizontal component of the size policy to size type \fId\fR.
 .PP
 See also horData() and setVerData().
-.SH "void QSizePolicy::setHorStretch ( uchar sf )"
+.SH "void TQSizePolicy::setHorStretch ( uchar sf )"
 Sets the horizontal stretch factor of the size policy to \fIsf\fR.
 .PP
 See also horStretch() and setVerStretch().
-.SH "void QSizePolicy::setVerData ( SizeType d )"
+.SH "void TQSizePolicy::setVerData ( SizeType d )"
 Sets the vertical component of the size policy to size type \fId\fR.
 .PP
 See also verData() and setHorData().
-.SH "void QSizePolicy::setVerStretch ( uchar sf )"
+.SH "void TQSizePolicy::setVerStretch ( uchar sf )"
 Sets the vertical stretch factor of the size policy to \fIsf\fR.
 .PP
 See also verStretch() and setHorStretch().
-.SH "void QSizePolicy::transpose ()"
+.SH "void TQSizePolicy::transpose ()"
 Swaps the horizontal and vertical policies and stretches.
-.SH "SizeType QSizePolicy::verData () const"
+.SH "SizeType TQSizePolicy::verData () const"
 Returns the vertical component of the size policy.
 .PP
 See also setVerData(), horData(), and verStretch().
-.SH "uint QSizePolicy::verStretch () const"
+.SH "uint TQSizePolicy::verStretch () const"
 Returns the vertical stretch factor of the size policy.
 .PP
 See also setVerStretch() and horStretch().
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqsizepolicy.html
+.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqsizepolicy.html
 .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html
 .SH COPYRIGHT
 Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com.  See the
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqspaceritem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqspaceritem.3qt
index 889b76260..c0d0da43e 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqspaceritem.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqspaceritem.3qt
@@ -16,22 +16,22 @@ Inherits QLayoutItem.
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQSpacerItem\fR ( int w, int h, QSizePolicy::SizeType hData = QSizePolicy::Minimum, QSizePolicy::SizeType vData = QSizePolicy::Minimum )"
+.BI "\fBQSpacerItem\fR ( int w, int h, TQSizePolicy::SizeType hData = TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::SizeType vData = TQSizePolicy::Minimum )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBchangeSize\fR ( int w, int h, QSizePolicy::SizeType hData = QSizePolicy::Minimum, QSizePolicy::SizeType vData = QSizePolicy::Minimum )"
+.BI "void \fBchangeSize\fR ( int w, int h, TQSizePolicy::SizeType hData = TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::SizeType vData = TQSizePolicy::Minimum )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBminimumSize\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBminimumSize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBmaximumSize\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBmaximumSize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSizePolicy::ExpandData \fBexpanding\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSizePolicy::ExpandData \fBexpanding\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual bool \fBisEmpty\fR () const"
@@ -47,29 +47,29 @@ This class is used by custom layouts.
 .PP
 See also QLayout, QLayout::spacerItem(), Widget Appearance and Style, and Layout Management.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "QSpacerItem::QSpacerItem ( int w, int h, QSizePolicy::SizeType hData = QSizePolicy::Minimum, QSizePolicy::SizeType vData = QSizePolicy::Minimum )"
+.SH "QSpacerItem::QSpacerItem ( int w, int h, TQSizePolicy::SizeType hData = TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::SizeType vData = TQSizePolicy::Minimum )"
 Constructs a spacer item with preferred width \fIw\fR, preferred height \fIh\fR, horizontal size policy \fIhData\fR and vertical size policy \fIvData\fR.
 .PP
 The default values provide a gap that is able to stretch if nothing else wants the space.
-.SH "void QSpacerItem::changeSize ( int w, int h, QSizePolicy::SizeType hData = QSizePolicy::Minimum, QSizePolicy::SizeType vData = QSizePolicy::Minimum )"
+.SH "void QSpacerItem::changeSize ( int w, int h, TQSizePolicy::SizeType hData = TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::SizeType vData = TQSizePolicy::Minimum )"
 Changes this spacer item to have preferred width \fIw\fR, preferred height \fIh\fR, horizontal size policy \fIhData\fR and vertical size policy \fIvData\fR.
 .PP
 The default values provide a gap that is able to stretch if nothing else wants the space.
-.SH "QSizePolicy::ExpandData QSpacerItem::expanding () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSizePolicy::ExpandData QSpacerItem::expanding () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the direction in which this spacer item will expand.
 .PP
-See also QSizePolicy::ExpandData.
+See also TQSizePolicy::ExpandData.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayoutItem.
 .SH "bool QSpacerItem::isEmpty () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns TRUE because a spacer item never contains widgets.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayoutItem.
-.SH "QSize QSpacerItem::maximumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize QSpacerItem::maximumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the maximum size of this spacer item.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayoutItem.
-.SH "QSize QSpacerItem::minimumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize QSpacerItem::minimumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the minimum size of this spacer item.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayoutItem.
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Reimplemented from QLayoutItem.
 Stores the spacer item's rect \fIr\fR so that it can be returned by geometry().
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayoutItem.
-.SH "QSize QSpacerItem::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize QSpacerItem::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the preferred size of this spacer item.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayoutItem.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsplashscreen.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsplashscreen.3qt
index 870064588..7e74f8f90 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsplashscreen.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsplashscreen.3qt
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ The most common usage is to show a splash screen before the main widget is displ
 .br
        splash->show();
 .br
-       QMainWindow *mainWin = new QMainWindow;
+       TQMainWindow *mainWin = new TQMainWindow;
 .br
        ...
 .br
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqstatusbar.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqstatusbar.3qt
index 1e0cc38c7..5b9035155 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqstatusbar.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqstatusbar.3qt
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 '\" t
-.TH QStatusBar 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
+.TH TQStatusBar 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
 .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.  See the
 .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license
 .\" statement.
@@ -7,19 +7,19 @@
 .ad l
 .nh
 .SH NAME
-QStatusBar \- Horizontal bar suitable for presenting status information
+TQStatusBar \- Horizontal bar suitable for presenting status information
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fC#include <ntqstatusbar.h>\fR
+\fC#include <tqstatusbar.h>\fR
 .PP
 Inherits TQWidget.
 .PP
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQStatusBar\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQStatusBar\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual \fB~QStatusBar\fR ()"
+.BI "virtual \fB~TQStatusBar\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBaddWidget\fR ( TQWidget * widget, int stretch = 0, bool permanent = FALSE )"
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ Inherits TQWidget.
 .SS "Properties"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "bool \fBsizeGripEnabled\fR - whether the QSizeGrip in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled"
+.BI "bool \fBsizeGripEnabled\fR - whether the TQSizeGrip in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SS "Protected Members"
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Inherits TQWidget.
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The QStatusBar class provides a horizontal bar suitable for presenting status information.
+The TQStatusBar class provides a horizontal bar suitable for presenting status information.
 .PP
 Each status indicator falls into one of three categories:
 .TP
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Each status indicator falls into one of three categories:
 .TP
 \fIPermanent\fR - is never hidden. Used for important mode indications, for example, some applications put a Caps Lock indicator in the status bar.
 .PP
-QStatusBar lets you display all three types of indicators.
+TQStatusBar lets you display all three types of indicators.
 .PP
 To display a \fItemporary\fR message, call message() (perhaps by connecting a suitable signal to it). To remove a temporary message, call clear(). There are two variants of message(): one that displays the message until the next clear() or message() and one that has a time limit:
 .PP
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ To display a \fItemporary\fR message, call message() (perhaps by connecting a su
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-\fINormal\fR and \fIPermanent\fR messages are displayed by creating a small widget and then adding it to the status bar with addWidget(). Widgets like QLabel, QProgressBar or even QToolButton are useful for adding to status bars. removeWidget() is used to remove widgets.
+\fINormal\fR and \fIPermanent\fR messages are displayed by creating a small widget and then adding it to the status bar with addWidget(). Widgets like QLabel, QProgressBar or even TQToolButton are useful for adding to status bars. removeWidget() is used to remove widgets.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ To display a \fItemporary\fR message, call message() (perhaps by connecting a su
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-By default QStatusBar provides a QSizeGrip in the lower-right corner. You can disable it with setSizeGripEnabled(FALSE);
+By default TQStatusBar provides a TQSizeGrip in the lower-right corner. You can disable it with setSizeGripEnabled(FALSE);
 .PP
 .ce 1
 .B "[Image Omitted]"
@@ -117,16 +117,16 @@ By default QStatusBar provides a QSizeGrip in the lower-right corner. You can di
 .ce 1
 .B "[Image Omitted]"
 .PP
-See also QToolBar, QMainWindow, QLabel, GUI Design Handbook: Status Bar, Main Window and Related Classes, and Help System.
+See also TQToolBar, TQMainWindow, QLabel, GUI Design Handbook: Status Bar, Main Window and Related Classes, and Help System.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "QStatusBar::QStatusBar ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
+.SH "TQStatusBar::TQStatusBar ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
 Constructs a status bar called \fIname\fR with parent \fIparent\fR and with a size grip.
 .PP
 See also sizeGripEnabled.
-.SH "QStatusBar::~QStatusBar ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQStatusBar::~TQStatusBar ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Destroys the status bar and frees any allocated resources and child widgets.
-.SH "void QStatusBar::addWidget ( TQWidget * widget, int stretch = 0, bool permanent = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Adds \fIwidget\fR to this status bar. \fIwidget\fR is reparented if it isn't already a child of the QStatusBar.
+.SH "void TQStatusBar::addWidget ( TQWidget * widget, int stretch = 0, bool permanent = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+Adds \fIwidget\fR to this status bar. \fIwidget\fR is reparented if it isn't already a child of the TQStatusBar.
 .PP
 \fIwidget\fR is permanently visible if \fIpermanent\fR is TRUE and may be obscured by temporary messages if \fIpermanent\fR is FALSE. The default is FALSE.
 .PP
@@ -137,35 +137,35 @@ If \fIpermanent\fR is TRUE, \fIwidget\fR is located at the far right of the stat
 This function may cause some flicker.
 .PP
 See also removeWidget().
-.SH "void QStatusBar::clear ()\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQStatusBar::clear ()\fC [slot]\fR"
 Removes any temporary message being shown.
 .PP
 See also message().
-.SH "void QStatusBar::hideOrShow ()\fC [protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQStatusBar::hideOrShow ()\fC [protected]\fR"
 Ensures that the right widgets are visible. Used by message() and clear().
-.SH "bool QStatusBar::isSizeGripEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the QSizeGrip in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "sizeGripEnabled" property for details.
-.SH "void QStatusBar::message ( const TQString & message )\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "bool TQStatusBar::isSizeGripEnabled () const"
+Returns TRUE if the TQSizeGrip in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "sizeGripEnabled" property for details.
+.SH "void TQStatusBar::message ( const TQString & message )\fC [slot]\fR"
 Hides the normal status indicators and displays \fImessage\fR until clear() or another message() is called.
 .PP
 See also clear().
 .PP
 Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
-.SH "void QStatusBar::message ( const TQString & message, int ms )\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQStatusBar::message ( const TQString & message, int ms )\fC [slot]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Hides the normal status indications and displays \fImessage\fR for \fIms\fR milli-seconds or until clear() or another message() is called, whichever occurs first.
-.SH "void QStatusBar::messageChanged ( const TQString & message )\fC [signal]\fR"
+.SH "void TQStatusBar::messageChanged ( const TQString & message )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when the temporary status messages changes. \fImessage\fR is the new temporary message, and is a null-string when the message has been removed.
 .PP
 See also message() and clear().
-.SH "void QStatusBar::paintEvent ( QPaintEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQStatusBar::paintEvent ( QPaintEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Shows the temporary message, if appropriate.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQWidget.
-.SH "void QStatusBar::reformat ()\fC [protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQStatusBar::reformat ()\fC [protected]\fR"
 Changes the status bar's appearance to account for item changes. Special subclasses may need this, but geometry management will usually take care of any necessary rearrangements.
-.SH "void QStatusBar::removeWidget ( TQWidget * widget )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQStatusBar::removeWidget ( TQWidget * widget )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Removes \fIwidget\fR from the status bar.
 .PP
 This function may cause some flicker.
@@ -173,18 +173,18 @@ This function may cause some flicker.
 Note that \fIwidget\fR is not deleted.
 .PP
 See also addWidget().
-.SH "void QStatusBar::setSizeGripEnabled ( bool )"
-Sets whether the QSizeGrip in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled. See the "sizeGripEnabled" property for details.
+.SH "void TQStatusBar::setSizeGripEnabled ( bool )"
+Sets whether the TQSizeGrip in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled. See the "sizeGripEnabled" property for details.
 .SS "Property Documentation"
 .SH "bool sizeGripEnabled"
-This property holds whether the QSizeGrip in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled.
+This property holds whether the TQSizeGrip in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled.
 .PP
-Enables or disables the QSizeGrip in the bottom right of the status bar. By default, the size grip is enabled.
+Enables or disables the TQSizeGrip in the bottom right of the status bar. By default, the size grip is enabled.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setSizeGripEnabled() and get this property's value with isSizeGripEnabled().
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqstatusbar.html
+.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqstatusbar.html
 .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html
 .SH COPYRIGHT
 Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com.  See the
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqstyle.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqstyle.3qt
index d975ad6f0..1204c089c 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqstyle.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqstyle.3qt
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ Inherited by QCommonStyle.
 .BI "virtual void \fBpolish\fR ( QPalette & )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBpolishPopupMenu\fR ( QPopupMenu * ) = 0"
+.BI "virtual void \fBpolishPopupMenu\fR ( TQPopupMenu * ) = 0"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual QRect \fBitemRect\fR ( QPainter * p, const QRect & r, int flags, bool enabled, const QPixmap * pixmap, const TQString & text, int len = -1 ) const"
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Inherited by QCommonStyle.
 .BI "enum \fBContentsType\fR { CT_PushButton, CT_CheckBox, CT_RadioButton, CT_ToolButton, CT_ComboBox, CT_Splitter, CT_DockWindow, CT_ProgressBar, CT_PopupMenuItem, CT_TabBarTab, CT_Slider, CT_Header, CT_LineEdit, CT_MenuBar, CT_SpinBox, CT_SizeGrip, CT_TabWidget, CT_DialogButtons, CT_CustomBase = 0xf0000000 }"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBsizeFromContents\fR ( ContentsType contents, const TQWidget * widget, const QSize & contentsSize, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const = 0"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBsizeFromContents\fR ( ContentsType contents, const TQWidget * widget, const TQSize & contentsSize, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const = 0"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "enum \fBStyleHint\fR { SH_EtchDisabledText, SH_GUIStyle, SH_ScrollBar_BackgroundMode, SH_ScrollBar_MiddleClickAbsolutePosition, SH_ScrollBar_ScrollWhenPointerLeavesControl, SH_TabBar_SelectMouseType, SH_TabBar_Alignment, SH_Header_ArrowAlignment, SH_Slider_SnapToValue, SH_Slider_SloppyKeyEvents, SH_ProgressDialog_CenterCancelButton, SH_ProgressDialog_TextLabelAlignment, SH_PrintDialog_RightAlignButtons, SH_MainWindow_SpaceBelowMenuBar, SH_FontDialog_SelectAssociatedText, SH_PopupMenu_AllowActiveAndDisabled, SH_PopupMenu_SpaceActivatesItem, SH_PopupMenu_SubMenuPopupDelay, SH_ScrollView_FrameOnlyAroundContents, SH_MenuBar_AltKeyNavigation, SH_ComboBox_ListMouseTracking, SH_PopupMenu_MouseTracking, SH_MenuBar_MouseTracking, SH_ItemView_ChangeHighlightOnFocus, SH_Widget_ShareActivation, SH_Workspace_FillSpaceOnMaximize, SH_ComboBox_Popup, SH_TitleBar_NoBorder, SH_ScrollBar_StopMouseOverSlider, SH_BlinkCursorWhenTextSelected, SH_RichText_FullWidthSelection, SH_PopupMenu_Scrollable, SH_GroupBox_TextLabelVerticalAlignment, SH_GroupBox_TextLabelColor, SH_PopupMenu_SloppySubMenus, SH_Table_GridLineColor, SH_LineEdit_PasswordCharacter, SH_DialogButtons_DefaultButton, SH_ToolBox_SelectedPageTitleBold, SH_TabBar_PreferNoArrows, SH_ScrollBar_LeftClickAbsolutePosition, SH_ListViewExpand_SelectMouseType, SH_UnderlineAccelerator, SH_ToolButton_Uses3D, SH_CustomBase = 0xf0000000 }"
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Inherited by QCommonStyle.
 .BI "void tabbarMetrics ( const TQWidget * t, int & hf, int & vf, int & ov ) const  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize scrollBarExtent () const  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
+.BI "TQSize scrollBarExtent () const  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SS "Static Public Members"
@@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ This enum represents a ControlElement. A ControlElement is part of a widget that
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::CE_ProgressBarLabel\fR - the text label of a QProgressBar.
 .TP
-\fCTQStyle::CE_PopupMenuItem\fR - a menu item in a QPopupMenu.
+\fCTQStyle::CE_PopupMenuItem\fR - a menu item in a TQPopupMenu.
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::CE_PopupMenuScroller\fR - scrolling areas in a popumenu when the style supports scrolling.
 .TP
@@ -250,11 +250,11 @@ This enum represents a ControlElement. A ControlElement is part of a widget that
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::CE_PopupMenuVerticalExtra\fR - extra frame area set aside with PM_PopupMenuFrameVerticalExtra
 .TP
-\fCTQStyle::CE_MenuBarItem\fR - a menu item in a QMenuBar.
+\fCTQStyle::CE_MenuBarItem\fR - a menu item in a TQMenuBar.
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::CE_ToolButtonLabel\fR - a tool button's label.
 .TP
-\fCTQStyle::CE_MenuBarEmptyArea\fR - the empty area of a QMenuBar.
+\fCTQStyle::CE_MenuBarEmptyArea\fR - the empty area of a TQMenuBar.
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::CE_DockWindowEmptyArea\fR - the empty area of a QDockWindow.
 .TP
@@ -380,9 +380,9 @@ This enum represents the PrimitiveElements of a style. A PrimitiveElement is a c
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::PE_ButtonBevel\fR - generic button bevel.
 .TP
-\fCTQStyle::PE_ButtonTool\fR - tool button, for example, a QToolButton.
+\fCTQStyle::PE_ButtonTool\fR - tool button, for example, a TQToolButton.
 .TP
-\fCTQStyle::PE_ButtonDropDown\fR - drop down button, for example, a tool button that displays a popup menu, for example, QPopupMenu.
+\fCTQStyle::PE_ButtonDropDown\fR - drop down button, for example, a tool button that displays a popup menu, for example, TQPopupMenu.
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::PE_FocusRect\fR - generic focus indicator.
 .TP
@@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ This enum represents the PrimitiveElements of a style. A PrimitiveElement is a c
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::PE_ExclusiveIndicatorMask\fR - bitmap mask for an exclusive indicator.
 .TP
-\fCTQStyle::PE_DockWindowHandle\fR - tear off handle for dock windows and toolbars, for example QDockWindows and QToolBars.
+\fCTQStyle::PE_DockWindowHandle\fR - tear off handle for dock windows and toolbars, for example QDockWindows and TQToolBars.
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::PE_DockWindowSeparator\fR - item separator for dock window and toolbar contents.
 .TP
@@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ This enum represents the PrimitiveElements of a style. A PrimitiveElement is a c
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::PE_Panel\fR - generic panel frame; see also QFrame.
 .TP
-\fCTQStyle::PE_PanelPopup\fR - panel frame for popup windows/menus; see also QPopupMenu.
+\fCTQStyle::PE_PanelPopup\fR - panel frame for popup windows/menus; see also TQPopupMenu.
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::PE_PanelMenuBar\fR - panel frame for menu bars.
 .TP
@@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ This enum represents the PrimitiveElements of a style. A PrimitiveElement is a c
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::PE_HeaderArrow\fR - arrow used to indicate sorting on a list or table header
 .TP
-\fCTQStyle::PE_StatusBarSection\fR - section of a status bar; see also QStatusBar.
+\fCTQStyle::PE_StatusBarSection\fR - section of a status bar; see also TQStatusBar.
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::PE_GroupBoxFrame\fR - frame around a group box; see also QGroupBox.
 .TP
@@ -446,7 +446,7 @@ This enum represents the PrimitiveElements of a style. A PrimitiveElement is a c
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::PE_Separator\fR - generic separator.
 .TP
-\fCTQStyle::PE_SizeGrip\fR - window resize handle; see also QSizeGrip.
+\fCTQStyle::PE_SizeGrip\fR - window resize handle; see also TQSizeGrip.
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::PE_CheckMark\fR - generic check mark; see also QCheckBox.
 .TP
@@ -604,9 +604,9 @@ This enum represents a StyleHint. A StyleHint is a general look and/or feel hint
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::SH_CustomBase\fR - base value for custom ControlElements. All values above this are reserved for custom use. Therefore, custom values must be greater than this value.
 .TP
-\fCTQStyle::SH_ToolButton_Uses3D\fR - indicates whether QToolButtons should use a 3D frame when the mouse is over them
+\fCTQStyle::SH_ToolButton_Uses3D\fR - indicates whether TQToolButtons should use a 3D frame when the mouse is over them
 .TP
-\fCTQStyle::SH_ToolBox_SelectedPageTitleBold\fR - Boldness of the selected page title in a QToolBox.
+\fCTQStyle::SH_ToolBox_SelectedPageTitleBold\fR - Boldness of the selected page title in a TQToolBox.
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::SH_LineEdit_PasswordCharacter\fR - The TQChar Unicode character to be used for passwords.
 .TP
@@ -618,7 +618,7 @@ See also styleHint().
 .SH "TQStyle::StylePixmap"
 This enum represents a StylePixmap. A StylePixmap is a pixmap that can follow some existing GUI style or guideline.
 .TP
-\fCTQStyle::SP_TitleBarMinButton\fR - minimize button on titlebars. For example, in a QWorkspace.
+\fCTQStyle::SP_TitleBarMinButton\fR - minimize button on titlebars. For example, in a TQWorkspace.
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::SP_TitleBarMaxButton\fR - maximize button on titlebars.
 .TP
@@ -688,9 +688,9 @@ This enum represents a SubControl within a ComplexControl.
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::SC_SliderTickmarks\fR - slider tickmarks.
 .TP
-\fCTQStyle::SC_ToolButton\fR - tool button; see also QToolbutton.
+\fCTQStyle::SC_ToolButton\fR - tool button; see also TQToolbutton.
 .TP
-\fCTQStyle::SC_ToolButtonMenu\fR - subcontrol for opening a popup menu in a tool button; see also QPopupMenu.
+\fCTQStyle::SC_ToolButtonMenu\fR - subcontrol for opening a popup menu in a tool button; see also TQPopupMenu.
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::SC_TitleBarSysMenu\fR - system menu button (i.e. restore, close, etc.).
 .TP
@@ -793,7 +793,7 @@ The \fIwidget\fR argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its subclasses. T
 .TS
 l - l. ComplexControl
 .br
-& Widget Cast Style Flags Notes Options Notes CC_SpinWidget(const QSpinWidget *) Style_Enabled Set if the spinwidget is enabled. Unused. Style_HasFocus Set if the spinwidget has input focus. CC_ComboBox(const QComboBox *) Style_Enabled Set if the combobox is enabled. Unused. Style_HasFocus Set if the combobox has input focus. CC_ScrollBar(const QScrollBar *) Style_Enabled Set if the scrollbar is enabled. Unused. Style_HasFocus Set if the scrollbar has input focus. CC_Slider(const QSlider *) Style_Enabled Set if the slider is enabled. Unused. Style_HasFocus Set if the slider has input focus. CC_ToolButton(const QToolButton *) Style_Enabled Set if the toolbutton is enabled. TQStyleOption ( ArrowType t )
+& Widget Cast Style Flags Notes Options Notes CC_SpinWidget(const QSpinWidget *) Style_Enabled Set if the spinwidget is enabled. Unused. Style_HasFocus Set if the spinwidget has input focus. CC_ComboBox(const QComboBox *) Style_Enabled Set if the combobox is enabled. Unused. Style_HasFocus Set if the combobox has input focus. CC_ScrollBar(const QScrollBar *) Style_Enabled Set if the scrollbar is enabled. Unused. Style_HasFocus Set if the scrollbar has input focus. CC_Slider(const QSlider *) Style_Enabled Set if the slider is enabled. Unused. Style_HasFocus Set if the slider has input focus. CC_ToolButton(const TQToolButton *) Style_Enabled Set if the toolbutton is enabled. TQStyleOption ( ArrowType t )
 .TP
 opt.arrowType() When the tool button only contains an arrow, \fIt\fR is the arrow's type. Style_HasFocus Set if the toolbutton has input focus. Style_Down Set if the toolbutton is down (ie. mouse button or space pressed). Style_On Set if the toolbutton is a toggle button and is toggled on. Style_AutoRaise Set if the toolbutton has auto-raise enabled. Style_Raised Set if the button is not down, not on and doesn't contain the mouse when auto-raise is enabled. CC_TitleBar(const TQWidget *) Style_Enabled Set if the titlebar is enabled. Unused. CC_ListView(const QListView *) Style_Enabled Set if the titlebar is enabled. TQStyleOption ( QListViewItem *item )
 .TP
@@ -853,15 +853,15 @@ and
 .PP
 CE_ProgressBarLabel(const QProgressBar *)
 .PP	Style_Enabled	Set if the progressbar is enabled.	Unused.
-Style_HasFocus Set if the progressbar has input focus. CE_PopupMenuItem(const QPopupMenu *) Style_Enabled Set if the menuitem is enabled. TQStyleOption ( QMenuItem *mi, int tabwidth, int maxpmwidth )
+Style_HasFocus Set if the progressbar has input focus. CE_PopupMenuItem(const TQPopupMenu *) Style_Enabled Set if the menuitem is enabled. TQStyleOption ( TQMenuItem *mi, int tabwidth, int maxpmwidth )
 .TP
 opt.menuItem()
 .TP
 opt.tabWidth()
 .TP
-opt.maxIconWidth() \fImi\fR is the menu item being drawn. QMenuItem is currently an internal class. Style_Active Set if the menuitem is the current item. \fItabwidth\fR is the width of the tab column where key accelerators are drawn. Style_Down Set if the menuitem is down (i.e., the mouse button or space bar is pressed). \fImaxpmwidth\fR is the maximum width of the check column where checkmarks and iconsets are drawn. CE_MenuBarItem(const QMenuBar *) Style_Enabled Set if the menuitem is enabled TQStyleOption ( QMenuItem *mi )
+opt.maxIconWidth() \fImi\fR is the menu item being drawn. TQMenuItem is currently an internal class. Style_Active Set if the menuitem is the current item. \fItabwidth\fR is the width of the tab column where key accelerators are drawn. Style_Down Set if the menuitem is down (i.e., the mouse button or space bar is pressed). \fImaxpmwidth\fR is the maximum width of the check column where checkmarks and iconsets are drawn. CE_MenuBarItem(const TQMenuBar *) Style_Enabled Set if the menuitem is enabled TQStyleOption ( TQMenuItem *mi )
 .TP
-opt.menuItem() \fImi\fR is the menu item being drawn. Style_Active Set if the menuitem is the current item. Style_Down Set if the menuitem is down (i.e., a mouse button or the space bar is pressed). Style_HasFocus Set if the menubar has input focus. CE_ToolButtonLabel(const QToolButton *) Style_Enabled Set if the toolbutton is enabled. TQStyleOption ( ArrowType t )
+opt.menuItem() \fImi\fR is the menu item being drawn. Style_Active Set if the menuitem is the current item. Style_Down Set if the menuitem is down (i.e., a mouse button or the space bar is pressed). Style_HasFocus Set if the menubar has input focus. CE_ToolButtonLabel(const TQToolButton *) Style_Enabled Set if the toolbutton is enabled. TQStyleOption ( ArrowType t )
 .TP
 opt.arrowType() When the tool button only contains an arrow, \fIt\fR is the arrow's type. Style_HasFocus Set if the toolbutton has input focus. Style_Down Set if the toolbutton is down (i.e., a mouse button or the space is pressed). Style_On Set if the toolbutton is a toggle button and is toggled on. Style_AutoRaise Set if the toolbutton has auto-raise enabled. Style_MouseOver Set if the mouse pointer is over the toolbutton. Style_Raised
 .TE
@@ -965,8 +965,8 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 The style may have certain requirements for color palettes. In this function it has the chance to change the palette according to these requirements.
 .PP
 See also QPalette and QApplication::setPalette().
-.SH "void TQStyle::polishPopupMenu ( QPopupMenu * )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
-Polishes the popup menu according to the GUI style. This usually means setting the mouse tracking (QPopupMenu::setMouseTracking()) and whether the menu is checkable by default (QPopupMenu::setCheckable()).
+.SH "void TQStyle::polishPopupMenu ( TQPopupMenu * )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
+Polishes the popup menu according to the GUI style. This usually means setting the mouse tracking (TQPopupMenu::setMouseTracking()) and whether the menu is checkable by default (TQPopupMenu::setCheckable()).
 .SH "SubControl TQStyle::querySubControl ( ComplexControl control, const TQWidget * widget, const QPoint & pos, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 Returns the SubControl for \fIwidget\fR at the point \fIpos\fR. The \fIwidget\fR argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its subclasses. The widget can be cast to the appropriate type based on the value of \fIcontrol\fR. The \fIopt\fR argument can be used to pass extra information required when drawing the ComplexControl. Note that \fIopt\fR may be the default value even for ComplexControls that can make use of the extra options. See drawComplexControl() for an explanation of the \fIwidget\fR and \fIopt\fR arguments.
 .PP
@@ -979,16 +979,16 @@ Returns the rect for the SubControl \fIsubcontrol\fR for \fIwidget\fR in logical
 The \fIwidget\fR argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its subclasses. The widget can be cast to the appropriate type based on the value of \fIcontrol\fR. The \fIopt\fR argument can be used to pass extra information required when drawing the ComplexControl. Note that \fIopt\fR may be the default value even for ComplexControls that can make use of the extra options. See drawComplexControl() for an explanation of the \fIwidget\fR and \fIopt\fR arguments.
 .PP
 See also drawComplexControl(), ComplexControl, and SubControl.
-.SH "QSize TQStyle::scrollBarExtent () const"
+.SH "TQSize TQStyle::scrollBarExtent () const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-.SH "QSize TQStyle::sizeFromContents ( ContentsType contents, const TQWidget * widget, const QSize & contentsSize, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize TQStyle::sizeFromContents ( ContentsType contents, const TQWidget * widget, const TQSize & contentsSize, const TQStyleOption & opt = TQStyleOption::Default ) const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 Returns the size of \fIwidget\fR based on the contents size \fIcontentsSize\fR.
 .PP
 The \fIwidget\fR argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its subclasses. The widget can be cast to the appropriate type based on the value of \fIcontents\fR. The \fIopt\fR argument can be used to pass extra information required when calculating the size. Note that \fIopt\fR may be the default value even for ContentsTypes that can make use of the extra options. See the table below for the appropriate \fIwidget\fR and \fIopt\fR usage:
 .PP
 <center>.nf
 .TS
-l - l. ContentsType Widget Cast Options Notes CT_PushButton (const QPushButton *) Unused. CT_CheckBox (const QCheckBox *) Unused. CT_RadioButton (const QRadioButton *) Unused. CT_ToolButton (const QToolButton *) Unused. CT_ComboBox (const QComboBox *) Unused. CT_Splitter (const QSplitter *) Unused. CT_DockWindow (const QDockWindow *) Unused. CT_ProgressBar (const QProgressBar *) Unused. CT_PopupMenuItem (const QPopupMenu *) TQStyleOption ( QMenuItem *mi )
+l - l. ContentsType Widget Cast Options Notes CT_PushButton (const QPushButton *) Unused. CT_CheckBox (const QCheckBox *) Unused. CT_RadioButton (const QRadioButton *) Unused. CT_ToolButton (const TQToolButton *) Unused. CT_ComboBox (const QComboBox *) Unused. CT_Splitter (const QSplitter *) Unused. CT_DockWindow (const QDockWindow *) Unused. CT_ProgressBar (const QProgressBar *) Unused. CT_PopupMenuItem (const TQPopupMenu *) TQStyleOption ( TQMenuItem *mi )
 .TP
 opt.menuItem()
 .TE
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqstyleoption.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqstyleoption.3qt
index 1fa3764cc..05964ac21 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqstyleoption.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqstyleoption.3qt
@@ -29,13 +29,13 @@ TQStyleOption \- Optional parameters for TQStyle functions
 .BI "\fBTQStyleOption\fR ( int in1, int in2, int in3, int in4 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQStyleOption\fR ( QMenuItem * m )"
+.BI "\fBTQStyleOption\fR ( TQMenuItem * m )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQStyleOption\fR ( QMenuItem * m, int in1 )"
+.BI "\fBTQStyleOption\fR ( TQMenuItem * m, int in1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQStyleOption\fR ( QMenuItem * m, int in1, int in2 )"
+.BI "\fBTQStyleOption\fR ( TQMenuItem * m, int in1, int in2 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fBTQStyleOption\fR ( const TQColor & c )"
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ TQStyleOption \- Optional parameters for TQStyle functions
 .BI "int \fBheaderSection\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QMenuItem * \fBmenuItem\fR () const"
+.BI "TQMenuItem * \fBmenuItem\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBmaxIconWidth\fR () const"
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ The TQStyleOption class has constructors for each type of optional argument, and
 .PP
 For each constructor, you should refer to the documentation of the TQStyle functions to see the meaning of the arguments.
 .PP
-When calling TQStyle functions from your own widgets, you must only pass the default TQStyleOption or the argument that TQStyle is documented to accept. For example, if the function expects TQStyleOption(QMenuItem *, int), passing TQStyleOption(QMenuItem *) leaves the optional integer argument uninitialized.
+When calling TQStyle functions from your own widgets, you must only pass the default TQStyleOption or the argument that TQStyle is documented to accept. For example, if the function expects TQStyleOption(TQMenuItem *, int), passing TQStyleOption(TQMenuItem *) leaves the optional integer argument uninitialized.
 .PP
 When subclassing TQStyle, you must similarly only expect the default or documented arguments. The other arguments will have uninitialized values.
 .PP
@@ -140,11 +140,11 @@ Pass one integer, \fIin1\fR. For example, headerSection.
 Pass two integers, \fIin1\fR and \fIin2\fR. For example, linewidth and midlinewidth.
 .SH "TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( int in1, int in2, int in3, int in4 )"
 Pass four integers, \fIin1\fR, \fIin2\fR, \fIin3\fR and \fIin4\fR.
-.SH "TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( QMenuItem * m )"
+.SH "TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( TQMenuItem * m )"
 Pass a menu item, \fIm\fR.
-.SH "TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( QMenuItem * m, int in1 )"
+.SH "TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( TQMenuItem * m, int in1 )"
 Pass a menu item and an integer, \fIm\fR and \fIin1\fR.
-.SH "TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( QMenuItem * m, int in1, int in2 )"
+.SH "TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( TQMenuItem * m, int in1, int in2 )"
 Pass a menu item and two integers, \fIm\fR, \fIin1\fR and \fIin2\fR.
 .SH "TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( const TQColor & c )"
 Pass a color, \fIc\fR.
@@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Returns the line width if the appropriate constructor was called; otherwise the
 Returns a QListView item if the appropriate constructor was called; otherwise the return value is undefined.
 .SH "int TQStyleOption::maxIconWidth () const"
 Returns the maximum width of the menu item check area if the appropriate constructor was called; otherwise the return value is undefined.
-.SH "QMenuItem * TQStyleOption::menuItem () const"
+.SH "TQMenuItem * TQStyleOption::menuItem () const"
 Returns a menu item if the appropriate constructor was called; otherwise the return value is undefined.
 .SH "int TQStyleOption::midLineWidth () const"
 Returns the mid-line width if the appropriate constructor was called; otherwise the return value is undefined.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqt.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqt.3qt
index d82f7113b..00de5aa67 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqt.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqt.3qt
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Qt \- Namespace for miscellaneous identifiers that need to be global-like
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 \fC#include <ntqnamespace.h>\fR
 .PP
-Inherited by TQObject, QPixmap, QBrush, TQCanvasItem, QCursor, QPainter, QEvent, TQIconViewItem, QKeySequence, QListViewItem, QCustomMenuItem, QPen, TQStyleSheetItem, QSyntaxHighlighter, QTab, QTableItem, TQThread, QToolTip, and QWhatsThis.
+Inherited by TQObject, QPixmap, QBrush, TQCanvasItem, QCursor, QPainter, QEvent, TQIconViewItem, QKeySequence, QListViewItem, QCustomMenuItem, QPen, TQStyleSheetItem, QSyntaxHighlighter, QTab, QTableItem, TQThread, TQToolTip, and QWhatsThis.
 .PP
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
@@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ Each dock window can be in one of the following positions:
 .TP
 \fCQt::DockTornOff\fR - the dock window floats as its own top level window which always stays on top of the main window.
 .TP
-\fCQt::DockUnmanaged\fR - not managed by a QMainWindow.
+\fCQt::DockUnmanaged\fR - not managed by a TQMainWindow.
 .SH "TQt::GUIStyle"
 \fBThis type is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .TP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtableitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtableitem.3qt
index c6d85cbd7..481d45a26 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtableitem.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtableitem.3qt
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Inherited by QComboTableItem and QCheckTableItem.
 .BI "virtual TQString \fBkey\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetSpan\fR ( int rs, int cs )"
@@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ Example: table/statistics/statistics.cpp.
 If \fIb\fR is TRUE, the cell's text will be wrapped over multiple lines, when necessary, to fit the width of the cell; otherwise the text will be written as a single line.
 .PP
 See also wordWrap(), QTable::adjustColumn(), and QTable::setColumnStretchable().
-.SH "QSize QTableItem::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize QTableItem::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This virtual function returns the size a cell needs to show its entire content.
 .PP
 If you subclass QTableItem you will often need to reimplement this function.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtabwidget.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtabwidget.3qt
index 90133905a..85cf45a90 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtabwidget.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtabwidget.3qt
@@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ You can change a tab's label and iconset using changeTab() or setTabLabel() and
 .PP
 Each tab is either enabled or disabled at any given time (see setTabEnabled()). If a tab is enabled, the tab text is drawn normally and the user can select that tab. If it is disabled, the tab is drawn in a different way and the user cannot select that tab. Note that even if a tab is disabled, the page can still be visible, for example if all of the tabs happen to be disabled.
 .PP
-Although tab widgets can be a very good way to split up a complex dialog, it's also very easy to get into a mess. See QTabDialog for some design hints. An alternative is to use a TQWidgetStack for which you provide some means of navigating between pages, for example, a QToolBar or a QListBox.
+Although tab widgets can be a very good way to split up a complex dialog, it's also very easy to get into a mess. See QTabDialog for some design hints. An alternative is to use a TQWidgetStack for which you provide some means of navigating between pages, for example, a TQToolBar or a QListBox.
 .PP
 Most of the functionality in QTabWidget is provided by a QTabBar (at the top, providing the tabs) and a TQWidgetStack (most of the area, organizing the individual pages).
 .PP
@@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Most of the functionality in QTabWidget is provided by a QTabBar (at the top, pr
 .ce 1
 .B "[Image Omitted]"
 .PP
-See also QTabDialog, QToolBox, Advanced Widgets, and Organizers.
+See also QTabDialog, TQToolBox, Advanced Widgets, and Organizers.
 .SS "Member Type Documentation"
 .SH "QTabWidget::TabPosition"
 This enum type defines where QTabWidget draws the tab row:
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtextedit.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtextedit.3qt
index a33447d8e..ac8c9c1cb 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtextedit.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtextedit.3qt
@@ -504,10 +504,10 @@ Inherited by QMultiLineEdit, TQTextBrowser, and TQTextView.
 .BI "TQTextCursor * \fBtextCursor\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QPopupMenu * \fBcreatePopupMenu\fR ( const QPoint & pos )"
+.BI "virtual TQPopupMenu * \fBcreatePopupMenu\fR ( const QPoint & pos )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QPopupMenu * createPopupMenu ()  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
+.BI "virtual TQPopupMenu * createPopupMenu ()  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -835,11 +835,11 @@ When text is selected this signal will be emitted with \fIyes\fR set to TRUE. If
 If \fIyes\fR is TRUE then copy() can be used to copy the selection to the clipboard. If \fIyes\fR is FALSE then copy() does nothing.
 .PP
 See also selectionChanged().
-.SH "QPopupMenu * TQTextEdit::createPopupMenu ( const QPoint & pos )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "TQPopupMenu * TQTextEdit::createPopupMenu ( const QPoint & pos )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This function is called to create a right mouse button popup menu at the document position \fIpos\fR. If you want to create a custom popup menu, reimplement this function and return the created popup menu. Ownership of the popup menu is transferred to the caller.
 .PP
-\fBWarning:\fR The QPopupMenu ID values 0-7 are reserved, and they map to the standard operations. When inserting items into your custom popup menu, be sure to specify ID values larger than 7.
-.SH "QPopupMenu * TQTextEdit::createPopupMenu ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+\fBWarning:\fR The TQPopupMenu ID values 0-7 are reserved, and they map to the standard operations. When inserting items into your custom popup menu, be sure to specify ID values larger than 7.
+.SH "TQPopupMenu * TQTextEdit::createPopupMenu ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbar.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbar.3qt
index e9b8b636e..cc5f6d130 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbar.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbar.3qt
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 '\" t
-.TH QToolBar 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
+.TH TQToolBar 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
 .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.  See the
 .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license
 .\" statement.
@@ -7,28 +7,28 @@
 .ad l
 .nh
 .SH NAME
-QToolBar \- Movable panel containing widgets such as tool buttons
+TQToolBar \- Movable panel containing widgets such as tool buttons
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fC#include <ntqtoolbar.h>\fR
+\fC#include <tqtoolbar.h>\fR
 .PP
 Inherits QDockWindow.
 .PP
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QToolBar ( const TQString & label, QMainWindow *, ToolBarDock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0 )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
+.BI "TQToolBar ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow *, ToolBarDock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0 )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQToolBar\fR ( const TQString & label, QMainWindow * mainWindow, TQWidget * parent, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQToolBar\fR ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow * mainWindow, TQWidget * parent, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQToolBar\fR ( QMainWindow * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQToolBar\fR ( TQMainWindow * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBaddSeparator\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QMainWindow * \fBmainWindow\fR () const"
+.BI "TQMainWindow * \fBmainWindow\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetStretchableWidget\fR ( TQWidget * w )"
@@ -50,17 +50,17 @@ Inherits QDockWindow.
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The QToolBar class provides a movable panel containing widgets such as tool buttons.
+The TQToolBar class provides a movable panel containing widgets such as tool buttons.
 .PP
-A toolbar is a panel that contains a set of controls, usually represented by small icons. It's purpose is to provide quick access to frequently used commands or options. Within a QMainWindow the user can drag toolbars within and between the dock areas. Toolbars can also be dragged out of any dock area to float freely as top-level windows.
+A toolbar is a panel that contains a set of controls, usually represented by small icons. It's purpose is to provide quick access to frequently used commands or options. Within a TQMainWindow the user can drag toolbars within and between the dock areas. Toolbars can also be dragged out of any dock area to float freely as top-level windows.
 .PP
-QToolBar is a specialization of QDockWindow, and so provides all the functionality of a QDockWindow.
+TQToolBar is a specialization of QDockWindow, and so provides all the functionality of a QDockWindow.
 .PP
-To use QToolBar you simply create a QToolBar as a child of a QMainWindow, create a number of QToolButton widgets (or other widgets) in left to right (or top to bottom) order and call addSeparator() when you want a separator. When a toolbar is floated the caption used is the label given in the constructor call. This can be changed with setLabel().
+To use TQToolBar you simply create a TQToolBar as a child of a TQMainWindow, create a number of TQToolButton widgets (or other widgets) in left to right (or top to bottom) order and call addSeparator() when you want a separator. When a toolbar is floated the caption used is the label given in the constructor call. This can be changed with setLabel().
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QToolBar * fileTools = new QToolBar( this, "file operations" );
+        TQToolBar * fileTools = new TQToolBar( this, "file operations" );
 .br
         fileTools->setLabel( "File Operations" );
 .br
@@ -69,15 +69,15 @@ To use QToolBar you simply create a QToolBar as a child of a QMainWindow, create
         fileSaveAction->addTo( fileTools );
 .fi
 .PP
-This extract from the application/application.cpp example shows the creation of a new toolbar as a child of a QMainWindow and adding two QActions.
+This extract from the application/application.cpp example shows the creation of a new toolbar as a child of a TQMainWindow and adding two TQActions.
 .PP
-You may use most widgets within a toolbar, with QToolButton and QComboBox being the most common.
+You may use most widgets within a toolbar, with TQToolButton and QComboBox being the most common.
 .PP
-If you create a new widget on an already visible QToolBar, this widget will automatically become visible without needing a show() call. (This differs from every other TQt widget container. We recommend calling show() anyway since we hope to fix this anomaly in a future release.)
+If you create a new widget on an already visible TQToolBar, this widget will automatically become visible without needing a show() call. (This differs from every other TQt widget container. We recommend calling show() anyway since we hope to fix this anomaly in a future release.)
 .PP
-QToolBars, like QDockWindows, are located in QDockAreas or float as top-level windows. QMainWindow provides four QDockAreas (top, left, right and bottom). When you create a new toolbar (as in the example above) as a child of a QMainWindow the toolbar will be added to the top dock area. You can move it to another dock area (or float it) by calling QMainWindow::moveDockWindow(). QDock areas lay out their windows in Lines.
+TQToolBars, like QDockWindows, are located in QDockAreas or float as top-level windows. TQMainWindow provides four QDockAreas (top, left, right and bottom). When you create a new toolbar (as in the example above) as a child of a TQMainWindow the toolbar will be added to the top dock area. You can move it to another dock area (or float it) by calling TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(). QDock areas lay out their windows in Lines.
 .PP
-If the main window is resized so that the area occupied by the toolbar is too small to show all its widgets a little arrow button (which looks like a right-pointing chevron, '&#187;') will appear at the right or bottom of the toolbar depending on its orientation. Clicking this button pops up a menu that shows the 'overflowing' items. QToolButtons are represented in the menu using their textLabel property, other QButton subclasses are represented using their text property, and QComboBoxes are represented as submenus, with the caption text being used in the submenu item.
+If the main window is resized so that the area occupied by the toolbar is too small to show all its widgets a little arrow button (which looks like a right-pointing chevron, '&#187;') will appear at the right or bottom of the toolbar depending on its orientation. Clicking this button pops up a menu that shows the 'overflowing' items. TQToolButtons are represented in the menu using their textLabel property, other QButton subclasses are represented using their text property, and QComboBoxes are represented as submenus, with the caption text being used in the submenu item.
 .PP
 Usually a toolbar will get precisely the space it needs. However, with setHorizontalStretchable(), setVerticalStretchable() or setStretchableWidget() you can tell the main window to expand the toolbar to fill all available space in the specified orientation.
 .PP
@@ -89,43 +89,43 @@ You can use the clear() method to remove all items from a toolbar.
 .ce 1
 .B "[Image Omitted]"
 .PP
-</center> <blockquote><p align="center">\fI A floating QToolbar (dock window) \fR</p> </blockquote>
+</center> <blockquote><p align="center">\fI A floating TQToolbar (dock window) \fR</p> </blockquote>
 .PP
-See also QToolButton, QMainWindow, Parts of Isys on Visual Design, GUI Design Handbook: Tool Bar, and Main Window and Related Classes.
+See also TQToolButton, TQMainWindow, Parts of Isys on Visual Design, GUI Design Handbook: Tool Bar, and Main Window and Related Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "QToolBar::QToolBar ( const TQString & label, QMainWindow *, ToolBarDock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0 )"
+.SH "TQToolBar::TQToolBar ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow *, ToolBarDock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0 )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-.SH "QToolBar::QToolBar ( const TQString & label, QMainWindow * mainWindow, TQWidget * parent, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )"
+.SH "TQToolBar::TQToolBar ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow * mainWindow, TQWidget * parent, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )"
 Constructs an empty horizontal toolbar.
 .PP
-The toolbar is called \fIname\fR and is a child of \fIparent\fR and is managed by \fImainWindow\fR. The \fIlabel\fR and \fInewLine\fR parameters are passed straight to QMainWindow::addDockWindow(). \fIname\fR and the widget flags \fIf\fR are passed on to the QDockWindow constructor.
+The toolbar is called \fIname\fR and is a child of \fIparent\fR and is managed by \fImainWindow\fR. The \fIlabel\fR and \fInewLine\fR parameters are passed straight to TQMainWindow::addDockWindow(). \fIname\fR and the widget flags \fIf\fR are passed on to the QDockWindow constructor.
 .PP
 Use this constructor if you want to create torn-off (undocked, floating) toolbars or toolbars in the status bar.
-.SH "QToolBar::QToolBar ( QMainWindow * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
+.SH "TQToolBar::TQToolBar ( TQMainWindow * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Constructs an empty toolbar called \fIname\fR, with parent \fIparent\fR, in its \fIparent\fR's top dock area, without any label and without requiring a newline.
-.SH "void QToolBar::addSeparator ()"
+.SH "void TQToolBar::addSeparator ()"
 Adds a separator to the right/bottom of the toolbar.
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l chart/chartform.cpp, fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, and scribble/scribble.cpp.
-.SH "void QToolBar::clear ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolBar::clear ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Deletes all the toolbar's child widgets.
-.SH "TQString QToolBar::label () const"
+.SH "TQString TQToolBar::label () const"
 Returns the toolbar's label. See the "label" property for details.
-.SH "QMainWindow * QToolBar::mainWindow () const"
-Returns a pointer to the QMainWindow which manages this toolbar.
-.SH "void QToolBar::setLabel ( const TQString & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQMainWindow * TQToolBar::mainWindow () const"
+Returns a pointer to the TQMainWindow which manages this toolbar.
+.SH "void TQToolBar::setLabel ( const TQString & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the toolbar's label. See the "label" property for details.
-.SH "void QToolBar::setStretchableWidget ( TQWidget * w )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolBar::setStretchableWidget ( TQWidget * w )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the widget \fIw\fR to be expanded if this toolbar is requested to stretch.
 .PP
-The request to stretch might occur because QMainWindow right-justifies the dock area the toolbar is in, or because this toolbar's isVerticalStretchable() or isHorizontalStretchable() is set to TRUE.
+The request to stretch might occur because TQMainWindow right-justifies the dock area the toolbar is in, or because this toolbar's isVerticalStretchable() or isHorizontalStretchable() is set to TRUE.
 .PP
 If you call this function and the toolbar is not yet stretchable, setStretchable() is called.
 .PP
-See also QMainWindow::rightJustification, setVerticalStretchable(), and setHorizontalStretchable().
+See also TQMainWindow::rightJustification, setVerticalStretchable(), and setHorizontalStretchable().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp and helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
@@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ If the toolbar is floated the label becomes the toolbar window's caption. There
 Set this property's value with setLabel() and get this property's value with label().
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqtoolbar.html
+.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqtoolbar.html
 .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html
 .SH COPYRIGHT
 Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com.  See the
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbox.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbox.3qt
index 9d86bf88f..746580a5e 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbox.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbox.3qt
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 '\" t
-.TH QToolBox 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
+.TH TQToolBox 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
 .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.  See the
 .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license
 .\" statement.
@@ -7,16 +7,16 @@
 .ad l
 .nh
 .SH NAME
-QToolBox \- Column of tabbed widget items
+TQToolBox \- Column of tabbed widget items
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fC#include <ntqtoolbox.h>\fR
+\fC#include <tqtoolbox.h>\fR
 .PP
 Inherits QFrame.
 .PP
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQToolBox\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQToolBox\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBaddItem\fR ( TQWidget * w, const TQString & label )"
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Inherits QFrame.
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The QToolBox class provides a column of tabbed widget items.
+The TQToolBox class provides a column of tabbed widget items.
 .PP
 A toolbox is a widget that displays a column of tabs one above the other, with the current item displayed below the current tab. Every tab has an index position within the column of tabs. A tab's item is a TQWidget.
 .PP
@@ -121,57 +121,57 @@ The currentChanged() signal is emitted when the current item is changed.
 .PP
 See also QTabWidget and Advanced Widgets.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "QToolBox::QToolBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )"
+.SH "TQToolBox::TQToolBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )"
 Constructs a toolbox called \fIname\fR with parent \fIparent\fR and flags \fIf\fR.
-.SH "int QToolBox::addItem ( TQWidget * item, const TQIconSet & iconSet, const TQString & label )"
+.SH "int TQToolBox::addItem ( TQWidget * item, const TQIconSet & iconSet, const TQString & label )"
 Adds the widget \fIitem\fR in a new tab at bottom of the toolbox. The new tab's label is set to \fIlabel\fR, and the \fIiconSet\fR is displayed to the left of the \fIlabel\fR. Returns the new tab's index.
-.SH "int QToolBox::addItem ( TQWidget * w, const TQString & label )"
+.SH "int TQToolBox::addItem ( TQWidget * w, const TQString & label )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Adds the widget \fIw\fR in a new tab at bottom of the toolbox. The new tab's label is set to \fIlabel\fR. Returns the new tab's index.
-.SH "int QToolBox::count () const"
+.SH "int TQToolBox::count () const"
 Returns the number of items contained in the toolbox. See the "count" property for details.
-.SH "void QToolBox::currentChanged ( int index )\fC [signal]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolBox::currentChanged ( int index )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when the current item changed. The new current item's index is passed in \fIindex\fR, or -1 if there is no current item.
-.SH "int QToolBox::currentIndex () const"
+.SH "int TQToolBox::currentIndex () const"
 Returns the index of the current item, or -1 if the toolbox is empty. See the "currentIndex" property for details.
-.SH "TQWidget * QToolBox::currentItem () const"
+.SH "TQWidget * TQToolBox::currentItem () const"
 Returns the toolbox's current item, or 0 if the toolbox is empty.
-.SH "int QToolBox::indexOf ( TQWidget * item ) const"
+.SH "int TQToolBox::indexOf ( TQWidget * item ) const"
 Returns the index of item \fIitem\fR, or -1 if the item does not exist.
-.SH "int QToolBox::insertItem ( int index, TQWidget * item, const TQIconSet & iconSet, const TQString & label )"
+.SH "int TQToolBox::insertItem ( int index, TQWidget * item, const TQIconSet & iconSet, const TQString & label )"
 Inserts the widget \fIitem\fR at position \fIindex\fR, or at the bottom of the toolbox if \fIindex\fR is out of range. The new item's label is set to \fIlabel\fR, and the \fIiconSet\fR is displayed to the left of the \fIlabel\fR. Returns the new item's index.
-.SH "int QToolBox::insertItem ( int index, TQWidget * item, const TQString & label )"
+.SH "int TQToolBox::insertItem ( int index, TQWidget * item, const TQString & label )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts the widget \fIitem\fR at position \fIindex\fR, or at the bottom of the toolbox if \fIindex\fR is out of range. The new item's label is set to \fIlabel\fR. Returns the new item's index.
-.SH "bool QToolBox::isItemEnabled ( int index ) const"
+.SH "bool TQToolBox::isItemEnabled ( int index ) const"
 Returns TRUE if the item at position \fIindex\fR is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-.SH "TQWidget * QToolBox::item ( int index ) const"
+.SH "TQWidget * TQToolBox::item ( int index ) const"
 Returns the item at position \fIindex\fR, or 0 if there is no such item.
-.SH "TQIconSet QToolBox::itemIconSet ( int index ) const"
+.SH "TQIconSet TQToolBox::itemIconSet ( int index ) const"
 Returns the icon of the item at position \fIindex\fR, or a null icon if \fIindex\fR is out of range.
-.SH "void QToolBox::itemInserted ( int index )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolBox::itemInserted ( int index )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This virtual handler is called after a new item was added or inserted at position \fIindex\fR.
-.SH "TQString QToolBox::itemLabel ( int index ) const"
+.SH "TQString TQToolBox::itemLabel ( int index ) const"
 Returns the label of the item at position \fIindex\fR, or a null string if \fIindex\fR is out of range.
-.SH "void QToolBox::itemRemoved ( int index )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolBox::itemRemoved ( int index )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This virtual handler is called after an item was removed from position \fIindex\fR.
-.SH "TQString QToolBox::itemToolTip ( int index ) const"
+.SH "TQString TQToolBox::itemToolTip ( int index ) const"
 Returns the tooltip of the item at position \fIindex\fR, or a null string if \fIindex\fR is out of range.
-.SH "int QToolBox::removeItem ( TQWidget * item )"
+.SH "int TQToolBox::removeItem ( TQWidget * item )"
 Removes the widget \fIitem\fR from the toolbox. Note that the widget is \fInot\fR deleted. Returns the removed widget's index, or -1 if the widget was not in this tool box.
-.SH "void QToolBox::setCurrentIndex ( int index )\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolBox::setCurrentIndex ( int index )\fC [slot]\fR"
 Sets the index of the current item, or -1 if the toolbox is empty to \fIindex\fR. See the "currentIndex" property for details.
-.SH "void QToolBox::setCurrentItem ( TQWidget * item )"
+.SH "void TQToolBox::setCurrentItem ( TQWidget * item )"
 Sets the current item to be \fIitem\fR.
-.SH "void QToolBox::setItemEnabled ( int index, bool enabled )"
+.SH "void TQToolBox::setItemEnabled ( int index, bool enabled )"
 If \fIenabled\fR is TRUE then the item at position \fIindex\fR is enabled; otherwise item \fIindex\fR is disabled.
-.SH "void QToolBox::setItemIconSet ( int index, const TQIconSet & iconSet )"
+.SH "void TQToolBox::setItemIconSet ( int index, const TQIconSet & iconSet )"
 Sets the icon of the item at position \fIindex\fR to \fIiconSet\fR.
-.SH "void QToolBox::setItemLabel ( int index, const TQString & label )"
+.SH "void TQToolBox::setItemLabel ( int index, const TQString & label )"
 Sets the label of the item at position \fIindex\fR to \fIlabel\fR.
-.SH "void QToolBox::setItemToolTip ( int index, const TQString & toolTip )"
+.SH "void TQToolBox::setItemToolTip ( int index, const TQString & toolTip )"
 Sets the tooltip of the item at position \fIindex\fR to \fItoolTip\fR.
 .SS "Property Documentation"
 .SH "int count"
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Set this property's value with setCurrentIndex() and get this property's value w
 See also currentItem(), indexOf(), and item().
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqtoolbox.html
+.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqtoolbox.html
 .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html
 .SH COPYRIGHT
 Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com.  See the
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbutton.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbutton.3qt
index 1b5bb76c0..6b3f8bbf1 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbutton.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbutton.3qt
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 '\" t
-.TH QToolButton 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
+.TH TQToolButton 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
 .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.  See the
 .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license
 .\" statement.
@@ -7,9 +7,9 @@
 .ad l
 .nh
 .SH NAME
-QToolButton \- Quick-access button to commands or options, usually used inside a QToolBar
+TQToolButton \- Quick-access button to commands or options, usually used inside a TQToolBar
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fC#include <ntqtoolbutton.h>\fR
+\fC#include <tqtoolbutton.h>\fR
 .PP
 Inherits QButton.
 .PP
@@ -19,16 +19,16 @@ Inherits QButton.
 .BI "enum \fBTextPosition\fR { BesideIcon, BelowIcon, Right = BesideIcon, Under = BelowIcon }"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQToolButton\fR ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQToolButton\fR ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQToolButton\fR ( const TQIconSet & iconSet, const TQString & textLabel, const TQString & grouptext, TQObject * receiver, const char * slot, QToolBar * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQToolButton\fR ( const TQIconSet & iconSet, const TQString & textLabel, const TQString & grouptext, TQObject * receiver, const char * slot, TQToolBar * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQToolButton\fR ( ArrowType type, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQToolButton\fR ( ArrowType type, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fB~QToolButton\fR ()"
+.BI "\fB~TQToolButton\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetIconSet\fR ( const TQIconSet & )"
@@ -46,10 +46,10 @@ Inherits QButton.
 .BI "TQString \fBtextLabel\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBsetPopup\fR ( QPopupMenu * popup )"
+.BI "void \fBsetPopup\fR ( TQPopupMenu * popup )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QPopupMenu * \fBpopup\fR () const"
+.BI "TQPopupMenu * \fBpopup\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBsetPopupDelay\fR ( int delay )"
@@ -140,66 +140,66 @@ Inherits QButton.
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The QToolButton class provides a quick-access button to commands or options, usually used inside a QToolBar.
+The TQToolButton class provides a quick-access button to commands or options, usually used inside a TQToolBar.
 .PP
-A tool button is a special button that provides quick-access to specific commands or options. As opposed to a normal command button, a tool button usually doesn't show a text label, but shows an icon instead. Its classic usage is to select tools, for example the "pen" tool in a drawing program. This would be implemented with a QToolButton as toggle button (see setToggleButton() ).
+A tool button is a special button that provides quick-access to specific commands or options. As opposed to a normal command button, a tool button usually doesn't show a text label, but shows an icon instead. Its classic usage is to select tools, for example the "pen" tool in a drawing program. This would be implemented with a TQToolButton as toggle button (see setToggleButton() ).
 .PP
-QToolButton supports auto-raising. In auto-raise mode, the button draws a 3D frame only when the mouse points at it. The feature is automatically turned on when a button is used inside a QToolBar. Change it with setAutoRaise().
+TQToolButton supports auto-raising. In auto-raise mode, the button draws a 3D frame only when the mouse points at it. The feature is automatically turned on when a button is used inside a TQToolBar. Change it with setAutoRaise().
 .PP
 A tool button's icon is set as TQIconSet. This makes it possible to specify different pixmaps for the disabled and active state. The disabled pixmap is used when the button's functionality is not available. The active pixmap is displayed when the button is auto-raised because the mouse pointer is hovering over it.
 .PP
-The button's look and dimension is adjustable with setUsesBigPixmap() and setUsesTextLabel(). When used inside a QToolBar in a QMainWindow, the button automatically adjusts to QMainWindow's settings (see QMainWindow::setUsesTextLabel() and QMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps()). The pixmap set on a QToolButton will be set to 22x22 if it is bigger than this size. If usesBigPixmap() is TRUE, then the pixmap will be set to 32x32.
+The button's look and dimension is adjustable with setUsesBigPixmap() and setUsesTextLabel(). When used inside a TQToolBar in a TQMainWindow, the button automatically adjusts to TQMainWindow's settings (see TQMainWindow::setUsesTextLabel() and TQMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps()). The pixmap set on a TQToolButton will be set to 22x22 if it is bigger than this size. If usesBigPixmap() is TRUE, then the pixmap will be set to 32x32.
 .PP
-A tool button can offer additional choices in a popup menu. The feature is sometimes used with the "Back" button in a web browser. After pressing and holding the button down for a while, a menu pops up showing a list of possible pages to jump to. With QToolButton you can set a popup menu using setPopup(). The default delay is 600ms; you can adjust it with setPopupDelay().
+A tool button can offer additional choices in a popup menu. The feature is sometimes used with the "Back" button in a web browser. After pressing and holding the button down for a while, a menu pops up showing a list of possible pages to jump to. With TQToolButton you can set a popup menu using setPopup(). The default delay is 600ms; you can adjust it with setPopupDelay().
 .PP
 <center>
 .ce 1
 .B "[Image Omitted]"
 .PP
-</center> QToolbar with QToolbuttons
+</center> TQToolbar with TQToolbuttons
 .PP
-See also QPushButton, QToolBar, QMainWindow, GUI Design Handbook: Push Button, and Basic Widgets.
+See also QPushButton, TQToolBar, TQMainWindow, GUI Design Handbook: Push Button, and Basic Widgets.
 .SS "Member Type Documentation"
-.SH "QToolButton::TextPosition"
+.SH "TQToolButton::TextPosition"
 The position of the tool button's textLabel in relation to the tool button's icon.
 .TP
-\fCQToolButton::BesideIcon\fR - The text appears beside the icon.
+\fCTQToolButton::BesideIcon\fR - The text appears beside the icon.
 .TP
-\fCQToolButton::BelowIcon\fR - The text appears below the icon.
+\fCTQToolButton::BelowIcon\fR - The text appears below the icon.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "QToolButton::QToolButton ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
+.SH "TQToolButton::TQToolButton ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 Constructs an empty tool button called \fIname\fR, with parent \fIparent\fR.
-.SH "QToolButton::QToolButton ( const TQIconSet & iconSet, const TQString & textLabel, const TQString & grouptext, TQObject * receiver, const char * slot, QToolBar * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
-Constructs a tool button called \fIname\fR, that is a child of \fIparent\fR (which must be a QToolBar).
+.SH "TQToolButton::TQToolButton ( const TQIconSet & iconSet, const TQString & textLabel, const TQString & grouptext, TQObject * receiver, const char * slot, TQToolBar * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
+Constructs a tool button called \fIname\fR, that is a child of \fIparent\fR (which must be a TQToolBar).
 .PP
 The tool button will display \fIiconSet\fR, with its text label and tool tip set to \fItextLabel\fR and its status bar message set to \fIgrouptext\fR. It will be connected to the \fIslot\fR in object \fIreceiver\fR.
-.SH "QToolButton::QToolButton ( ArrowType type, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
+.SH "TQToolButton::TQToolButton ( ArrowType type, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 Constructs a tool button as an arrow button. The ArrowType \fItype\fR defines the arrow direction. Possible values are LeftArrow, RightArrow, UpArrow and DownArrow.
 .PP
 An arrow button has auto-repeat turned on by default.
 .PP
 The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are sent to the TQWidget constructor.
-.SH "QToolButton::~QToolButton ()"
+.SH "TQToolButton::~TQToolButton ()"
 Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-.SH "bool QToolButton::autoRaise () const"
+.SH "bool TQToolButton::autoRaise () const"
 Returns TRUE if auto-raising is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "autoRaise" property for details.
-.SH "TQIconSet QToolButton::iconSet () const"
+.SH "TQIconSet TQToolButton::iconSet () const"
 Returns the icon set providing the icon shown on the button. See the "iconSet" property for details.
-.SH "void QToolButton::openPopup ()"
+.SH "void TQToolButton::openPopup ()"
 Opens (pops up) the associated popup menu. If there is no such menu, this function does nothing. This function does not return until the popup menu has been closed by the user.
-.SH "QPopupMenu * QToolButton::popup () const"
+.SH "TQPopupMenu * TQToolButton::popup () const"
 Returns the associated popup menu, or 0 if no popup menu has been defined.
 .PP
 See also setPopup().
-.SH "int QToolButton::popupDelay () const"
+.SH "int TQToolButton::popupDelay () const"
 Returns the time delay between pressing the button and the appearance of the associated popup menu in milliseconds. See the "popupDelay" property for details.
-.SH "void QToolButton::setAutoRaise ( bool enable )"
+.SH "void TQToolButton::setAutoRaise ( bool enable )"
 Sets whether auto-raising is enabled to \fIenable\fR. See the "autoRaise" property for details.
-.SH "void QToolButton::setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolButton::setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the icon set providing the icon shown on the button. See the "iconSet" property for details.
-.SH "void QToolButton::setOn ( bool enable )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolButton::setOn ( bool enable )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Sets whether this tool button is on to \fIenable\fR. See the "on" property for details.
-.SH "void QToolButton::setPopup ( QPopupMenu * popup )"
+.SH "void TQToolButton::setPopup ( TQPopupMenu * popup )"
 Associates the popup menu \fIpopup\fR with this tool button.
 .PP
 The popup will be shown each time the tool button has been pressed down for a certain amount of time. A typical application example is the "back" button in some web browsers's tool bars. If the user clicks it, the browser simply browses back to the previous page. If the user presses and holds the button down for a while, the tool button shows a menu containing the current history list.
@@ -207,39 +207,39 @@ The popup will be shown each time the tool button has been pressed down for a ce
 Ownership of the popup menu is not transferred to the tool button.
 .PP
 See also popup().
-.SH "void QToolButton::setPopupDelay ( int delay )"
+.SH "void TQToolButton::setPopupDelay ( int delay )"
 Sets the time delay between pressing the button and the appearance of the associated popup menu in milliseconds to \fIdelay\fR. See the "popupDelay" property for details.
-.SH "void QToolButton::setTextLabel ( const TQString & )\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolButton::setTextLabel ( const TQString & )\fC [slot]\fR"
 Sets the label of this button. See the "textLabel" property for details.
-.SH "void QToolButton::setTextLabel ( const TQString & newLabel, bool tipToo )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolButton::setTextLabel ( const TQString & newLabel, bool tipToo )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Sets the label of this button to \fInewLabel\fR and automatically sets it as a tool tip if \fItipToo\fR is TRUE.
-.SH "void QToolButton::setTextPosition ( TextPosition pos )\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolButton::setTextPosition ( TextPosition pos )\fC [slot]\fR"
 Sets the position of the text label of this button to \fIpos\fR. See the "textPosition" property for details.
-.SH "void QToolButton::setToggleButton ( bool enable )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolButton::setToggleButton ( bool enable )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Sets whether this tool button is a toggle button to \fIenable\fR. See the "toggleButton" property for details.
-.SH "void QToolButton::setUsesBigPixmap ( bool enable )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolButton::setUsesBigPixmap ( bool enable )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Sets whether this toolbutton uses big pixmaps to \fIenable\fR. See the "usesBigPixmap" property for details.
-.SH "void QToolButton::setUsesTextLabel ( bool enable )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolButton::setUsesTextLabel ( bool enable )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Sets whether the toolbutton displays a text label below the button pixmap to \fIenable\fR. See the "usesTextLabel" property for details.
-.SH "TQString QToolButton::textLabel () const"
+.SH "TQString TQToolButton::textLabel () const"
 Returns the label of this button. See the "textLabel" property for details.
-.SH "TextPosition QToolButton::textPosition () const"
+.SH "TextPosition TQToolButton::textPosition () const"
 Returns the position of the text label of this button. See the "textPosition" property for details.
-.SH "void QToolButton::toggle ()\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolButton::toggle ()\fC [slot]\fR"
 Toggles the state of this tool button.
 .PP
 This function has no effect on non-toggling buttons.
 .PP
 See also toggleButton and toggled().
-.SH "bool QToolButton::uses3D () const\fC [protected]\fR"
+.SH "bool TQToolButton::uses3D () const\fC [protected]\fR"
 Returns TRUE if this button should be drawn using raised edges; otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 See also drawButton().
-.SH "bool QToolButton::usesBigPixmap () const"
+.SH "bool TQToolButton::usesBigPixmap () const"
 Returns TRUE if this toolbutton uses big pixmaps; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "usesBigPixmap" property for details.
-.SH "bool QToolButton::usesTextLabel () const"
+.SH "bool TQToolButton::usesTextLabel () const"
 Returns TRUE if the toolbutton displays a text label below the button pixmap; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "usesTextLabel" property for details.
 .SS "Property Documentation"
 .SH "bool autoRaise"
@@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ See also TQWidget::backgroundMode.
 .SH "TQIconSet iconSet"
 This property holds the icon set providing the icon shown on the button.
 .PP
-Setting this property sets QToolButton::pixmap to a null pixmap. There is no default iconset.
+Setting this property sets TQToolButton::pixmap to a null pixmap. There is no default iconset.
 .PP
 See also pixmap, toggleButton, and on.
 .PP
@@ -303,11 +303,11 @@ Set this property's value with setToggleButton().
 .SH "bool usesBigPixmap"
 This property holds whether this toolbutton uses big pixmaps.
 .PP
-QToolButton automatically connects this property to the relevant signal in the QMainWindow in which it resides. We strongly recommend that you use QMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps() instead.
+TQToolButton automatically connects this property to the relevant signal in the TQMainWindow in which it resides. We strongly recommend that you use TQMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps() instead.
 .PP
 This property's default is TRUE.
 .PP
-\fBWarning:\fR If you set some buttons (in a QMainWindow) to have big pixmaps and others to have small pixmaps, QMainWindow may not get the geometry right.
+\fBWarning:\fR If you set some buttons (in a TQMainWindow) to have big pixmaps and others to have small pixmaps, TQMainWindow may not get the geometry right.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setUsesBigPixmap() and get this property's value with usesBigPixmap().
 .SH "bool usesTextLabel"
@@ -315,12 +315,12 @@ This property holds whether the toolbutton displays a text label below the butto
 .PP
 The default is FALSE.
 .PP
-QToolButton automatically connects this slot to the relevant signal in the QMainWindow in which is resides.
+TQToolButton automatically connects this slot to the relevant signal in the TQMainWindow in which is resides.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setUsesTextLabel() and get this property's value with usesTextLabel().
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqtoolbutton.html
+.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqtoolbutton.html
 .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html
 .SH COPYRIGHT
 Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com.  See the
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtooltip.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtooltip.3qt
index 83810cc86..c60104f8c 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtooltip.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtooltip.3qt
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 '\" t
-.TH QToolTip 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
+.TH TQToolTip 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
 .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.  See the
 .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license
 .\" statement.
@@ -7,22 +7,22 @@
 .ad l
 .nh
 .SH NAME
-QToolTip \- Tool tips (balloon help) for any widget or rectangular part of a widget
+TQToolTip \- Tool tips (balloon help) for any widget or rectangular part of a widget
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fC#include <ntqtooltip.h>\fR
+\fC#include <tqtooltip.h>\fR
 .PP
 Inherits Qt.
 .PP
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQToolTip\fR ( TQWidget * widget, QToolTipGroup * group = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQToolTip\fR ( TQWidget * widget, TQToolTipGroup * group = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQWidget * \fBparentWidget\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QToolTipGroup * \fBgroup\fR () const"
+.BI "TQToolTipGroup * \fBgroup\fR () const"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SS "Static Public Members"
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ Inherits Qt.
 .BI "void \fBadd\fR ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & text )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBadd\fR ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & text, QToolTipGroup * group, const TQString & longText )"
+.BI "void \fBadd\fR ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & text, TQToolTipGroup * group, const TQString & longText )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBremove\fR ( TQWidget * widget )"
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ Inherits Qt.
 .BI "void \fBadd\fR ( TQWidget * widget, const QRect & rect, const TQString & text )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBadd\fR ( TQWidget * widget, const QRect & rect, const TQString & text, QToolTipGroup * group, const TQString & groupText )"
+.BI "void \fBadd\fR ( TQWidget * widget, const QRect & rect, const TQString & text, TQToolTipGroup * group, const TQString & groupText )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBremove\fR ( TQWidget * widget, const QRect & rect )"
@@ -101,19 +101,19 @@ Inherits Qt.
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The QToolTip class provides tool tips (balloon help) for any widget or rectangular part of a widget.
+The TQToolTip class provides tool tips (balloon help) for any widget or rectangular part of a widget.
 .PP
 The tip is a short, single line of text reminding the user of the widget's or rectangle's function. It is drawn immediately below the region in a distinctive black-on-yellow combination.
 .PP
 The tip can be any Rich-Text formatted string.
 .PP
-QToolTipGroup provides a way for tool tips to display another text elsewhere (most often in a status bar).
+TQToolTipGroup provides a way for tool tips to display another text elsewhere (most often in a status bar).
 .PP
-At any point in time, QToolTip is either dormant or active. In dormant mode the tips are not shown and in active mode they are. The mode is global, not particular to any one widget.
+At any point in time, TQToolTip is either dormant or active. In dormant mode the tips are not shown and in active mode they are. The mode is global, not particular to any one widget.
 .PP
-QToolTip switches from dormant to active mode when the user hovers the mouse on a tip-equipped region for a second or so and remains active until the user either clicks a mouse button, presses a key, lets the mouse hover for five seconds or moves the mouse outside \fIall\fR tip-equipped regions for at least a second.
+TQToolTip switches from dormant to active mode when the user hovers the mouse on a tip-equipped region for a second or so and remains active until the user either clicks a mouse button, presses a key, lets the mouse hover for five seconds or moves the mouse outside \fIall\fR tip-equipped regions for at least a second.
 .PP
-The QToolTip class can be used in three different ways: <ol type=1>
+The TQToolTip class can be used in three different ways: <ol type=1>
 .IP 1
 Adding a tip to an entire widget.
 .IP 2
@@ -121,58 +121,58 @@ Adding a tip to a fixed rectangle within a widget.
 .IP 3
 Adding a tip to a dynamic rectangle within a widget.
 .PP
-To add a tip to a widget, call the \fIstatic\fR function QToolTip::add() with the widget and tip as arguments:
+To add a tip to a widget, call the \fIstatic\fR function TQToolTip::add() with the widget and tip as arguments:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QToolTip::add( quitButton, "Leave the application" );
+        TQToolTip::add( quitButton, "Leave the application" );
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-This is the simplest and most common use of QToolTip. The tip will be deleted automatically when \fIquitButton\fR is deleted, but you can remove it yourself, too:
+This is the simplest and most common use of TQToolTip. The tip will be deleted automatically when \fIquitButton\fR is deleted, but you can remove it yourself, too:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QToolTip::remove( quitButton );
+        TQToolTip::remove( quitButton );
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-You can also display another text (typically in a status bar), courtesy of QToolTipGroup. This example assumes that \fIgrp\fR is a \fCQToolTipGroup *\fR and is already connected to the appropriate status bar:
+You can also display another text (typically in a status bar), courtesy of TQToolTipGroup. This example assumes that \fIgrp\fR is a \fCTQToolTipGroup *\fR and is already connected to the appropriate status bar:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QToolTip::add( quitButton, "Leave the application", grp,
+        TQToolTip::add( quitButton, "Leave the application", grp,
 .br
                        "Leave the application, prompting to save if necessary" );
 .br
-        QToolTip::add( closeButton, "Close this window", grp,
+        TQToolTip::add( closeButton, "Close this window", grp,
 .br
                        "Close this window, prompting to save if necessary" );
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-To add a tip to a fixed rectangle within a widget, call the static function QToolTip::add() with the widget, rectangle and tip as arguments. (See the tooltip/tooltip.cpp example.) Again, you can supply a \fCQToolTipGroup *\fR and another text if you want.
+To add a tip to a fixed rectangle within a widget, call the static function TQToolTip::add() with the widget, rectangle and tip as arguments. (See the tooltip/tooltip.cpp example.) Again, you can supply a \fCTQToolTipGroup *\fR and another text if you want.
 .PP
-Both of these are one-liners and cover the majority of cases. The third and most general way to use QToolTip requires you to reimplement a pure virtual function to decide whether to pop up a tool tip. The tooltip/tooltip.cpp example demonstrates this too. This mode can be used to implement tips for text that can move as the user scrolls, for example.
+Both of these are one-liners and cover the majority of cases. The third and most general way to use TQToolTip requires you to reimplement a pure virtual function to decide whether to pop up a tool tip. The tooltip/tooltip.cpp example demonstrates this too. This mode can be used to implement tips for text that can move as the user scrolls, for example.
 .PP
-To use QToolTip like this, you must subclass QToolTip and reimplement maybeTip(). QToolTip calls maybeTip() when a tip should pop up, and maybeTip() decides whether to show a tip.
+To use TQToolTip like this, you must subclass TQToolTip and reimplement maybeTip(). TQToolTip calls maybeTip() when a tip should pop up, and maybeTip() decides whether to show a tip.
 .PP
-Tool tips can be globally disabled using QToolTip::setGloballyEnabled() or disabled in groups with QToolTipGroup::setEnabled().
+Tool tips can be globally disabled using TQToolTip::setGloballyEnabled() or disabled in groups with TQToolTipGroup::setEnabled().
 .PP
 You can retrieve the text of a tooltip for a given position within a widget using textFor().
 .PP
 The global tooltip font and palette can be set with the static setFont() and setPalette() functions respectively.
 .PP
-See also QStatusBar, QWhatsThis, QToolTipGroup, GUI Design Handbook: Tool Tip, and Help System.
+See also TQStatusBar, QWhatsThis, TQToolTipGroup, GUI Design Handbook: Tool Tip, and Help System.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "QToolTip::QToolTip ( TQWidget * widget, QToolTipGroup * group = 0 )"
+.SH "TQToolTip::TQToolTip ( TQWidget * widget, TQToolTipGroup * group = 0 )"
 Constructs a tool tip object. This is only necessary if you need tool tips on regions that can move within the widget (most often because the widget's contents can scroll).
 .PP
 \fIwidget\fR is the widget you want to add dynamic tool tips to and \fIgroup\fR (optional) is the tool tip group they should belong to.
 .PP
-\fBWarning:\fR QToolTip is not a subclass of TQObject, so the instance of QToolTip is not deleted when \fIwidget\fR is deleted.
+\fBWarning:\fR TQToolTip is not a subclass of TQObject, so the instance of TQToolTip is not deleted when \fIwidget\fR is deleted.
 .PP
-\fBWarning:\fR If you delete the tool tip before you have deleted \fIwidget\fR then you need to make sure you call remove() yourself from \fIwidget\fR in your reimplemented QToolTip destructor.
+\fBWarning:\fR If you delete the tool tip before you have deleted \fIwidget\fR then you need to make sure you call remove() yourself from \fIwidget\fR in your reimplemented TQToolTip destructor.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -187,14 +187,14 @@ Constructs a tool tip object. This is only necessary if you need tool tips on re
 .fi
 .PP
 See also maybeTip().
-.SH "void QToolTip::add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & text )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolTip::add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & text )\fC [static]\fR"
 Adds a tool tip to \fIwidget\fR. \fItext\fR is the text to be shown in the tool tip.
 .PP
-This is the most common entry point to the QToolTip class; it is suitable for adding tool tips to buttons, checkboxes, comboboxes and so on.
+This is the most common entry point to the TQToolTip class; it is suitable for adding tool tips to buttons, checkboxes, comboboxes and so on.
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and tooltip/tooltip.cpp.
-.SH "void QToolTip::add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & text, QToolTipGroup * group, const TQString & longText )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolTip::add ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & text, TQToolTipGroup * group, const TQString & longText )\fC [static]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Adds a tool tip to \fIwidget\fR and to tool tip group \fIgroup\fR.
@@ -202,11 +202,11 @@ Adds a tool tip to \fIwidget\fR and to tool tip group \fIgroup\fR.
 \fItext\fR is the text shown in the tool tip and \fIlongText\fR is the text emitted from \fIgroup\fR.
 .PP
 Normally, \fIlongText\fR is shown in a status bar or similar.
-.SH "void QToolTip::add ( TQWidget * widget, const QRect & rect, const TQString & text )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolTip::add ( TQWidget * widget, const QRect & rect, const TQString & text )\fC [static]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Adds a tool tip to a fixed rectangle, \fIrect\fR, within \fIwidget\fR. \fItext\fR is the text shown in the tool tip.
-.SH "void QToolTip::add ( TQWidget * widget, const QRect & rect, const TQString & text, QToolTipGroup * group, const TQString & groupText )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolTip::add ( TQWidget * widget, const QRect & rect, const TQString & text, TQToolTipGroup * group, const TQString & groupText )\fC [static]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Adds a tool tip to an entire \fIwidget\fR and to tool tip group \fIgroup\fR. The tooltip will disappear when the mouse leaves the \fIrect\fR.
@@ -214,32 +214,32 @@ Adds a tool tip to an entire \fIwidget\fR and to tool tip group \fIgroup\fR. The
 \fItext\fR is the text shown in the tool tip and \fIgroupText\fR is the text emitted from \fIgroup\fR.
 .PP
 Normally, \fIgroupText\fR is shown in a status bar or similar.
-.SH "void QToolTip::clear ()\fC [protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolTip::clear ()\fC [protected]\fR"
 Immediately removes all tool tips for this tooltip's parent widget.
-.SH "bool QToolTip::enabled ()\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "bool TQToolTip::enabled ()\fC [static]\fR"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-.SH "QFont QToolTip::font ()\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "QFont TQToolTip::font ()\fC [static]\fR"
 Returns the font common to all tool tips.
 .PP
 See also setFont().
-.SH "QToolTipGroup * QToolTip::group () const"
-Returns the tool tip group this QToolTip is a member of or 0 if it isn't a member of any group.
+.SH "TQToolTipGroup * TQToolTip::group () const"
+Returns the tool tip group this TQToolTip is a member of or 0 if it isn't a member of any group.
 .PP
 The tool tip group is the object responsible for maintaining contact between tool tips and a status bar or something else which can show the longer help text.
 .PP
-See also parentWidget() and QToolTipGroup.
-.SH "void QToolTip::hide ()\fC [static]\fR"
+See also parentWidget() and TQToolTipGroup.
+.SH "void TQToolTip::hide ()\fC [static]\fR"
 Hides any tip that is currently being shown.
 .PP
-Normally, there is no need to call this function; QToolTip takes care of showing and hiding the tips as the user moves the mouse.
-.SH "bool QToolTip::isGloballyEnabled ()\fC [static]\fR"
+Normally, there is no need to call this function; TQToolTip takes care of showing and hiding the tips as the user moves the mouse.
+.SH "bool TQToolTip::isGloballyEnabled ()\fC [static]\fR"
 Returns whether tool tips are enabled globally.
 .PP
 See also setGloballyEnabled().
-.SH "void QToolTip::maybeTip ( const QPoint & p )\fC [pure virtual protected]\fR"
-This pure virtual function is half of the most versatile interface QToolTip offers.
+.SH "void TQToolTip::maybeTip ( const QPoint & p )\fC [pure virtual protected]\fR"
+This pure virtual function is half of the most versatile interface TQToolTip offers.
 .PP
-It is called when there is a possibility that a tool tip should be shown and must decide whether there is a tool tip for the point \fIp\fR in the widget that this QToolTip object relates to. If so, maybeTip() must call tip() with the rectangle the tip applies to, the tip's text and optionally the QToolTipGroup details and the geometry in screen coordinates.
+It is called when there is a possibility that a tool tip should be shown and must decide whether there is a tool tip for the point \fIp\fR in the widget that this TQToolTip object relates to. If so, maybeTip() must call tip() with the rectangle the tip applies to, the tip's text and optionally the TQToolTipGroup details and the geometry in screen coordinates.
 .PP
 \fIp\fR is given in that widget's local coordinates. Most maybeTip() implementations will be of the form:
 .PP
@@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ It is called when there is a possibility that a tool tip should be shown and mus
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-The first argument to tip() (a rectangle) must encompass \fIp\fR, i.e. the tip must apply to the current mouse position; otherwise QToolTip's operation is undefined.
+The first argument to tip() (a rectangle) must encompass \fIp\fR, i.e. the tip must apply to the current mouse position; otherwise TQToolTip's operation is undefined.
 .PP
 Note that the tip will disappear once the mouse moves outside the rectangle you give to tip(), and will not reappear if the mouse moves back in: maybeTip() is called again instead.
 .PP
@@ -261,75 +261,75 @@ See also tip().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l helpsystem/tooltip.cpp and tooltip/tooltip.cpp.
-.SH "QPalette QToolTip::palette ()\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "QPalette TQToolTip::palette ()\fC [static]\fR"
 Returns the palette common to all tool tips.
 .PP
 See also setPalette().
-.SH "TQWidget * QToolTip::parentWidget () const"
-Returns the widget this QToolTip applies to.
+.SH "TQWidget * TQToolTip::parentWidget () const"
+Returns the widget this TQToolTip applies to.
 .PP
 The tool tip is destroyed automatically when the parent widget is destroyed.
 .PP
 See also group().
-.SH "void QToolTip::remove ( TQWidget * widget )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolTip::remove ( TQWidget * widget )\fC [static]\fR"
 Removes the tool tip from \fIwidget\fR.
 .PP
 If there is more than one tool tip on \fIwidget\fR, only the one covering the entire widget is removed.
-.SH "void QToolTip::remove ( TQWidget * widget, const QRect & rect )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolTip::remove ( TQWidget * widget, const QRect & rect )\fC [static]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Removes any tool tip for \fIrect\fR from \fIwidget\fR.
 .PP
 If there is more than one tool tip on \fIwidget\fR, only the one covering rectangle \fIrect\fR is removed.
-.SH "void QToolTip::setEnabled ( bool enable )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolTip::setEnabled ( bool enable )\fC [static]\fR"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-.SH "void QToolTip::setFont ( const QFont & font )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolTip::setFont ( const QFont & font )\fC [static]\fR"
 Sets the font for all tool tips to \fIfont\fR.
 .PP
 See also font().
-.SH "void QToolTip::setGloballyEnabled ( bool enable )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolTip::setGloballyEnabled ( bool enable )\fC [static]\fR"
 If \fIenable\fR is TRUE sets all tool tips to be enabled (shown when needed); if \fIenable\fR is FALSE sets all tool tips to be disabled (never shown).
 .PP
 By default, tool tips are enabled. Note that this function affects all tool tips in the entire application.
 .PP
-See also QToolTipGroup::enabled.
-.SH "void QToolTip::setPalette ( const QPalette & palette )\fC [static]\fR"
+See also TQToolTipGroup::enabled.
+.SH "void TQToolTip::setPalette ( const QPalette & palette )\fC [static]\fR"
 Sets the palette for all tool tips to \fIpalette\fR.
 .PP
 See also palette().
-.SH "void QToolTip::setWakeUpDelay ( int i )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolTip::setWakeUpDelay ( int i )\fC [static]\fR"
 Sets the wakeup delay for all tooltips to \fIi\fR milliseconds.
-.SH "TQString QToolTip::textFor ( TQWidget * widget, const QPoint & pos = QPoint ( ) )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "TQString TQToolTip::textFor ( TQWidget * widget, const QPoint & pos = QPoint ( ) )\fC [static]\fR"
 Returns the tool tip text for \fIwidget\fR at position \fIpos\fR, or TQString::null if there is no tool tip for the given widget and position.
-.SH "void QToolTip::tip ( const QRect & rect, const TQString & text )\fC [protected]\fR"
-Immediately pops up a tip saying \fItext\fR and removes the tip once the cursor moves out of rectangle \fIrect\fR (which is given in the coordinate system of the widget this QToolTip relates to).
+.SH "void TQToolTip::tip ( const QRect & rect, const TQString & text )\fC [protected]\fR"
+Immediately pops up a tip saying \fItext\fR and removes the tip once the cursor moves out of rectangle \fIrect\fR (which is given in the coordinate system of the widget this TQToolTip relates to).
 .PP
 The tip will not reappear if the cursor moves back; your maybeTip() must reinstate it each time.
-.SH "void QToolTip::tip ( const QRect & rect, const TQString & text, const TQString & groupText )\fC [protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolTip::tip ( const QRect & rect, const TQString & text, const TQString & groupText )\fC [protected]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Immediately pops up a tip saying \fItext\fR and removes that tip once the cursor moves out of rectangle \fIrect\fR (which is given in the coordinate system of the widget this QToolTip relates to). \fIgroupText\fR is the text emitted from the group.
+Immediately pops up a tip saying \fItext\fR and removes that tip once the cursor moves out of rectangle \fIrect\fR (which is given in the coordinate system of the widget this TQToolTip relates to). \fIgroupText\fR is the text emitted from the group.
 .PP
 The tip will not reappear if the cursor moves back; your maybeTip() must reinstate it each time.
-.SH "void QToolTip::tip ( const QRect & rect, const TQString & text, const QRect & geometry )\fC [protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolTip::tip ( const QRect & rect, const TQString & text, const QRect & geometry )\fC [protected]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Immediately pops up a tip within the rectangle \fIgeometry\fR, saying \fItext\fR and removes the tip once the cursor moves out of rectangle \fIrect\fR. Both rectangles are given in the coordinate system of the widget this QToolTip relates to.
+Immediately pops up a tip within the rectangle \fIgeometry\fR, saying \fItext\fR and removes the tip once the cursor moves out of rectangle \fIrect\fR. Both rectangles are given in the coordinate system of the widget this TQToolTip relates to.
 .PP
 The tip will not reappear if the cursor moves back; your maybeTip() must reinstate it each time.
 .PP
 If the tip does not fit inside \fIgeometry\fR, the tip expands.
-.SH "void QToolTip::tip ( const QRect & rect, const TQString & text, const TQString & groupText, const QRect & geometry )\fC [protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolTip::tip ( const QRect & rect, const TQString & text, const TQString & groupText, const QRect & geometry )\fC [protected]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Immediately pops up a tip within the rectangle \fIgeometry\fR, saying \fItext\fR and removes the tip once the cursor moves out of rectangle \fIrect\fR. \fIgroupText\fR is the text emitted from the group. Both rectangles are given in the coordinate system of the widget this QToolTip relates to.
+Immediately pops up a tip within the rectangle \fIgeometry\fR, saying \fItext\fR and removes the tip once the cursor moves out of rectangle \fIrect\fR. \fIgroupText\fR is the text emitted from the group. Both rectangles are given in the coordinate system of the widget this TQToolTip relates to.
 .PP
 The tip will not reappear if the cursor moves back; your maybeTip() must reinstate it each time.
 .PP
 If the tip does not fit inside \fIgeometry\fR, the tip expands.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqtooltip.html
+.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqtooltip.html
 .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html
 .SH COPYRIGHT
 Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com.  See the
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtooltipgroup.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtooltipgroup.3qt
index 64f9d45b0..e42763240 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtooltipgroup.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtooltipgroup.3qt
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 '\" t
-.TH QToolTipGroup 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
+.TH TQToolTipGroup 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
 .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.  See the
 .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license
 .\" statement.
@@ -7,19 +7,19 @@
 .ad l
 .nh
 .SH NAME
-QToolTipGroup \- Collects tool tips into related groups
+TQToolTipGroup \- Collects tool tips into related groups
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fC#include <ntqtooltip.h>\fR
+\fC#include <tqtooltip.h>\fR
 .PP
 Inherits TQObject.
 .PP
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQToolTipGroup\fR ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQToolTipGroup\fR ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fB~QToolTipGroup\fR ()"
+.BI "\fB~TQToolTipGroup\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "bool \fBdelay\fR () const"
@@ -56,15 +56,15 @@ Inherits TQObject.
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The QToolTipGroup class collects tool tips into related groups.
+The TQToolTipGroup class collects tool tips into related groups.
 .PP
-Tool tips can display \fItwo\fR texts: one in the tip and (optionally) one that is typically in a status bar. QToolTipGroup provides a way to link tool tips to this status bar.
+Tool tips can display \fItwo\fR texts: one in the tip and (optionally) one that is typically in a status bar. TQToolTipGroup provides a way to link tool tips to this status bar.
 .PP
-QToolTipGroup has practically no API; it is only used as an argument to QToolTip's member functions, for example like this:
+TQToolTipGroup has practically no API; it is only used as an argument to TQToolTip's member functions, for example like this:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        QToolTipGroup * grp = new QToolTipGroup( this, "tool tip relay" );
+        TQToolTipGroup * grp = new TQToolTipGroup( this, "tool tip relay" );
 .br
         connect( grp, TQ_SIGNAL(showTip(const TQString&)),
 .br
@@ -74,11 +74,11 @@ QToolTipGroup has practically no API; it is only used as an argument to QToolTip
 .br
                  myLabel, TQ_SLOT(clear()) );
 .br
-        QToolTip::add( giraffeButton, "feed giraffe",
+        TQToolTip::add( giraffeButton, "feed giraffe",
 .br
                        grp, "Give the giraffe a meal" );
 .br
-        QToolTip::add( gorillaButton, "feed gorilla",
+        TQToolTip::add( gorillaButton, "feed gorilla",
 .br
                        grp, "Give the gorilla a meal" );
 .br
@@ -90,25 +90,25 @@ Deleting a tool tip group removes the tool tips in it.
 .PP
 See also Help System.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "QToolTipGroup::QToolTipGroup ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
+.SH "TQToolTipGroup::TQToolTipGroup ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 Constructs a tool tip group called \fIname\fR, with parent \fIparent\fR.
-.SH "QToolTipGroup::~QToolTipGroup ()"
+.SH "TQToolTipGroup::~TQToolTipGroup ()"
 Destroys this tool tip group and all tool tips in it.
-.SH "bool QToolTipGroup::delay () const"
+.SH "bool TQToolTipGroup::delay () const"
 Returns TRUE if the display of the group text is delayed; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "delay" property for details.
-.SH "bool QToolTipGroup::enabled () const"
+.SH "bool TQToolTipGroup::enabled () const"
 Returns TRUE if tool tips in the group are enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "enabled" property for details.
-.SH "void QToolTipGroup::removeTip ()\fC [signal]\fR"
-This signal is emitted when a tool tip in this group is hidden. See the QToolTipGroup documentation for an example of use.
+.SH "void TQToolTipGroup::removeTip ()\fC [signal]\fR"
+This signal is emitted when a tool tip in this group is hidden. See the TQToolTipGroup documentation for an example of use.
 .PP
 See also showTip().
 .PP
 Example: helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp.
-.SH "void QToolTipGroup::setDelay ( bool )\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolTipGroup::setDelay ( bool )\fC [slot]\fR"
 Sets whether the display of the group text is delayed. See the "delay" property for details.
-.SH "void QToolTipGroup::setEnabled ( bool )\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolTipGroup::setEnabled ( bool )\fC [slot]\fR"
 Sets whether tool tips in the group are enabled. See the "enabled" property for details.
-.SH "void QToolTipGroup::showTip ( const TQString & longText )\fC [signal]\fR"
+.SH "void TQToolTipGroup::showTip ( const TQString & longText )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when one of the tool tips in the group is displayed. \fIlongText\fR is the extra text for the displayed tool tip.
 .PP
 See also removeTip().
@@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ This property's default is TRUE.
 Set this property's value with setEnabled() and get this property's value with enabled().
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/qtooltipgroup.html
+.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqtooltipgroup.html
 .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html
 .SH COPYRIGHT
 Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com.  See the
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqvariant.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqvariant.3qt
index 460c44083..b1b255170 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqvariant.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqvariant.3qt
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ QVariant \- Acts like a union for the most common TQt data types
 .BI "\fBQVariant\fR ( const QRect & val )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQVariant\fR ( const QSize & val )"
+.BI "\fBQVariant\fR ( const TQSize & val )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fBQVariant\fR ( const TQColor & val )"
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ QVariant \- Acts like a union for the most common TQt data types
 .BI "\fBQVariant\fR ( double val )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQVariant\fR ( QSizePolicy val )"
+.BI "\fBQVariant\fR ( TQSizePolicy val )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "QVariant & \fBoperator=\fR ( const QVariant & variant )"
@@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ QVariant \- Acts like a union for the most common TQt data types
 .BI "const QRect \fBtoRect\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "const QSize \fBtoSize\fR () const"
+.BI "const TQSize \fBtoSize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "const TQColor \fBtoColor\fR () const"
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ QVariant \- Acts like a union for the most common TQt data types
 .BI "const TQMap<TQString, QVariant> \fBtoMap\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSizePolicy \fBtoSizePolicy\fR () const"
+.BI "TQSizePolicy \fBtoSizePolicy\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQValueListConstIterator<TQString> stringListBegin () const  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
@@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ QVariant \- Acts like a union for the most common TQt data types
 .BI "QRect & \fBasRect\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize & \fBasSize\fR ()"
+.BI "TQSize & \fBasSize\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQColor & \fBasColor\fR ()"
@@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ QVariant \- Acts like a union for the most common TQt data types
 .BI "TQMap<TQString, QVariant> & \fBasMap\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSizePolicy & \fBasSizePolicy\fR ()"
+.BI "TQSizePolicy & \fBasSizePolicy\fR ()"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SS "Static Public Members"
@@ -530,9 +530,9 @@ This enum type defines the types of variable that a QVariant can contain.
 .TP
 \fCQVariant::Region\fR - a QRegion
 .TP
-\fCQVariant::Size\fR - a QSize
+\fCQVariant::Size\fR - a TQSize
 .TP
-\fCQVariant::SizePolicy\fR - a QSizePolicy
+\fCQVariant::SizePolicy\fR - a TQSizePolicy
 .TP
 \fCQVariant::String\fR - a TQString
 .TP
@@ -552,7 +552,7 @@ Constructs an invalid variant.
 Constructs a new variant with a boolean value, \fIval\fR. The integer argument is a dummy, necessary for compatibility with some compilers.
 .SH "QVariant::QVariant ( double val )"
 Constructs a new variant with a floating point value, \fIval\fR.
-.SH "QVariant::QVariant ( QSizePolicy val )"
+.SH "QVariant::QVariant ( TQSizePolicy val )"
 Constructs a new variant with a size policy value, \fIval\fR.
 .SH "QVariant::QVariant ( const QVariant & p )"
 Constructs a copy of the variant, \fIp\fR, passed as the argument to this constructor. Usually this is a deep copy, but a shallow copy is made if the stored data type is explicitly shared, as e.g. TQImage is.
@@ -584,7 +584,7 @@ Constructs a new variant with a brush value, \fIval\fR.
 Constructs a new variant with a point value, \fIval\fR.
 .SH "QVariant::QVariant ( const QRect & val )"
 Constructs a new variant with a rect value, \fIval\fR.
-.SH "QVariant::QVariant ( const QSize & val )"
+.SH "QVariant::QVariant ( const TQSize & val )"
 Constructs a new variant with a size value, \fIval\fR.
 .SH "QVariant::QVariant ( const TQColor & val )"
 Constructs a new variant with a color value, \fIval\fR.
@@ -808,14 +808,14 @@ Tries to convert the variant to hold a QRegion value. If that is not possible th
 Returns a reference to the stored region.
 .PP
 See also toRegion().
-.SH "QSize & QVariant::asSize ()"
-Tries to convert the variant to hold a QSize value. If that is not possible the variant is set to an invalid size.
+.SH "TQSize & QVariant::asSize ()"
+Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQSize value. If that is not possible the variant is set to an invalid size.
 .PP
 Returns a reference to the stored size.
 .PP
-See also toSize() and QSize::isValid().
-.SH "QSizePolicy & QVariant::asSizePolicy ()"
-Tries to convert the variant to hold a QSizePolicy value. If that fails, the variant is set to an arbitrary (valid) size policy.
+See also toSize() and TQSize::isValid().
+.SH "TQSizePolicy & QVariant::asSizePolicy ()"
+Tries to convert the variant to hold a TQSizePolicy value. If that fails, the variant is set to an arbitrary (valid) size policy.
 .SH "TQString & QVariant::asString ()"
 Tries to convert the variant to hold a string value. If that is not possible the variant is set to an empty string.
 .PP
@@ -1071,12 +1071,12 @@ See also asRect().
 Returns the variant as a QRegion if the variant has type() Region; otherwise returns an empty QRegion.
 .PP
 See also asRegion().
-.SH "const QSize QVariant::toSize () const"
-Returns the variant as a QSize if the variant has type() Size; otherwise returns an invalid size.
+.SH "const TQSize QVariant::toSize () const"
+Returns the variant as a TQSize if the variant has type() Size; otherwise returns an invalid size.
 .PP
 See also asSize().
-.SH "QSizePolicy QVariant::toSizePolicy () const"
-Returns the variant as a QSizePolicy if the variant has type() SizePolicy; otherwise returns an undefined (but legal) size policy.
+.SH "TQSizePolicy QVariant::toSizePolicy () const"
+Returns the variant as a TQSizePolicy if the variant has type() SizePolicy; otherwise returns an undefined (but legal) size policy.
 .SH "const TQString QVariant::toString () const"
 Returns the variant as a TQString if the variant can be cast to String, otherwise returns TQString::null.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqwhatsthis.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqwhatsthis.3qt
index fb6d74365..5696d4e6f 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqwhatsthis.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqwhatsthis.3qt
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ Inherits Qt.
 .BI "TQString \fBtextFor\fR ( TQWidget * w, const QPoint & pos = QPoint ( ), bool includeParents = FALSE )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QToolButton * \fBwhatsThisButton\fR ( TQWidget * parent )"
+.BI "TQToolButton * \fBwhatsThisButton\fR ( TQWidget * parent )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBenterWhatsThisMode\fR ()"
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ QWhatsThis provides a single window with an explanatory text that pops up when t
 .PP
 (Note that if there is an accelerator for Shift+F1, this mechanism will not work.)
 .PP
-To add "What's this?" text to a widget you simply call QWhatsThis::add() for the widget. For example, to assign text to a menu item, call QMenuData::setWhatsThis(); for a global accelerator key, call QAccel::setWhatsThis() and If you're using actions, use QAction::setWhatsThis().
+To add "What's this?" text to a widget you simply call QWhatsThis::add() for the widget. For example, to assign text to a menu item, call TQMenuData::setWhatsThis(); for a global accelerator key, call QAccel::setWhatsThis() and If you're using actions, use TQAction::setWhatsThis().
 .PP
 The text can be either rich text or plain text. If you specify a rich text formatted string, it will be rendered using the default stylesheet. This makes it possible to embed images. See TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet() for details.
 .PP
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ An alternative way to enter "What's this?" mode is to use the ready-made tool ba
 .PP
 </center>
 .PP
-If you are using QMainWindow you can also use the QMainWindow::whatsThis() slot to invoke the mode from a menu item.
+If you are using TQMainWindow you can also use the TQMainWindow::whatsThis() slot to invoke the mode from a menu item.
 .PP
 For more control you can create a dedicated QWhatsThis object for a special widget. By subclassing and reimplementing QWhatsThis::text() it is possible to have different help texts, depending on the position of the mouse click. By reimplementing QWhatsThis::clicked() it is possible to have hyperlinks inside the help texts.
 .PP
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ If you wish to control the "What's this?" behavior of a widget manually see TQWi
 .PP
 The What's This object can be removed using QWhatsThis::remove(), although this is rarely necessary because it is automatically removed when the widget is destroyed.
 .PP
-See also QToolTip and Help System.
+See also TQToolTip and Help System.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "QWhatsThis::QWhatsThis ( TQWidget * widget )"
 Constructs a dynamic "What's this?" object for \fIwidget\fR. The object is deleted when the \fIwidget\fR is destroyed.
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ See also enterWhatsThisMode() and leaveWhatsThisMode().
 .SH "void QWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode ( const TQString & text = TQString::null, const QPoint & pos = QCursor::pos ( ), TQWidget * w = 0 )\fC [static]\fR"
 Leaves "What's this?" question mode.
 .PP
-This function is used internally by widgets that support TQWidget::customWhatsThis(); applications do not usually call it. An example of such a widget is QPopupMenu: menus still work normally in "What's this?" mode but also provide help texts for individual menu items.
+This function is used internally by widgets that support TQWidget::customWhatsThis(); applications do not usually call it. An example of such a widget is TQPopupMenu: menus still work normally in "What's this?" mode but also provide help texts for individual menu items.
 .PP
 If \fItext\fR is not TQString::null, a "What's this?" help window is displayed at the global screen position \fIpos\fR. If widget \fIw\fR is not 0 and has its own dedicated QWhatsThis object, this object will receive clicked() messages when the user clicks on hyperlinks inside the help text.
 .PP
@@ -170,8 +170,8 @@ Returns the what's this text for widget \fIw\fR or TQString::null if there is no
 If \fIincludeParents\fR is TRUE, parent widgets are taken into consideration as well when looking for what's this help text.
 .PP
 See also add().
-.SH "QToolButton * QWhatsThis::whatsThisButton ( TQWidget * parent )\fC [static]\fR"
-Creates a QToolButton preconfigured to enter "What's this?" mode when clicked. You will often use this with a tool bar as \fIparent\fR:
+.SH "TQToolButton * QWhatsThis::whatsThisButton ( TQWidget * parent )\fC [static]\fR"
+Creates a TQToolButton preconfigured to enter "What's this?" mode when clicked. You will often use this with a tool bar as \fIparent\fR:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqwidget.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqwidget.3qt
index 7051e7c3c..0590cf292 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqwidget.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqwidget.3qt
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ TQWidget \- The base class of all user interface objects
 .PP
 Inherits TQObject and QPaintDevice.
 .PP
-Inherited by QButton, QFrame, QDialog, QComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView, TQDateTimeEditBase, TQDateTimeEdit, QDesktopWidget, QDial, QDockArea, QGLWidget, QHeader, QMainWindow, QMotifWidget, QNPWidget, QScrollBar, QSizeGrip, QSlider, QSpinBox, QSplashScreen, QStatusBar, QTabBar, QTabWidget, QWorkspace, and QXtWidget.
+Inherited by QButton, QFrame, QDialog, QComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView, TQDateTimeEditBase, TQDateTimeEdit, QDesktopWidget, QDial, QDockArea, QGLWidget, QHeader, TQMainWindow, QMotifWidget, QNPWidget, QScrollBar, TQSizeGrip, QSlider, QSpinBox, QSplashScreen, TQStatusBar, QTabBar, QTabWidget, TQWorkspace, and QXtWidget.
 .PP
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
@@ -75,10 +75,10 @@ Inherited by QButton, QFrame, QDialog, QComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView, TQD
 .BI "QPoint \fBpos\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBframeSize\fR () const"
+.BI "TQSize \fBframeSize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBsize\fR () const"
+.BI "TQSize \fBsize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBwidth\fR () const"
@@ -96,10 +96,10 @@ Inherited by QButton, QFrame, QDialog, QComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView, TQD
 .BI "QRegion \fBchildrenRegion\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBminimumSize\fR () const"
+.BI "TQSize \fBminimumSize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBmaximumSize\fR () const"
+.BI "TQSize \fBmaximumSize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBminimumWidth\fR () const"
@@ -114,13 +114,13 @@ Inherited by QButton, QFrame, QDialog, QComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView, TQD
 .BI "int \fBmaximumHeight\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBsetMinimumSize\fR ( const QSize & )"
+.BI "void \fBsetMinimumSize\fR ( const TQSize & )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetMinimumSize\fR ( int minw, int minh )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBsetMaximumSize\fR ( const QSize & )"
+.BI "void \fBsetMaximumSize\fR ( const TQSize & )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetMaximumSize\fR ( int maxw, int maxh )"
@@ -138,25 +138,25 @@ Inherited by QButton, QFrame, QDialog, QComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView, TQD
 .BI "void \fBsetMaximumHeight\fR ( int maxh )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBsizeIncrement\fR () const"
+.BI "TQSize \fBsizeIncrement\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBsetSizeIncrement\fR ( const QSize & )"
+.BI "void \fBsetSizeIncrement\fR ( const TQSize & )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetSizeIncrement\fR ( int w, int h )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBbaseSize\fR () const"
+.BI "TQSize \fBbaseSize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBsetBaseSize\fR ( const QSize & )"
+.BI "void \fBsetBaseSize\fR ( const TQSize & )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBsetBaseSize\fR ( int basew, int baseh )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBsetFixedSize\fR ( const QSize & s )"
+.BI "void \fBsetFixedSize\fR ( const TQSize & s )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBsetFixedSize\fR ( int w, int h )"
@@ -402,19 +402,19 @@ Inherited by QButton, QFrame, QDialog, QComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView, TQD
 .BI "void \fBsetWindowState\fR ( uint windowState )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBminimumSizeHint\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBminimumSizeHint\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSizePolicy \fBsizePolicy\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSizePolicy \fBsizePolicy\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBsetSizePolicy\fR ( QSizePolicy )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBsetSizePolicy\fR ( TQSizePolicy )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBsetSizePolicy\fR ( QSizePolicy::SizeType hor, QSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE )"
+.BI "void \fBsetSizePolicy\fR ( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual int \fBheightForWidth\fR ( int w ) const"
@@ -624,7 +624,7 @@ Inherited by QButton, QFrame, QDialog, QComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView, TQD
 .BI "virtual void \fBresize\fR ( int w, int h )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBresize\fR ( const QSize & )"
+.BI "void \fBresize\fR ( const TQSize & )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetGeometry\fR ( int x, int y, int w, int h )"
@@ -669,7 +669,7 @@ Inherited by QButton, QFrame, QDialog, QComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView, TQD
 .BI "BackgroundOrigin \fBbackgroundOrigin\fR - the origin of the widget's background"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBbaseSize\fR - the base size of the widget"
+.BI "TQSize \fBbaseSize\fR - the base size of the widget"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQString \fBcaption\fR - the window caption (title)"
@@ -708,7 +708,7 @@ Inherited by QButton, QFrame, QDialog, QComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView, TQD
 .BI "QRect \fBframeGeometry\fR - geometry of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame  \fI(read " "only" ")\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBframeSize\fR - the size of the widget including any window frame  \fI(read " "only" ")\fR"
+.BI "TQSize \fBframeSize\fR - the size of the widget including any window frame  \fI(read " "only" ")\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "bool \fBfullScreen\fR - whether the widget is full screen  \fI(read " "only" ")\fR"
@@ -756,7 +756,7 @@ Inherited by QButton, QFrame, QDialog, QComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView, TQD
 .BI "int \fBmaximumHeight\fR - the widget's maximum height"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBmaximumSize\fR - the widget's maximum size"
+.BI "TQSize \fBmaximumSize\fR - the widget's maximum size"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBmaximumWidth\fR - the widget's maximum width"
@@ -771,10 +771,10 @@ Inherited by QButton, QFrame, QDialog, QComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView, TQD
 .BI "int \fBminimumHeight\fR - the widget's minimum height"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBminimumSize\fR - the widget's minimum size"
+.BI "TQSize \fBminimumSize\fR - the widget's minimum size"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBminimumSizeHint\fR - the recommended minimum size for the widget  \fI(read " "only" ")\fR"
+.BI "TQSize \fBminimumSizeHint\fR - the recommended minimum size for the widget  \fI(read " "only" ")\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBminimumWidth\fR - the widget's minimum width"
@@ -813,16 +813,16 @@ Inherited by QButton, QFrame, QDialog, QComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView, TQD
 .BI "bool \fBshown\fR - whether the widget is shown"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBsize\fR - the size of the widget excluding any window frame"
+.BI "TQSize \fBsize\fR - the size of the widget excluding any window frame"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBsizeHint\fR - the recommended size for the widget  \fI(read " "only" ")\fR"
+.BI "TQSize \fBsizeHint\fR - the recommended size for the widget  \fI(read " "only" ")\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSize \fBsizeIncrement\fR - the size increment of the widget"
+.BI "TQSize \fBsizeIncrement\fR - the size increment of the widget"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "QSizePolicy \fBsizePolicy\fR - the default layout behavior of the widget"
+.BI "TQSizePolicy \fBsizePolicy\fR - the default layout behavior of the widget"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "bool \fBunderMouse\fR - whether the widget is under the mouse cursor  \fI(read " "only" ")\fR"
@@ -998,7 +998,7 @@ The TQWidget class is the base class of all user interface objects.
 .PP
 The widget is the atom of the user interface: it receives mouse, keyboard and other events from the window system, and paints a representation of itself on the screen. Every widget is rectangular, and they are sorted in a Z-order. A widget is clipped by its parent and by the widgets in front of it.
 .PP
-A widget that isn't embedded in a parent widget is called a top-level widget. Usually, top-level widgets are windows with a frame and a title bar (although it is also possible to create top-level widgets without such decoration if suitable widget flags are used). In Qt, QMainWindow and the various subclasses of QDialog are the most common top-level windows.
+A widget that isn't embedded in a parent widget is called a top-level widget. Usually, top-level widgets are windows with a frame and a title bar (although it is also possible to create top-level widgets without such decoration if suitable widget flags are used). In Qt, TQMainWindow and the various subclasses of QDialog are the most common top-level windows.
 .PP
 A widget without a parent widget is always a top-level widget.
 .PP
@@ -1182,7 +1182,7 @@ Returns the origin of the widget's background. See the "backgroundOrigin" proper
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l themes/metal.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
-.SH "QSize TQWidget::baseSize () const"
+.SH "TQSize TQWidget::baseSize () const"
 Returns the base size of the widget. See the "baseSize" property for details.
 .SH "TQString TQWidget::caption () const"
 Returns the window caption (title). See the "caption" property for details.
@@ -1459,7 +1459,7 @@ Examples:
 Same as paletteForegroundColor()
 .SH "QRect TQWidget::frameGeometry () const"
 Returns geometry of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame. See the "frameGeometry" property for details.
-.SH "QSize TQWidget::frameSize () const"
+.SH "TQSize TQWidget::frameSize () const"
 Returns the size of the widget including any window frame. See the "frameSize" property for details.
 .SH "const QRect & TQWidget::geometry () const"
 Returns the geometry of the widget relative to its parent and excluding the window frame. See the "geometry" property for details.
@@ -1514,7 +1514,7 @@ Returns the preferred height for this widget, given the width \fIw\fR. The defau
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR Does not look at the widget's layout.
 .PP
-Reimplemented in QMenuBar and TQTextEdit.
+Reimplemented in TQMenuBar and TQTextEdit.
 .SH "void TQWidget::hide ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Hides the widget.
 .PP
@@ -1525,7 +1525,7 @@ See also hideEvent(), hidden, show(), showMinimized(), visible, and close().
 Examples:
 .)l mdi/application.cpp, popup/popup.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, webbrowser/mainwindow.ui.h, and xform/xform.cpp.
 .PP
-Reimplemented in QMenuBar.
+Reimplemented in TQMenuBar.
 .SH "void TQWidget::hideEvent ( QHideEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget hide events.
 .PP
@@ -1707,7 +1707,7 @@ Same as mapToGlobal() if the widget has no parent.
 See also mapFromParent(), mapTo(), mapToGlobal(), and underMouse.
 .SH "int TQWidget::maximumHeight () const"
 Returns the widget's maximum height. See the "maximumHeight" property for details.
-.SH "QSize TQWidget::maximumSize () const"
+.SH "TQSize TQWidget::maximumSize () const"
 Returns the widget's maximum size. See the "maximumSize" property for details.
 .SH "int TQWidget::maximumWidth () const"
 Returns the widget's maximum width. See the "maximumWidth" property for details.
@@ -1721,9 +1721,9 @@ Use the QPaintDeviceMetrics class instead.
 Returns the currently set micro focus hint for this widget. See the "microFocusHint" property for details.
 .SH "int TQWidget::minimumHeight () const"
 Returns the widget's minimum height. See the "minimumHeight" property for details.
-.SH "QSize TQWidget::minimumSize () const"
+.SH "TQSize TQWidget::minimumSize () const"
 Returns the widget's minimum size. See the "minimumSize" property for details.
-.SH "QSize TQWidget::minimumSizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize TQWidget::minimumSizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the recommended minimum size for the widget. See the "minimumSizeHint" property for details.
 .PP
 Reimplemented in QLineEdit.
@@ -1755,7 +1755,7 @@ See also mouseTracking, mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClick
 Examples:
 .)l aclock/aclock.cpp, drawlines/connect.cpp, iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp, life/life.cpp, popup/popup.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, and scribble/scribble.cpp.
 .PP
-Reimplemented in QSizeGrip.
+Reimplemented in TQSizeGrip.
 .SH "void TQWidget::mousePressEvent ( QMouseEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This event handler, for event \fIe\fR, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse press events for the widget.
 .PP
@@ -1768,7 +1768,7 @@ See also mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), event()
 Examples:
 .)l biff/biff.cpp, drawlines/connect.cpp, iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp, life/life.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, and tooltip/tooltip.cpp.
 .PP
-Reimplemented in QSizeGrip.
+Reimplemented in TQSizeGrip.
 .SH "void TQWidget::mouseReleaseEvent ( QMouseEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This event handler, for event \fIe\fR, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive mouse release events for the widget.
 .PP
@@ -1812,7 +1812,7 @@ See also event(), repaint(), update(), QPainter, QPixmap, and QPaintEvent.
 Examples:
 .)l drawlines/connect.cpp, forever/forever.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, splitter/splitter.cpp, t8/cannon.cpp, and t9/cannon.cpp.
 .PP
-Reimplemented in QButton, QFrame, QGLWidget, QSizeGrip, QStatusBar, and QTabBar.
+Reimplemented in QButton, QFrame, QGLWidget, TQSizeGrip, TQStatusBar, and QTabBar.
 .SH "const QPalette & TQWidget::palette () const"
 Returns the widget's palette. See the "palette" property for details.
 .SH "const TQColor & TQWidget::paletteBackgroundColor () const"
@@ -1931,12 +1931,12 @@ A convenience version of reparent that does not take widget flags as argument.
 Calls reparent(\fIparent\fR, getWFlags() & ~WType_Mask, \fIp\fR, \fIshowIt\fR).
 .SH "void TQWidget::resetInputContext ()\fC [protected]\fR"
 This function is called when the user finishes input composition, e.g. changes focus to another widget, moves the cursor, etc.
-.SH "void TQWidget::resize ( const QSize & )\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQWidget::resize ( const TQSize & )\fC [slot]\fR"
 Sets the size of the widget excluding any window frame. See the "size" property for details.
 .SH "void TQWidget::resize ( int w, int h )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-This corresponds to resize( QSize(\fIw\fR, \fIh\fR) ).
+This corresponds to resize( TQSize(\fIw\fR, \fIh\fR) ).
 .SH "void TQWidget::resizeEvent ( QResizeEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget resize events. When resizeEvent() is called, the widget already has its new geometry. The old size is accessible through QResizeEvent::oldSize().
 .PP
@@ -2001,12 +2001,12 @@ Sets the origin of the widget's background. See the "backgroundOrigin" property
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. Use setPaletteBackgroundPixmap() or setErasePixmap() instead.
 .PP
 Example: desktop/desktop.cpp.
-.SH "void TQWidget::setBaseSize ( const QSize & )"
+.SH "void TQWidget::setBaseSize ( const TQSize & )"
 Sets the base size of the widget. See the "baseSize" property for details.
 .SH "void TQWidget::setBaseSize ( int basew, int baseh )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-This corresponds to setBaseSize( QSize(\fIbasew\fR, \fIbaseh\fR) ). Sets the widgets base size to width \fIbasew\fR and height \fIbaseh\fR.
+This corresponds to setBaseSize( TQSize(\fIbasew\fR, \fIbaseh\fR) ). Sets the widgets base size to width \fIbasew\fR and height \fIbaseh\fR.
 .SH "void TQWidget::setCaption ( const TQString & )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Sets the window caption (title). See the "caption" property for details.
 .SH "void TQWidget::setCursor ( const QCursor & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -2036,7 +2036,7 @@ See also sizeHint, minimumSize, maximumSize, and setFixedSize().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l fonts/simple-qfont-demo/viewer.cpp, layout/layout.cpp, qdir/qdir.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-.SH "void TQWidget::setFixedSize ( const QSize & s )"
+.SH "void TQWidget::setFixedSize ( const TQSize & s )"
 Sets both the minimum and maximum sizes of the widget to \fIs\fR, thereby preventing it from ever growing or shrinking.
 .PP
 See also maximumSize and minimumSize.
@@ -2132,12 +2132,12 @@ Note that this effect can be slow if the region is particularly complex.
 See also clearMask().
 .SH "void TQWidget::setMaximumHeight ( int maxh )"
 Sets the widget's maximum height to \fImaxh\fR. See the "maximumHeight" property for details.
-.SH "void TQWidget::setMaximumSize ( const QSize & )"
+.SH "void TQWidget::setMaximumSize ( const TQSize & )"
 Sets the widget's maximum size. See the "maximumSize" property for details.
 .SH "void TQWidget::setMaximumSize ( int maxw, int maxh )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-This function corresponds to setMaximumSize( QSize(\fImaxw\fR, \fImaxh\fR) ). Sets the maximum width to \fImaxw\fR and the maximum height to \fImaxh\fR.
+This function corresponds to setMaximumSize( TQSize(\fImaxw\fR, \fImaxh\fR) ). Sets the maximum width to \fImaxw\fR and the maximum height to \fImaxh\fR.
 .SH "void TQWidget::setMaximumWidth ( int maxw )"
 Sets the widget's maximum width to \fImaxw\fR. See the "maximumWidth" property for details.
 .SH "void TQWidget::setMicroFocusHint ( int x, int y, int width, int height, bool text = TRUE, QFont * f = 0 )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
@@ -2154,12 +2154,12 @@ The font \fIf\fR is a rendering hint to the currently active input method. If \f
 See also microFocusHint.
 .SH "void TQWidget::setMinimumHeight ( int minh )"
 Sets the widget's minimum height to \fIminh\fR. See the "minimumHeight" property for details.
-.SH "void TQWidget::setMinimumSize ( const QSize & )"
+.SH "void TQWidget::setMinimumSize ( const TQSize & )"
 Sets the widget's minimum size. See the "minimumSize" property for details.
 .SH "void TQWidget::setMinimumSize ( int minw, int minh )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-This function corresponds to setMinimumSize( QSize(minw, minh) ). Sets the minimum width to \fIminw\fR and the minimum height to \fIminh\fR.
+This function corresponds to setMinimumSize( TQSize(minw, minh) ). Sets the minimum width to \fIminw\fR and the minimum height to \fIminh\fR.
 .SH "void TQWidget::setMinimumWidth ( int minw )"
 Sets the widget's minimum width to \fIminw\fR. See the "minimumWidth" property for details.
 .SH "void TQWidget::setMouseTracking ( bool enable )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
@@ -2180,20 +2180,20 @@ Sets the background pixmap of the widget. See the "paletteBackgroundPixmap" prop
 Sets the foreground color of the widget. See the "paletteForegroundColor" property for details.
 .SH "void TQWidget::setShown ( bool show )\fC [slot]\fR"
 Sets whether the widget is shown to \fIshow\fR. See the "shown" property for details.
-.SH "void TQWidget::setSizeIncrement ( const QSize & )"
+.SH "void TQWidget::setSizeIncrement ( const TQSize & )"
 Sets the size increment of the widget. See the "sizeIncrement" property for details.
 .SH "void TQWidget::setSizeIncrement ( int w, int h )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Sets the x (width) size increment to \fIw\fR and the y (height) size increment to \fIh\fR.
-.SH "void TQWidget::setSizePolicy ( QSizePolicy )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQWidget::setSizePolicy ( TQSizePolicy )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the default layout behavior of the widget. See the "sizePolicy" property for details.
-.SH "void TQWidget::setSizePolicy ( QSizePolicy::SizeType hor, QSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE )"
+.SH "void TQWidget::setSizePolicy ( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Sets the size policy of the widget to \fIhor\fR, \fIver\fR and \fIhfw\fR (height for width).
 .PP
-See also QSizePolicy::QSizePolicy().
+See also TQSizePolicy::TQSizePolicy().
 .SH "void TQWidget::setStyle ( TQStyle * style )"
 Sets the widget's GUI style to \fIstyle\fR. Ownership of the style object is not transferred.
 .PP
@@ -2287,7 +2287,7 @@ See also showEvent(), hide(), showMinimized(), showMaximized(), showNormal(), vi
 Examples:
 .)l aclock/main.cpp, life/main.cpp, popup/popup.cpp, t1/main.cpp, t3/main.cpp, t4/main.cpp, and toplevel/options.ui.h.
 .PP
-Reimplemented in QDialog and QMenuBar.
+Reimplemented in QDialog and TQMenuBar.
 .SH "void TQWidget::showEvent ( QShowEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget show events.
 .PP
@@ -2335,15 +2335,15 @@ Calling this function only affects top-level widgets.
 See also setWindowState(), showMinimized(), showMaximized(), show(), hide(), and visible.
 .PP
 Example: mdi/application.cpp.
-.SH "QSize TQWidget::size () const"
+.SH "TQSize TQWidget::size () const"
 Returns the size of the widget excluding any window frame. See the "size" property for details.
-.SH "QSize TQWidget::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize TQWidget::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the recommended size for the widget. See the "sizeHint" property for details.
 .PP
-Reimplemented in QSizeGrip.
-.SH "QSize TQWidget::sizeIncrement () const"
+Reimplemented in TQSizeGrip.
+.SH "TQSize TQWidget::sizeIncrement () const"
 Returns the size increment of the widget. See the "sizeIncrement" property for details.
-.SH "QSizePolicy TQWidget::sizePolicy () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSizePolicy TQWidget::sizePolicy () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the default layout behavior of the widget. See the "sizePolicy" property for details.
 .SH "void TQWidget::stackUnder ( TQWidget * w )\fC [slot]\fR"
 Places the widget under \fIw\fR in the parent widget's stack.
@@ -2583,7 +2583,7 @@ This only makes a difference if the widget has a background pixmap, in which cas
 See also backgroundPixmap() and backgroundMode.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setBackgroundOrigin() and get this property's value with backgroundOrigin().
-.SH "QSize baseSize"
+.SH "TQSize baseSize"
 This property holds the base size of the widget.
 .PP
 The base size is used to calculate a proper widget size if the widget defines sizeIncrement().
@@ -2723,7 +2723,7 @@ See the Window Geometry documentation for an overview of geometry issues with to
 See also geometry, x, y, and pos.
 .PP
 Get this property's value with frameGeometry().
-.SH "QSize frameSize"
+.SH "TQSize frameSize"
 This property holds the size of the widget including any window frame.
 .PP
 Get this property's value with frameSize().
@@ -2838,7 +2838,7 @@ A top-level widget is a widget which usually has a frame and a caption (title).
 .PP
 A top-level widget can have a parent widget. It will then be grouped with its parent and deleted when the parent is deleted, minimized when the parent is minimized etc. If supported by the window manager, it will also have a common taskbar entry with its parent.
 .PP
-QDialog and QMainWindow widgets are by default top-level, even if a parent widget is specified in the constructor. This behavior is specified by the WType_TopLevel widget flag.
+QDialog and TQMainWindow widgets are by default top-level, even if a parent widget is specified in the constructor. This behavior is specified by the WType_TopLevel widget flag.
 .PP
 See also topLevelWidget(), isDialog, isModal, isPopup, isDesktop, and parentWidget().
 .PP
@@ -2861,7 +2861,7 @@ This property corresponds to maximumSize().height().
 See also maximumSize and maximumWidth.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setMaximumHeight() and get this property's value with maximumHeight().
-.SH "QSize maximumSize"
+.SH "TQSize maximumSize"
 This property holds the widget's maximum size.
 .PP
 The widget cannot be resized to a larger size than the maximum widget size.
@@ -2899,7 +2899,7 @@ This property corresponds to minimumSize().height().
 See also minimumSize and minimumWidth.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setMinimumHeight() and get this property's value with minimumHeight().
-.SH "QSize minimumSize"
+.SH "TQSize minimumSize"
 This property holds the widget's minimum size.
 .PP
 The widget cannot be resized to a smaller size than the minimum widget size. The widget's size is forced to the minimum size if the current size is smaller.
@@ -2909,7 +2909,7 @@ If you use a layout inside the widget, the minimum size will be set by the layou
 See also minimumWidth, minimumHeight, maximumSize, sizeIncrement, and QLayout::resizeMode.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setMinimumSize() and get this property's value with minimumSize().
-.SH "QSize minimumSizeHint"
+.SH "TQSize minimumSizeHint"
 This property holds the recommended minimum size for the widget.
 .PP
 If the value of this property is an invalid size, no minimum size is recommended.
@@ -2918,7 +2918,7 @@ The default implementation of minimumSizeHint() returns an invalid size if there
 .PP
 QLayout will never resize a widget to a size smaller than minimumSizeHint.
 .PP
-See also QSize::isValid(), size, minimumSize, and sizePolicy.
+See also TQSize::isValid(), size, minimumSize, and sizePolicy.
 .PP
 Get this property's value with minimumSizeHint().
 .SH "int minimumWidth"
@@ -3035,12 +3035,12 @@ If TRUE, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its ancestors beca
 See also hide(), show(), visible, isVisibleTo(), and hidden.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setShown() and get this property's value with isShown().
-.SH "QSize size"
+.SH "TQSize size"
 This property holds the size of the widget excluding any window frame.
 .PP
 When resizing, the widget, if visible, receives a resize event (resizeEvent()) immediately. If the widget is not currently visible, it is guaranteed to receive an event before it is shown.
 .PP
-The size is adjusted if it lies outside the range defined by minimumSize() and maximumSize(). Furthermore, the size is always at least QSize(1, 1). For toplevel widgets, the minimum size might be larger, depending on the window manager.
+The size is adjusted if it lies outside the range defined by minimumSize() and maximumSize(). Furthermore, the size is always at least TQSize(1, 1). For toplevel widgets, the minimum size might be larger, depending on the window manager.
 .PP
 If you want a top-level window to have a fixed size, call setResizeMode( QLayout::FreeResize ) on its layout.
 .PP
@@ -3051,17 +3051,17 @@ resize() is virtual, and all other overloaded resize() implementations in TQt ca
 See also pos, geometry, minimumSize, maximumSize, and resizeEvent().
 .PP
 Set this property's value with resize() and get this property's value with size().
-.SH "QSize sizeHint"
+.SH "TQSize sizeHint"
 This property holds the recommended size for the widget.
 .PP
 If the value of this property is an invalid size, no size is recommended.
 .PP
 The default implementation of sizeHint() returns an invalid size if there is no layout for this widget, and returns the layout's preferred size otherwise.
 .PP
-See also QSize::isValid(), minimumSizeHint, sizePolicy, minimumSize, and updateGeometry().
+See also TQSize::isValid(), minimumSizeHint, sizePolicy, minimumSize, and updateGeometry().
 .PP
 Get this property's value with sizeHint().
-.SH "QSize sizeIncrement"
+.SH "TQSize sizeIncrement"
 This property holds the size increment of the widget.
 .PP
 When the user resizes the window, the size will move in steps of sizeIncrement().width() pixels horizontally and sizeIncrement.height() pixels vertically, with baseSize() as the basis. Preferred widget sizes are for non-negative integers \fIi\fR and \fIj\fR:
@@ -3081,14 +3081,14 @@ Note that while you can set the size increment for all widgets, it only affects
 See also size, minimumSize, and maximumSize.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setSizeIncrement() and get this property's value with sizeIncrement().
-.SH "QSizePolicy sizePolicy"
+.SH "TQSizePolicy sizePolicy"
 This property holds the default layout behavior of the widget.
 .PP
 If there is a QLayout that manages this widget's children, the size policy specified by that layout is used. If there is no such QLayout, the result of this function is used.
 .PP
-The default policy is Preferred/Preferred, which means that the widget can be freely resized, but prefers to be the size sizeHint() returns. Button-like widgets set the size policy to specify that they may stretch horizontally, but are fixed vertically. The same applies to lineedit controls (such as QLineEdit, QSpinBox or an editable QComboBox) and other horizontally orientated widgets (such as QProgressBar). QToolButton's are normally square, so they allow growth in both directions. Widgets that support different directions (such as QSlider, QScrollBar or QHeader) specify stretching in the respective direction only. Widgets that can provide scrollbars (usually subclasses of QScrollView) tend to specify that they can use additional space, and that they can make do with less than sizeHint().
+The default policy is Preferred/Preferred, which means that the widget can be freely resized, but prefers to be the size sizeHint() returns. Button-like widgets set the size policy to specify that they may stretch horizontally, but are fixed vertically. The same applies to lineedit controls (such as QLineEdit, QSpinBox or an editable QComboBox) and other horizontally orientated widgets (such as QProgressBar). TQToolButton's are normally square, so they allow growth in both directions. Widgets that support different directions (such as QSlider, QScrollBar or QHeader) specify stretching in the respective direction only. Widgets that can provide scrollbars (usually subclasses of QScrollView) tend to specify that they can use additional space, and that they can make do with less than sizeHint().
 .PP
-See also sizeHint, QLayout, QSizePolicy, and updateGeometry().
+See also sizeHint, QLayout, TQSizePolicy, and updateGeometry().
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setSizePolicy() and get this property's value with sizePolicy().
 .SH "bool underMouse"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqwidgetfactory.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqwidgetfactory.3qt
index 91ce16128..c4ba9cef3 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqwidgetfactory.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqwidgetfactory.3qt
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Adding additional widget factories to be able to create custom widgets. See crea
 .PP
 This class is not included in the TQt library itself. To use it you must link against \fClibtqui.so\fR (Unix) or \fCtqui.lib\fR (Windows), which is built into \fCINSTALL/lib\fR if you built \fIQt Designer\fR (\fCINSTALL\fR is the directory where TQt is installed ).
 .PP
-If you create a QMainWindow using a TQWidgetFactory, be aware that it already has a central widget. Therefore, you need to delete this one before setting another one.
+If you create a TQMainWindow using a TQWidgetFactory, be aware that it already has a central widget. Therefore, you need to delete this one before setting another one.
 .PP
 See the "Creating Dynamic Dialogs from .ui Files" section of the TQt Designer manual for an example. See also the TQWidgetPlugin class and the Plugins documentation.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqwidgetitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqwidgetitem.3qt
index b23d2c7c9..96a1e8d1b 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqwidgetitem.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqwidgetitem.3qt
@@ -19,16 +19,16 @@ Inherits QLayoutItem.
 .BI "\fBTQWidgetItem\fR ( TQWidget * w )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBsizeHint\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBminimumSize\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBminimumSize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSize \fBmaximumSize\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSize \fBmaximumSize\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual QSizePolicy::ExpandData \fBexpanding\fR () const"
+.BI "virtual TQSizePolicy::ExpandData \fBexpanding\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual bool \fBisEmpty\fR () const"
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ See also QLayout, QLayout::widget(), Widget Appearance and Style, and Layout Man
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "TQWidgetItem::TQWidgetItem ( TQWidget * w )"
 Creates an item containing widget \fIw\fR.
-.SH "QSizePolicy::ExpandData TQWidgetItem::expanding () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSizePolicy::ExpandData TQWidgetItem::expanding () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns whether this item's widget can make use of more space than sizeHint(). A value of \fCVertical\fR or \fCHorizontal\fR means that it wants to grow in only one dimension, whereas \fCBothDirections\fR means that it wants to grow in both dimensions and \fCNoDirection\fR means that it doesn't want to grow at all.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayoutItem.
@@ -57,11 +57,11 @@ Reimplemented from QLayoutItem.
 Returns TRUE if the widget has been hidden; otherwise returns FALSE.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayoutItem.
-.SH "QSize TQWidgetItem::maximumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize TQWidgetItem::maximumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the maximum size of this item.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayoutItem.
-.SH "QSize TQWidgetItem::minimumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize TQWidgetItem::minimumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the minimum size of this item.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayoutItem.
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Reimplemented from QLayoutItem.
 Sets the geometry of this item's widget to be contained within rect \fIr\fR, taking alignment and maximum size into account.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayoutItem.
-.SH "QSize TQWidgetItem::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQSize TQWidgetItem::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the preferred size of this item.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from QLayoutItem.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqworkspace.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqworkspace.3qt
index 49d152636..0a5964ab8 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqworkspace.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqworkspace.3qt
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 '\" t
-.TH QWorkspace 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
+.TH TQWorkspace 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*-
 .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.  See the
 .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license
 .\" statement.
@@ -7,19 +7,19 @@
 .ad l
 .nh
 .SH NAME
-QWorkspace \- Workspace window that can contain decorated windows, e.g. for MDI
+TQWorkspace \- Workspace window that can contain decorated windows, e.g. for MDI
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fC#include <ntqworkspace.h>\fR
+\fC#include <tqworkspace.h>\fR
 .PP
 Inherits TQWidget.
 .PP
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBQWorkspace\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQWorkspace\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fB~QWorkspace\fR ()"
+.BI "\fB~TQWorkspace\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "enum \fBWindowOrder\fR { CreationOrder, StackingOrder }"
@@ -74,11 +74,11 @@ Inherits TQWidget.
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The QWorkspace widget provides a workspace window that can contain decorated windows, e.g. for MDI.
+The TQWorkspace widget provides a workspace window that can contain decorated windows, e.g. for MDI.
 .PP
-MDI (multiple document interface) applications typically have one main window with a menu bar and toolbar, and a central widget that is a QWorkspace. The workspace itself contains zero, one or more document windows, each of which is a widget.
+MDI (multiple document interface) applications typically have one main window with a menu bar and toolbar, and a central widget that is a TQWorkspace. The workspace itself contains zero, one or more document windows, each of which is a widget.
 .PP
-The workspace itself is an ordinary TQt widget. It has a standard constructor that takes a parent widget and an object name. The parent window is usually a QMainWindow, but it need not be.
+The workspace itself is an ordinary TQt widget. It has a standard constructor that takes a parent widget and an object name. The parent window is usually a TQMainWindow, but it need not be.
 .PP
 Document windows (i.e. MDI windows) are also ordinary TQt widgets which have the workspace as their parent widget. When you call show(), hide(), showMaximized(), setCaption(), etc. on a document window, it is shown, hidden, etc. with a frame, caption, icon and icon text, just as you'd expect. You can provide widget flags which will be used for the layout of the decoration or the behaviour of the widget itself.
 .PP
@@ -88,68 +88,68 @@ A document window becomes active when it gets the keyboard focus. You can also a
 .PP
 The convenience function windowList() returns a list of all document windows. This is useful to create a popup menu" <u>W</u>indows" on the fly, for example.
 .PP
-QWorkspace provides two built-in layout strategies for child windows: cascade() and tile(). Both are slots so you can easily connect menu entries to them.
+TQWorkspace provides two built-in layout strategies for child windows: cascade() and tile(). Both are slots so you can easily connect menu entries to them.
 .PP
 If you want your users to be able to work with document windows larger than the actual workspace, set the scrollBarsEnabled property to TRUE.
 .PP
-If the top-level window contains a menu bar and a document window is maximised, QWorkspace moves the document window's minimize, restore and close buttons from the document window's frame to the workspace window's menu bar. It then inserts a window operations menu at the far left of the menu bar.
+If the top-level window contains a menu bar and a document window is maximised, TQWorkspace moves the document window's minimize, restore and close buttons from the document window's frame to the workspace window's menu bar. It then inserts a window operations menu at the far left of the menu bar.
 .PP
 See also Main Window and Related Classes and Organizers.
 .SS "Member Type Documentation"
-.SH "QWorkspace::WindowOrder"
+.SH "TQWorkspace::WindowOrder"
 Specifies the order in which windows are returned from windowList().
 .TP
-\fCQWorkspace::CreationOrder\fR - The windows are returned in the order of their creation
+\fCTQWorkspace::CreationOrder\fR - The windows are returned in the order of their creation
 .TP
-\fCQWorkspace::StackingOrder\fR - The windows are returned in the order of their stacking
+\fCTQWorkspace::StackingOrder\fR - The windows are returned in the order of their stacking
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "QWorkspace::QWorkspace ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
+.SH "TQWorkspace::TQWorkspace ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
 Constructs a workspace with a \fIparent\fR and a \fIname\fR.
-.SH "QWorkspace::~QWorkspace ()"
+.SH "TQWorkspace::~TQWorkspace ()"
 Destroys the workspace and frees any allocated resources.
-.SH "void QWorkspace::activateNextWindow ()\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQWorkspace::activateNextWindow ()\fC [slot]\fR"
 Activates the next window in the child window chain.
 .PP
 See also activatePrevWindow().
-.SH "void QWorkspace::activatePrevWindow ()\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQWorkspace::activatePrevWindow ()\fC [slot]\fR"
 Activates the previous window in the child window chain.
 .PP
 See also activateNextWindow().
-.SH "TQWidget * QWorkspace::activeWindow () const"
+.SH "TQWidget * TQWorkspace::activeWindow () const"
 Returns the active window, or 0 if no window is active.
 .PP
 Example: mdi/application.cpp.
-.SH "void QWorkspace::cascade ()\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQWorkspace::cascade ()\fC [slot]\fR"
 Arranges all the child windows in a cascade pattern.
 .PP
 See also tile().
 .PP
 Example: mdi/application.cpp.
-.SH "void QWorkspace::closeActiveWindow ()\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQWorkspace::closeActiveWindow ()\fC [slot]\fR"
 Closes the child window that is currently active.
 .PP
 See also closeAllWindows().
-.SH "void QWorkspace::closeAllWindows ()\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQWorkspace::closeAllWindows ()\fC [slot]\fR"
 Closes all child windows.
 .PP
 The windows are closed in random order. The operation stops if a window does not accept the close event.
 .PP
 See also closeActiveWindow().
-.SH "bool QWorkspace::scrollBarsEnabled () const"
+.SH "bool TQWorkspace::scrollBarsEnabled () const"
 Returns TRUE if the workspace provides scrollbars; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "scrollBarsEnabled" property for details.
-.SH "void QWorkspace::setScrollBarsEnabled ( bool enable )"
+.SH "void TQWorkspace::setScrollBarsEnabled ( bool enable )"
 Sets whether the workspace provides scrollbars to \fIenable\fR. See the "scrollBarsEnabled" property for details.
-.SH "void QWorkspace::tile ()\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQWorkspace::tile ()\fC [slot]\fR"
 Arranges all child windows in a tile pattern.
 .PP
 See also cascade().
 .PP
 Example: mdi/application.cpp.
-.SH "void QWorkspace::windowActivated ( TQWidget * w )\fC [signal]\fR"
+.SH "void TQWorkspace::windowActivated ( TQWidget * w )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when the window widget \fIw\fR becomes active. Note that \fIw\fR can be null, and that more than one signal may be emitted for a single activation event.
 .PP
 See also activeWindow() and windowList().
-.SH "TQWidgetList QWorkspace::windowList ( WindowOrder order ) const"
+.SH "TQWidgetList TQWorkspace::windowList ( WindowOrder order ) const"
 Returns a list of all windows. If \fIorder\fR is CreationOrder (the default) the windows are listed in the order in which they had been inserted into the workspace. If \fIorder\fR is StackingOrder the windows are listed in their stacking order, with the topmost window being the last window in the list.
 .PP
 TQWidgetList is the same as TQPtrList<TQWidget>.
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ TQWidgetList is the same as TQPtrList<TQWidget>.
 See also TQPtrList.
 .PP
 Example: mdi/application.cpp.
-.SH "TQWidgetList QWorkspace::windowList () const"
+.SH "TQWidgetList TQWorkspace::windowList () const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
@@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ If this property is set to TRUE, it is possible to resize child windows over the
 Set this property's value with setScrollBarsEnabled() and get this property's value with scrollBarsEnabled().
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqworkspace.html
+.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqworkspace.html
 .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html
 .SH COPYRIGHT
 Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com.  See the